AOC L22W861 Flat Panel Television User Manual

Sommer\ Corporate\ Media\ AG
Ê7%tNs^Ë
2305844683
Order No. 6515 3065 13 Part No. 230 584 46 83 USA Edition A, 2007
Operator’s Manual SL-Class
Operator’s Manual
SL-Class
SL 550
SL 55 AMG
SL 600
SL 65 AMG
Our company and staff congratulate you
on the purchase of your new
Mercedes-Benz.
앫
Please read this manual carefully, then
return it to your vehicle where it will be
handy for your reference.
Your selection of our product is a demonstration of your trust in our company
name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your desire to own an automobile that will be as
easy as possible to operate and provide
years of service.
앫
Please follow the recommendations
contained in this manual. They are designed to acquaint you with the operation of your Mercedes-Benz.
앫
Please pay attention to the warnings
and cautions contained in this manual.
They are designed to help improve the
safety of the vehicle operator and occupants.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts of many skilled engineers and craftsmen. To help assure your driving pleasure,
and also the safety of you and your passengers, we ask you to make a small investment of time:
We extend our best wishes for many miles
of safe, pleasurable driving.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A DaimlerChrysler Company
Contents
Introduction .......................................... 9
Product information................................ 9
Operator’s Manual ............................... 10
Service and warranty information .. 10
Important notice for California
retail buyers and lessees of
Mercedes-Benz automobiles .......... 11
Maintenance .................................. 12
Roadside Assistance ...................... 12
Change of address or ownership.... 12
Operating your vehicle outside the
USA or Canada............................... 13
Where to find it.................................... 14
Symbols............................................... 15
Operating safety .................................. 16
Proper use of the vehicle ............... 16
Problems with your vehicle.................. 17
Reporting safety defects...................... 18
Reporting safety defects ................ 18
Vehicle data recording......................... 19
Information regarding electronic
recording devices........................... 19
At a glance .......................................... 21
Exterior view......................................... 22
Cockpit................................................. 24
Instrument cluster ................................ 26
Multifunction steering wheel ................ 30
Center console ..................................... 31
Upper part ...................................... 31
Lower part ...................................... 32
Overhead control panel ........................ 33
Storage compartments......................... 34
Door control panel................................ 36
Getting started...................................
Unlocking .............................................
Unlocking with the SmartKey .........
Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO*.........
Starter switch positions..................
Adjusting ..............................................
Seats ..............................................
Steering wheel................................
Mirrors............................................
Driving..................................................
Fastening the seat belts .................
Starting the engine .........................
Parking brake .................................
Driving off .......................................
Switching on headlamps.................
Turn signals ....................................
Windshield wipers...........................
Problems while driving....................
Parking and locking..............................
Parking brake .................................
Switching off headlamps.................
Turning off the engine.....................
Releasing seat belts........................
Locking ...........................................
37
38
38
39
39
42
42
45
47
49
49
52
54
54
55
56
57
59
60
61
61
62
62
63
Contents
Safety and Security ...........................
Occupant safety...................................
Air bags ..........................................
Occupant Classification System.....
Seat belts .......................................
Roll bar...........................................
Children in the vehicle....................
Panic alarm ..........................................
Activating .......................................
Deactivating ...................................
Driving safety systems.........................
ABS ................................................
BAS ................................................
ESP® ...............................................
Electro-hydraulic brake system ......
Anti-theft systems................................
Immobilizer.....................................
Anti-theft alarm system..................
Tow-away alarm .............................
65
66
68
72
77
81
83
86
86
86
87
87
89
89
92
96
96
96
98
Controls in detail .............................
Locking and unlocking .......................
SmartKey .....................................
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* ......
Opening the doors from the
inside ...........................................
Opening the trunk ........................
Closing the trunk..........................
Valet locking ................................
Trunk lid emergency release ........
Power closing assist for trunk lid .
Automatic central locking ............
Locking and unlocking from the
inside ...........................................
Seats .................................................
Moving the seats forward and
backward .....................................
Lumbar support............................
Multicontour backrest*................
Seat heating.................................
Seat ventilation* ..........................
Memory function ...............................
Storing positions into memory .....
Recalling positions from memory.
101
102
102
105
111
111
113
117
117
118
119
119
121
121
121
122
123
125
126
127
127
Lighting ............................................
Exterior lamp switch ....................
Corner-illuminating front fog
lamps ...........................................
Combination switch .....................
Hazard warning flasher ................
Interior lighting ............................
Courtesy lighting..........................
Trunk lamp...................................
Instrument cluster .............................
Adjusting instrument cluster
illumination ..................................
Coolant temperature gauge .........
Trip odometer ..............................
Tachometer..................................
Outside temperature indicator.....
Control system ..................................
Multifunction display....................
Multifunction steering wheel........
Menus..........................................
Standard display menu ................
AMG menu ...................................
AUDIO menu ................................
NAV menu....................................
Distronic* menu ..........................
128
128
132
133
133
134
135
135
136
136
137
137
138
138
139
139
140
142
145
146
149
151
151
Contents
Vehicle status message memory
menu............................................
Settings menu..............................
Trip computer menu.....................
TEL menu* ...................................
Automatic transmission.....................
Gear selector lever position .........
Driving tips...................................
Gear ranges .................................
Automatic shift program ..............
Gear selector lever one-touch
gearshifting ..................................
Steering wheel gearshift control
one-touch gearshifting* ...............
Manual shift program
(SL 55 AMG and SL 65 AMG only)
Emergency operation
(Limp-Home Mode) ......................
Good visibility ....................................
Headlamp cleaning system ..........
Rear view mirrors .........................
Sun visors ....................................
Rear window defroster .................
152
153
163
165
168
170
171
172
173
174
175
177
179
180
180
180
182
183
Automatic climate control .................. 184
Deactivating the automatic
climate control system ................. 187
Operating the automatic climate
control system in automatic mode 187
Setting the temperature................ 188
Adjusting air distribution............... 189
Adjusting air volume ..................... 190
Maximum cooling MAXCOOL ........ 190
Front defroster.............................. 190
Air recirculation mode .................. 191
Air conditioning............................. 193
Residual heat and ventilation........ 194
Ventilated glove box ..................... 195
Power windows .................................. 196
Opening and closing the
windows........................................ 196
Synchronizing power windows ...... 198
Retractable hardtop............................ 199
Opening and closing the
retractable hardtop....................... 199
Driving systems.................................. 209
Cruise control ............................... 209
Distronic* ..................................... 213
Distance warning function* .......... 224
Active Body Control (ABC) ............ 225
Parktronic system*
(Parking assist) ............................. 228
Useful features................................... 233
Storage compartments ................. 233
Cup holders .................................. 238
Ashtray ......................................... 239
Cigarette lighter............................ 239
Heated steering wheel* ................ 240
Load assist in the trunk ................ 241
Power outlet ................................. 242
Telephone* ................................... 243
Tele Aid......................................... 244
Garage door opener...................... 251
Contents
Operation .........................................
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) .........
Driving instructions............................
Drive sensibly – save fuel .............
Drinking and driving .....................
Pedals ..........................................
Power assistance .........................
Brakes ..........................................
Driving off.....................................
Parking .........................................
Tires .............................................
Hydroplaning ................................
Tire traction..................................
Tire speed rating ..........................
Winter driving instructions ...........
Standing water .............................
Passenger compartment ..............
Driving abroad..............................
Control and operation of radio
transmitters..................................
Catalytic converter .......................
Emission control...........................
Coolant temperature ....................
257
258
259
259
259
259
260
260
262
263
263
264
265
265
266
267
268
268
268
269
269
270
At the gas station ..............................
Refueling ......................................
Check regularly and before a
long trip........................................
Engine compartment .........................
Hood ............................................
Engine oil .....................................
Transmission fluid level................
Oil level in the ABC system ..........
Coolant ........................................
Battery .........................................
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system...........
Tires and wheels................................
Important guidelines ....................
Tire care and maintenance...........
Direction of rotation.....................
Loading the vehicle ......................
Recommended tire inflation
pressure.......................................
Checking tire inflation pressure ...
MOExtended system* ..................
Tire labeling..................................
Load identification .......................
DOT, Tire Identification Number
(TIN) .............................................
271
271
272
274
274
275
279
279
280
281
282
283
283
284
286
286
291
292
301
302
306
307
Maximum tire load .......................
Maximum tire inflation pressure ..
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards (U.S. vehicles).............
Tire ply material ...........................
Tire and loading terminology........
Rotating tires ...............................
Winter driving ....................................
Winter tires ..................................
Block heater (Canada only) ..........
Snow chains.................................
Maintenance......................................
Maintenance service indicator
message ......................................
Calling up the maintenance
service indicator display ..............
Resetting the maintenance
service indicator ..........................
Vehicle care.......................................
Cleaning and care of the vehicle ..
308
309
309
311
312
315
316
316
317
318
319
319
320
321
322
322
Contents
Practical hints .................................
What to do if … ..................................
Lamps in the instrument cluster ..
Air bag off indicator lamp.............
Vehicle status messages in the
multifunction display....................
Where will I find ...? ...........................
First aid kit ...................................
Vehicle tool kit, jack, and spare
wheel ...........................................
Locking/unlocking in an
emergency.........................................
Unlocking the vehicle...................
Locking the vehicle ......................
Lowering the load assist manually
Replacing SmartKey batteries ...........
Replacing bulbs .................................
Bulbs ............................................
Replacing bulbs for front lamps ...
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps.....
Replacing wiper blades......................
Placing wiper arms in vertical
position ........................................
Removing wiper blades ................
Installing wiper blades .................
331
332
332
345
347
388
388
388
391
391
393
394
395
397
397
399
402
403
403
404
404
Flat tire............................................... 405
Preparing the vehicle .................... 405
Mounting the spare wheel ............ 405
MOExtended system* ................... 413
Batteries............................................. 414
Disconnecting the batteries.......... 416
Removing the batteries................. 417
Charging and reinstalling
batteries ....................................... 417
Reconnecting the batteries........... 418
Jump starting...................................... 419
Towing the vehicle.............................. 421
Installing towing eye bolt .............. 423
Fuses.................................................. 424
Fuse boxes in engine
compartment ................................ 425
Fuse box in passenger
compartment ................................ 426
Fuse in trunk................................. 426
Emergency engine shut-down ....... 426
Technical data .................................. 427
Parts service ...................................... 428
Warranty coverage ............................. 429
Loss of Service and Warranty
Information Booklet ...................... 429
Identification labels ............................ 430
Layout of poly-V-belt drive.................. 432
SL 550 .......................................... 432
SL 55 AMG ................................... 432
SL 600, SL 65 AMG ...................... 432
Engine ................................................ 433
Rims and tires .................................... 435
Same size tires ............................. 436
Mixed size tires............................. 437
MOExtended tires* ....................... 439
Spare wheel.................................. 440
Electrical system ................................ 441
Main dimensions ................................ 442
Weights .............................................. 443
Contents
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. .........
Capacities ....................................
Engine oils....................................
Engine oil additives ......................
Air conditioning refrigerant ..........
Brake fluid ....................................
Premium unleaded gasoline .........
Fuel requirements ........................
Gasoline additives ........................
Coolants.......................................
Windshield and headlamp
washer system .............................
444
444
446
446
446
447
447
448
448
449
452
Index ................................................. 453
Introduction
Product information
왔 Product information
Please observe the following in your own
best interest:
We recommend using Genuine
Mercedes-Benz parts as well as conversion
parts and accessories explicitly approved
by us for your vehicle model.
We have tested these parts to determine
their reliability, safety and special suitability for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
We are unable to make an assessment for
other products and therefore cannot be
held responsible for them, even if in individual cases an official approval or authorization by governmental or other agencies
should exist. Use of such parts and accessories could adversely affect the safety,
performance or reliability of your vehicle.
Please do not use them.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts as well as
conversion parts and accessories approved by us are available at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center where you will
receive comprehensive information, also
on permissible technical modifications,
and where proper installation will be performed.
9
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
This Operator’s Manual contains a great
deal of useful information. We urge you to
read it carefully and familiarize yourself
with the vehicle before driving.
For your own safety and longer service life
of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the instructions and warnings contained in this
manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you
or others. Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Your vehicle may have some or all of the
equipment described in this manual.
Therefore, you may find explanations for
optional equipment not installed in your
vehicle. If you have any questions about
the operation of any equipment, your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
glad to demonstrate the proper procedures.
10
We continuously strive to improve our
product, and ask for your understanding
that we reserve the right to make changes
in design and equipment. Therefore, information, illustrations, and descriptions in
this Operator’s Manual might differ from
your vehicle.
Service and warranty information
앫
New Car Limited Warranty,
Optional equipment is also described in
this manual, including operating instructions wherever necessary. Since they are
special-order items, the descriptions and
illustrations herein may vary slightly from
the actual equipment of your vehicle.
앫
Emission System Warranty,
앫
Emission Performance Warranty,
앫
California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont Emission Control System
Warranty
(California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont only),
앫
State Warranty Enforcement Laws
(Lemon Laws).
If there are any equipment details that are
not shown or described in this Operator’s
Manual, your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center will be glad to inform you of correct
care and operating procedures.
The Operator’s Manual and Maintenance
Booklet are important documents and
should be kept with the vehicle.
The Service and Warranty Information
Booklet contains detailed information
about the warranties covering your
Mercedes-Benz, including:
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Important notice for California
retail buyers and lessees of
Mercedes-Benz automobiles
Under California law you may be entitled to
a replacement of your vehicle or a refund
of the purchase price or lease price, if
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix
one or more substantial defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by
its express warranty after a reasonable
number of repair attempts. During the period of 18 months from original delivery of
the vehicle or the accumulation of
18000 miles (approx. 29000 km) on the
odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs
first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or
lessee if one or more of the following occurs:
(1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that is
likely to cause death or serious bodily
injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has been subject to
repair two or more times, and you have
directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA,
LLC in writing of the need for its repair,
(2) the same substantial defect or malfunction of a less serious nature than
category (1) has been subject to repair
four or more times and you have directly notified us in writing of the need for
its repair, or
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason
of repair of the same or different substantial defects or malfunctions for a
cumulative total of more than
30 calendar days.
Written notification should be sent to us,
not a dealer, at Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC,
Customer Assistance Center, One
Mercedes Drive, Montvale, NJ
07645-0350.
11
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Maintenance
Roadside Assistance
Change of address or ownership
The Maintenance Booklet describes all the
necessary maintenance work which should
be performed at regular intervals.
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
Program provides factory trained technical
help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to
the toll-free Roadside Assistance number:
If you change your address, be sure to
send in the “Change of Address Notice”
found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or simply call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (in the USA) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It is in
your own interest that we can contact you
should the need arise.
Always have the Maintenance Booklet with
you when you take the vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for service. The service advisor will record each
service in the booklet for you.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
will be answered by Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Representatives
24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
For additional information refer to the
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
Program brochure in your vehicle literature
portfolio.
12
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all
literature with the vehicle to make it available to the next operator.
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to
send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used
Car” found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes,
or Customer Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Operating your vehicle outside the USA
or Canada
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aware that:
Certain Mercedes-Benz models are available for delivery in Europe under our European Delivery Program. For details, consult
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
write to:
앫
Service facilities or replacement parts
may not be readily available,
In the USA:
앫
unleaded gasoline for vehicles with catalytic converters may not be available;
the use of leaded fuels will damage the
catalysts,
앫
gasoline may have a considerably lower octane rating, and improper fuel can
cause engine damage.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
European Delivery Department
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
European Delivery Department
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
13
Introduction
Where to find it
This Operator’s Manual is designed to provide comprehensive support information
for you, the vehicle operator. Each section
has its own reference color:
At a glance
Here you will find an overview of all the
controls that can be operated from the
driver’s seat.
Controls in detail
Technical data
Here you will find detailed information
about the equipment installed on your vehicle. This section expands on the “Getting
started” section and also describes technical innovations. If you are already familiar
with the basic functions of your vehicle,
this section will be of particular interest to
you.
All important technical data for your vehicle can be found in this section.
Getting started
Operation
Here you will find all the information you
need for your first drive. You should read
this section first if this is your first
Mercedes-Benz vehicle or if you are renting or borrowing this vehicle.
Here you will find all the information you
need for the proper operation of your vehicle.
Practical hints
Safety and Security
Here you will find descriptions of the safety
and security features in your vehicle.
14
This section provides fast assistance for
dealing with problems you may encounter.
Indexes
The table of contents and the index are designed to help you find information quickly
and easily.
The following publications are part of your
vehicle documentation:
앫
this Operator’s Manual
앫
the Maintenance Booklet
Separate operating instructions will be
provided as required depending on the
equipment options installed in your vehicle.
Introduction
Symbols
왔 Symbols
Trademarks:
앫
앫
ESP® is a registered trademark of
DaimlerChrysler.
HomeLink® is a registered trademark
of Prince, a Johnson Controls
Company.
Warning!
G
Warning notices draw your attention to hazards that may endanger your health or life,
or the health or life of others.
The following symbols are found in this
Operator’s Manual:
! Highlights hazards that may result in dam-
*
i Helpful hints or further information you may
Optional equipment is identified
with an asterisk. Since standard
equipment varies between models,
the descriptions and illustrations in
this manual may differ slightly from
the actual equipment of your vehicle.
왘
This symbol points to instructions for
you to follow.
왘
A number of these symbols appearing
in succession indicates a multiple-step
procedure.
컄 Page
This symbol tells you where to
look for further information on a
topic.
컄컄
This continuation symbol indicates a procedure which will be
continued on the next page.
컄컄
This continuation symbol indicates a warning which will be
continued on the next page.
Display
Words appearing in the multifunction display are printed in
the type shown here.
age to your vehicle.
find useful.
15
Introduction
Operating safety
Warning!
G
Work improperly carried out on electronic
components and associated software could
cause them to cease functioning. Because
the vehicle’s electronic components are interconnected, any modifications made may
produce an undesired effect on other systems. Electronic malfunctions could seriously impair the operating safety of your
vehicle.
See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for repairs or modifications to electronic
components.
Other improper work or modifications on the
vehicle could also have a negative impact on
the operating safety of the vehicle.
Some safety systems only function while the
engine is running. You should therefore never turn off the engine while driving.
16
Warning!
G
Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody
or tires/wheels, for example when running
over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole,
may cause serious damage and impair the
operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel a
sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect that damage to your
vehicle has occurred, you should turn on
your hazard warning flashers, carefully slow
down, and drive with caution to an area
which is a safe distance from the road.
Inspect the vehicle underbody and
tires/wheels for possible damage. If the vehicle appears unsafe, have it towed to the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or other qualified maintenance or repair facility for further inspection or repairs.
Proper use of the vehicle
Proper use of the vehicle requires that you
are familiar with the following information
and rules:
앫
the safety precautions in this manual
앫
the “Technical data” section in this
manual
앫
traffic rules and regulations
앫
motor vehicle laws and safety standards
Warning!
G
Various warning labels are attached to your
vehicle. These warning labels are intended
to make you and others aware of various
risks. You should not remove any of these
warning labels unless explicitly instructed to
do so by information on the label itself. Removal of any of these labels may cause you
and others to be unaware of certain risks
which may result in an accident and/or personal injury.
Introduction
Problems with your vehicle
왔 Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to
immediately contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is
not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center management, or if necessary contact us
at one of the following addresses:
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
17
Introduction
Reporting safety defects
For the USA only:
The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
“National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
Reporting safety defects
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer,
or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
18
Introduction
Vehicle data recording
왔 Vehicle data recording
Information regarding electronic
recording devices
(Including notice pursuant to California Code § 9951)
Please note that your vehicle is equipped with devices that can record vehicle systems data and, if equipped with the Tele Aid system,
may transmit some data in certain accidents.
This information helps, for example, to diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and to continuously improve vehicle safety.
DaimlerChrysler may access the information and share it with others
앫
for safety research or vehicle diagnosis purposes
앫
with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee
앫
in response to an official request by law enforcement or other government agency
앫
for use in dispute resolution involving DaimlerChrysler, its affiliates or sales/service organization and/or
앫
as otherwise required or permitted by law.
Please check the Tele Aid subscription service agreement for details regarding the information that may be recorded or transmitted
via that system.
19
20
At a glance
Exterior view
Cockpit
Instrument cluster
Multifunction steering wheel
Center console
Overhead control panel
Storage compartments
Door control panel
21
At a glance
Exterior view
22
At a glance
Exterior view
Item
Page
1 Trunk
Item
7 Towing
Item
Page
423
a Headlamp cleaning
system
180,
282
283
b Front lamps
398
292
c Windshield wipers
421
Opening the trunk
111
Closing the trunk
113
Spare wheel
388
Vehicle tool kit
388
Checking tire inflation
pressure
2 Rear lamps
398
Run Flat Indicator*
293
3 Rear window defroster
183
295
4 Fuel filler flap
271
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)
Refueling
271
298
Gasoline
447
Advanced Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
(Advanced TPMS)*
General information
283
Opening/closing
199
5 Doors
Installing towing eye bolt
Page
8 Tires and wheels
57
Wiper blades, replacing
403
Wiper blades, cleaning
326
d Windshield
Cleaning with wiper fluid
Cleaning
58
326
e Retractable hardtop
Locking and unlocking
102
Flat tire
405
Wind screen
204
Opening and closing
111
Vehicle tool kit
388
Luggage cover
205
Locking/unlocking in an
emergency
391
Sunshade for panorama
roof*
208
6 Exterior rear view mirrors
Adjusting
Auto-dimming rear view
mirrors
48
180
9 Hood
Opening
274
Engine oil
275
Coolant
280,
449
23
At a glance
Cockpit
24
At a glance
Cockpit
Item
1 Exterior lamp switch
2 Headlamp washer button
Page
55, 128
180
3 Cruise control lever
앫
Cruise control
209
앫
Distronic*
213
4 Shift paddle*: downshift
175
5 Instrument cluster
26, 136
6 Multifunction steering
wheel
30, 140
7 Shift paddle*: upshift
175
Page
a Digital clock
76
c Interior storage compartments (locking/unlocking)
235
d Overhead control panel
e Glove box
f Center console
g Starter switch
Item
Page
k Combination switch
b Front passenger front
air bag off indicator lamp
33
233
31, 32
41
h Horn
j Steering wheel adjustment
stalk
Heated steering wheel*
8 Lever for voice control
system*, see separate
operating instructions
9 Front Parktronic* warning
indicator
Item
45
앫
Turn signals
56
앫
Windshield wipers
57
앫
High beam
l Parking brake pedal
m Parking brake release handle
133
54, 61
54
n Hood lock release
274
o Door control panel
36
p Power window switch
196
240
230
25
At a glance
Instrument cluster
26
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Item
Page
Item
1 Coolant temperature
gauge with:
D Coolant temperature
warning lamp
E Distronic* indicator
lamp1 (white) or
distance warning
lamp (red)
337
56
K Right turn signal indicator lamp
56
; Brake warning lamp,
USA only
335
3 Brake warning lamp,
Canada only
335
v ABS/ESP® warning
lamp
332
213,
339
3 Left multifunction display
with:
2 Speedometer with:
L Left turn signal indicator lamp
Page
1
앫
Trip odometer
앫
Main odometer
앫
Stored speed for
137
앫
Cruise control
209
앫
Distronic*
151,
213
Item
Page
4 Reset button for:
앫
Resetting trip odometer
137
앫
Resetting individual settings
153
앫
Adjusting instrument
cluster illumination
136
Vehicles without Distronic*: Warning/indicator
lamp without function. It illuminates when the ignition is on. It should go out when the engine is running.
27
At a glance
Instrument cluster
28
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Item
5 Tachometer with:
Page
Item
Page
138
< Seat belt telltale
341
A High beam headlamp indicator
133
343
ú Engine malfunction
indicator lamp, USA
only
336
X Combination low tire
pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale,
USA only
Low tire pressure
telltale*,
Canada only
± Engine malfunction
indicator lamp,
Canada only
C Roll bar warning
lamp
340
- Antilock Brake System (ABS) indicator
lamp
334
1 Supplemental
Restraint System
(SRS) indicator lamp
342
6 Right multifunction
display with:
앫
Gear selector lever
position
170
앫
Outside temperature
display
138
앫
Program mode
169
7 Fuel gauge with:
A Fuel reserve warning
lamp
339
29
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel
Item
1 Left multifunction display in
the speedometer
139
2 Right multifunction display
in the tachometer
139
Operating the control system
3 Selecting the submenu or
setting the volume:
Press button
ç down/to decrease
æ up/to increase
4 Telephone*:
Press button
s to take a call
t to end a call
30
Page
Item
5 Menu systems:
Press button
ÿ for previous menu
è for next menu
140
6 Moving within a menu:
Press button
j for next display
k for previous display
Page
At a glance
Center console
왔 Center console
Upper part
Item
Page
1 Central locking switch
119
2 Hazard warning flasher
on/off switch
133
3 Central unlocking switch
120
4 Center and side air vent
adjustment
189
5 COMAND system, see separate operating instructions
6 Right cup holder
238
7 KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button
40
8 Automatic climate control
panel
184
9 Ashtray
Cigarette lighter
239
239
a Left cup holder
238
31
At a glance
Center console
Lower part
32
Item
Page
Item
1 Gear selector lever for
automatic transmission
173
7 ABC vehicle level control
button
2 Parktronic system*
deactivation switch
228
8 ESP® switch
Page
225
91
9 Thumbwheel for setting following distance for
Distronic*
221
225
a Distance warning function*
on/off switch
224
5 Tow-away alarm switch
98
177
6 Retractable hardtop
open/close switch with
buttons for roll bar
199,
81
b Program mode selector
switch for automatic transmission
3 Exterior rear view mirror
adjustment
47
4 ABC suspension tuning
button
At a glance
Overhead control panel
왔 Overhead control panel
Item
Page
1 Left reading lamp on/off
134
2 Temperature sensor for
automatic climate control
184
3 Right reading lamp on/off
134
4 Interior lighting control
134
5 Interior rear view mirror
47, 180
6 Reading lamp
134
7 Garage door opener
251
8 Tele Aid (emergency call
system) button
244
33
At a glance
Storage compartments
34
At a glance
Storage compartments
Item
Page
Item
Page
1 Glove box
233
2 Passenger seat storage
compartment
234
7 Navigation computer (refer to separate Operator’s
Manual)
388
8 Rear storage compartment, driver’s side
235
9 Door storage compartment
233
a Driver’s seat storage compartment
234
b Parcel net in passenger
footwell
236
c Armrest storage compartment
234
Armrest storage tray
234
First aid kit
3 Door storage compartment
233
4 Rear storage compartment, passenger side
235
CD changer
5 Side storage compartment
in trunk, parcel net
235
237
6 Trunk
Vehicle tool kit, jack, spare
wheel
388
Load assist
241
Luggage cover
205
Trunk load
443
Load limit
288
d Luggage straps
237
35
At a glance
Door control panel
Item
1 Inside door handle
111
2 Switches for opening/closing door and rear side windows
196
3 Storing seat, mirror and
steering wheel settings
(Memory function)
126
4 Seat heating switch
123
Seat ventilation* switch
125
5 Seat adjustment switch
42,
121
6 Remote trunk opening
switch
112
Remote trunk opening/closing* switch
36
Page
113
Getting started
Unlocking
Adjusting
Driving
Parking and locking
37
Getting started
Unlocking
The “Getting started” section provides an
overview of the vehicle’s most basic functions. First-time Mercedes-Benz owners
should pay special attention to the information given here.
Unlocking with the SmartKey
Enter the vehicle and insert the
SmartKey in the starter switch.
Warning!
If you are already familiar with the basic
functions described here, the “Controls in
detail” section will provide you with further
information. The corresponding page references are located at the end of each segment.
SmartKey with remote control
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause
an accident and/or serious personal injury.
1 ‹ Lock button
2 Š Unlock button for trunk lid
3 ΠUnlock button
4 Â Panic button
i Opening a door causes the windows on that
side of the car to open slightly. They will return to
the up-position when the door is closed.
왘
For more information, see “SmartKey”
(컄 page 102).
Press unlock button Πon the
SmartKey.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
locking knobs in the doors move up.
The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.
The electro-hydraulic brake system is
activated.
38
왘
Getting started
Unlocking
왘
Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO*
With the KEYLESS-GO function, you can
lock and unlock the vehicle without using
the remote control buttons on the
SmartKey and start the engine without inserting the SmartKey in the starter switch.
The function of the SmartKey overrules the
KEYLESS-GO function.
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
i To unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO must be outside the vehicle, no
further than approx. 3 feet (1 meter) away from
the door.
Grasp an outside door handle.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
locking knobs on the doors move up.
The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.
The electro-hydraulic brake system is
activated.
i If the vehicle has been parked for more than
72 hours, you must pull an outside door handle
in order to activate the KEYLESS-GO function.
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is inside
the vehicle, pressing the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button on the gear selector lever corresponds to turning the SmartKey
to the various starter switch positions
(컄 page 40).
Starter switch positions
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take
it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
i Opening a door causes the windows on that
side of the car to open slightly. They will return to
the up-position when the door is closed.
For more information, see “SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*” (컄 page 105).
39
Getting started
Unlocking
SmartKey
If a lamp in the instrument cluster remains on after starting the engine or
comes on while driving, refer to “Lamps
in the instrument cluster”
(컄 page 332).
3 Starting position
i When you switch on the ignition, the indica-
Starter switch
0 For removing SmartKey
1 Power supply for some electrical consumers, such as seat adjustment
2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical
consumers) and driving position
All lamps (except high beam headlamp
indicator lamp and turn signal indicator
lamps unless activated) in the instrument cluster come on. If a lamp in the
instrument cluster fails to come on
when the ignition is switched on, have
it checked and replaced if necessary.
40
tor and warning lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator
lamps unless activated) in the instrument cluster
come on. The indicator and warning lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and
turn signal indicator lamps if activated) should go
out when the engine is running. This indicates
that the respective systems are operational.
! If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the
starter switch, the starter battery may not be
sufficiently charged.
앫
Check the starter battery and charge it if
necessary (컄 page 414).
앫
Get a jump start (컄 page 419).
To prevent accelerated battery discharge or a
completely discharged battery, always remove
the SmartKey from the starter switch when the
engine is not in operation.
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
i The SmartKey can only be removed from the
starter switch with the gear selector lever in
position P.
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
1 USA only
2 Canada only
Getting started
Unlocking
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
located in the vehicle.
왘
Make sure the gear selector lever is set
to P.
왘
Do not depress the brake pedal.
Position 0
Before you press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button, the vehicle’s on-board
electronics have the status 0 (as with
SmartKey removed).
Position 1
왘
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button once.
This supplies power for some electrical
consumers, such as seat adjustment.
i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button
앫
once again, the ignition (position 2) is
switched on
앫
twice, the power supply is again switched off
Ignition (or Position 2)
왘
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button twice.
This supplies power for all electrical
consumers. All lamps (except high
beam headlamp indicator lamp and
turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) in the instrument cluster come
on.
For more information, see “SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*” (컄 page 105).
For information on starting the engine using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button,
see “Starting with KEYLESS-GO*”
(컄 page 53).
i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button once, the power supply is
again switched off.
i When you switch on the ignition, the indicator and warning lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator
lamps unless activated) in the instrument cluster
come on. The indicator and warning lamps
(except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and
turn signal indicator lamps if activated) should go
out when the engine is running. This indicates
that the respective systems are operational.
41
Getting started
Adjusting
Warning!
G
All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and
rear view mirror adjustments, as well as fastening of seat belts, must be done before
the vehicle is put into motion.
Seats
Warning!
Warning!
G
Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving.
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined position
as this can be dangerous. You could slide
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or
fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat
belts provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in a nearly upright position and
belts are properly positioned on the body.
Your seat must be adjusted so that you can
correctly fasten your seat belt (컄 page 49).
Never place hands under the seat or near
any moving parts while a seat is being adjusted.
42
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take
it with you, and lock the vehicle.
Even with the SmartKey or the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO* removed from the starter switch or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle,
the power seats can be operated when the
respective door is open. Therefore, do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
Getting started
Adjusting
Warning!
G
Children 12 years old and under must be
seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant or child restraint recommended
for the size and weight of the child.
Seat adjustment
The seat adjustment switch is located in
the door.
Seat fore and aft adjustment
왘
The infant or child restraint must be properly
secured with the vehicle’s seat belt fully in
accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
i The memory function (컄 page 126) lets you
store the settings for the seat position together
with the settings for the steering wheel and the
exterior rear view mirrors.
1 Head restraint height
2 Seat height
3 Seat cushion tilt
4 Seat cushion depth
5 Seat fore and aft adjustment
6 Seat backrest tilt
왘
Press the switch forward or backward
in direction of arrow 5.
Adjust seat to a comfortable seating
position that still allows you to reach
the accelerator/brake pedal safely.
The position should be as far to the rear
as possible, consistent with ability to
properly operate controls.
! When moving the seats, make sure there are
no items in the footwell or behind the seats.
Otherwise you could damage the seats.
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
or
왘
Open the respective door.
43
Getting started
Adjusting
Seat height
Head restraint height
왘
왘
Press the switch up or down in
direction of arrow 2.
Seat cushion tilt
왘
Press the switch up or down in
direction of arrow 3 until your upper
legs are lightly supported.
Seat cushion depth
왘
Press the switch forward or backward
in direction of arrow 4 until your legs
are supported comfortably.
Seat backrest tilt
왘
Press the switch forward or backward
in direction of arrow 6 until your arms
are slightly angled when holding the
steering wheel.
Head restraint tilt
Press the switch up or down in
direction of arrow 1.
Warning!
G
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint so that it is as close to
the head as possible and the center of the
head restraint supports the back of the head
at eye level. This will reduce the potential for
injury to the head and neck in the event of
an accident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident.
i When moving the seat fore or aft after adjusting the head restraints, the head restraints
may readjust automatically.
44
Manually adjust the angle of the head restraint.
왘
Push or pull on the lower edge of the
head restraint cushion.
For more information on seats, see “Seats”
(컄 page 121).
Getting started
Adjusting
Steering wheel
Warning!
G
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving could cause the driver to lose control of
the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take
it with you, and lock the vehicle.
Even with the SmartKey or the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO* removed from the
starter switch or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle,
the steering wheel adjustment feature can
be operated when the driver’s door is open.
Therefore, do not leave children unattended
in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
i The memory function (컄 page 126) lets you
Steering wheel adjustment
store the settings for the steering wheel together
with the settings for the seat position and the
exterior rear view mirrors.
The steering wheel adjustment stalk is
located on the lower left of the steering
column.
Make sure that
앫
you can reach the steering wheel with
your arms slightly bent at the elbows
앫
you can move your legs freely
앫
all displays (including malfunction and
indicator lamps) on the instrument
cluster are clearly visible
1 Adjusting steering wheel, in or out
2 Adjusting steering wheel, up or down
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
or
왘
Open the driver’s door.
45
Getting started
Adjusting
Adjusting steering wheel in or out
Easy-entry/exit feature
왘
This feature allows for easier entry into and
exit from the vehicle. When entering and
exiting the vehicle, the steering wheel is in
its uppermost position.
Move stalk forward or back in direction
of arrow 1 until a comfortable steering wheel position is reached with your
arms slightly bent at the elbow.
Adjusting steering wheel up or down
왘
Move stalk up or down in direction of
arrow 2.
For more information, see “Heated steering wheel*” (컄 page 240).
The easy-entry/exit feature can be activated or deactivated in the Convenience submenu of the control system (컄 page 162).
Warning!
G
You must make sure no one can become
trapped or injured by the moving steering
wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is
activated.
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could open the driver’s door and
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
feature, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,
the steering wheel will return to its last set
position when you:
앫
or
앫
To stop steering wheel adjustment, do one
of the following:
46
앫
Move steering wheel adjustment stalk
(컄 page 45).
앫
Press one of the memory position buttons* or the memory button M*
(컄 page 126).
close the driver’s door with the ignition
switched on
insert the SmartKey into the starter
switch or press the KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button (컄 page 40) once
with the driver’s door closed
i The last set steering wheel position is stored
when
앫
the ignition is switched off (컄 page 39)
앫
the position is stored in memory
(컄 page 126)
Getting started
Adjusting
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,
the steering wheel tilts upwards when you
앫
remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch
or
앫
open the driver’s door with the
SmartKey in starter switch position 0
or 1 or the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button in position 1 (컄 page 40)
i If the current position for the steering wheel
is in the uppermost tilt position, the steering
wheel will no longer be able to move upward
when the easy-entry/exit feature is activated.
The adjustment procedure is briefly interrupted
when the engine is started.
Warning!
G
Let the system complete the adjustment
procedure before setting the vehicle in motion. All steering wheel adjustment must be
completed before setting the vehicle in motion. Driving off with the steering wheel still
adjusting could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Mirrors
Adjust the interior and exterior rear view
mirrors before driving so that you have a
good view of the road and traffic conditions.
Warning!
G
In case of an accident, liquid electrolyte may
escape the mirror housing if the mirror glass
breaks.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.
! Electrolyte drops coming into contact with
the vehicle paint finish can only be completely
removed while in their liquid state and by applying plenty of water.
47
Getting started
Adjusting
Interior rear view mirror
왘
Manually adjust the interior rear view
mirror.
The buttons are located on the lower part
of the center console.
For more information, see “Rear view mirrors” (컄 page 180).
Exterior rear view mirrors
Warning!
pushed forward (hit from the rear) or forcibly
pushed rearward (hit from the front), reposition
it by applying firm pressure until it snaps into
place. The mirror housing is then properly positioned and you can adjust the mirror in the usual
manner.
i At low ambient temperatures, the exterior
rear view mirrors will be heated automatically.
G
Exercise care when using the passenger
side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your interior rear view mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.
48
! If an exterior rear view mirror was forcibly
i The memory function (컄 page 126) lets you
1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror
button
2 Passenger-side exterior rear view mirror button
3 Adjustment button
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
왘
Press button 1 or button 2 to select
the desired exterior rear view mirror.
왘
Push adjustment button 3 up, down,
left, or right according to the desired
setting.
store the setting for the exterior rear view mirrors together with the settings for the steering
wheel and the seat position.
For more information, see “Good visibility”
(컄 page 180).
Getting started
Driving
왔 Driving
Warning!
G
Make sure that absolutely no objects are obstructing the pedal’s range of movement.
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obstacles. If there are any floormats or carpets in
the footwell, make sure the pedals still have
sufficient clearance.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers, the objects could get caught between
the pedals. You could then no longer brake
or accelerate. This could lead to accidents
or injury.
Fastening the seat belts
Warning!
G
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure your passengers are
properly restrained, even pregnant women.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
accident. You and your passenger should always wear seat belts.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are wearing your
seat belt. The air bags can only provide the
protection they were designed to afford if
the occupants are using their seat belts
(컄 page 66).
Warning!
G
Children 12 years old and under must be
seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant, or toddler restraint, or booster
seat recommended for the size and weight
of the child. For additional information, see
“Children in the vehicle” (컄 page 83).
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
49
Getting started
Driving
Warning!
G
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Be sure
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt. Never use
a seat belt for more than one person at a
time.
Warning!
G
Read and observe the additional warning notices in the “Safety and Security” section
(컄 page 77).
G
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined position
as this can be dangerous. You could slide
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or
even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
seat belt provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in a nearly upright position and the
belt is properly positioned on the body.
50
Warning!
1 Seat belt housing
2 Latch plate
3 Buckle
4 Release button
왘
With a smooth motion, pull the belt
from seat belt housing 1.
왘
Place the shoulder portion of the belt
across the top of your shoulder and the
lap portion across your hips.
왘
Push latch plate 2 into buckle 3 until
it clicks.
왘
If necessary, tighten the lap portion to
a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion
up.
왘
To release the seat belt, press release
button 4 and guide latch plate back to
seat belt housing 1.
Getting started
Driving
Proper use of seat belts
앫
Do not twist the belt when fastening.
앫
Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder
portion is located as close as possible
to the middle of the shoulder (it should
not touch the neck). Never pass the
shoulder portion of the belt under your
arm.
앫
Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips (over hip joint) and not
across the abdomen.
앫
Place the seat backrest in a nearly upright position.
앫
Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time.
앫
앫
앫
Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another object at the same
time. When using a seat belt to secure
infant or toddler restraints or children
in booster seats, always follow the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions
Check your seat belt during travel to
make sure that it is properly
positioned.
Make sure the seat belt is always fitted
snugly. Take special care of this when
wearing loose clothing.
Warning!
G
Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They
could tear.
Do not allow the belt to get caught in the
door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.
This could damage the belt.
Never attempt to make modifications to
seat belts. This could impair the effectiveness of the belts.
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash, they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
stressed in an accident must be replaced.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
51
Getting started
Driving
Starting the engine
Warning!
Automatic transmission
G
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and possible death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
have the cause determined and corrected
immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive with at least one window
fully open.
Gearshift pattern for automatic
transmission
P Park position with gear selector lever
lock
R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Drive position
For more information, see “Automatic
transmission” (컄 page 168).
52
Starting with the SmartKey
왘
Make sure the gear selector lever is set
to P.
왘
Do not depress the accelerator.
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 3 and hold until the engine
starts (컄 page 40).
i You can also use the “touch-start” function.
Turn the SmartKey to position 3 and release it
again immediately. The engine then starts automatically.
For information on turning off the engine
with the SmartKey, see “Turning off with
the SmartKey” (컄 page 62).
Getting started
Driving
Starting with KEYLESS-GO*
You can start your vehicle without the
SmartKey in the starter switch using the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the
gear selector lever.
왘
Depress the brake pedal during the
starting procedure. Do not depress accelerator.
왘
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button once.
왘
If you are starting the engine with
KEYLESS-GO*: Close any doors that
may be open to allow for better detection of the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO.
Or:
Start the engine with the SmartKey as
radio signals from another source may
be interfering with the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*.
왘
Repeat the starting procedure
(컄 page 52). Remember that extended
starting attempts can drain the battery.
왘
Get a jump start (컄 page 419).
The engine starts if the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO is in the vehicle.
For information on turning off the engine
with KEYLESS-GO, see “Turning off with
KEYLESS-GO*” (컄 page 62).
Starting difficulties
If the engine does not start as described,
carry out the following steps:
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
1 USA only
2 Canada only
왘
Make sure the gear selector lever is set
to P.
왘
If you are starting the engine with the
SmartKey: Turn SmartKey in starter
switch to position 0 and repeat starting
procedure.
If the engine does not start after several
starting attempts, there could be a malfunction in the engine electronics or in the
fuel supply system.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
53
Getting started
Driving
Parking brake
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take
it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children
could release the parking brake, which
could result in an accident and/or serious
injury.
1 Release handle
2 Parking brake pedal
왘
Release the parking brake by pulling on
release handle 1.
The indicator lamp ; (USA only)
or 3 (Canada only) in the instrument cluster goes out.
54
Driving off
왘
Depress the brake pedal.
왘
Place the gear selector lever in
position D or R.
Warning!
G
It is dangerous to shift the gear selector lever out of P or N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
Getting started
Driving
Warning!
G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.
! In order to avoid damage to the transmission:
앫
Wait for the gear selection process to complete before setting the vehicle in motion.
앫
Place the gear selector lever in position D
or R only when the vehicle is stopped.
왘
Release the brake pedal.
왘
Carefully depress the accelerator
pedal.
Once the vehicle is in motion, the automatic central locking system engages and the
locking knobs drop down.
! If you hear a warning signal and the message Release parking brake appears in the
multifunction display when driving off, you have
forgotten to release the parking brake.
Switching on headlamps
Release the parking brake.
The exterior lamp switch is located on the
dashboard to the left of the steering wheel.
After a cold start, the transmission engages at a higher revolution. This allows the
catalytic converter to reach its operating
temperature earlier.
Low beam headlamps
! Do not run cold engine at high engine speed.
Running a cold engine at high engine speed may
shorten the service life of the engine.
! Simultaneously depressing the accelerator
pedal and applying the brake reduces engine
performance and causes premature brake and
drivetrain wear.
i You can open a locked door from the inside.
Open door only when conditions are safe to do
so.
You can deactivate the automatic locking using
the control system (컄 page 162).
Exterior lamp switch
1 Off
2 Low beam headlamps on
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position B.
The low beam headlamps come on.
55
Getting started
Driving
High beam
The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column.
Combination switch
1 High beam
2 High beam flasher
왘
Push the combination switch in direction of arrow 1.
The high beam headlamps come on.
The high beam headlamp indicator
A in the instrument cluster comes
on (컄 page 29).
For more information, see “Lighting”
(컄 page 128).
56
Turn signals
The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column.
Combination switch
1 Turn signals, right
2 Turn signals, left
왘
Press the combination switch in direction of arrow 1 or 2.
The corresponding turn signal indicator
lamp K or L in the instrument
cluster flashes (컄 page 27).
The combination switch resets automatically after major steering wheel movements.
i To signal minor directional changes such as
changing lanes, press combination switch only
to point of resistance and release. The corresponding turn signals will flash three times.
Getting started
Driving
Windshield wipers
The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column.
! Do not operate the windshield wipers when
the windshield is dry. Dust that accumulates on
a windshield might scratch the glass and/or
damage the wiper blades when wiping occurs on
a dry windshield. If it is necessary to operate the
windshield wipers in dry weather conditions, always operate the windshield wipers with windshield washer fluid (컄 page 58).
Switching on windshield wipers
왘
Turn the combination switch in direction of arrow 1 to the desired position,
depending on the intensity of the rain.
0 Windshield wipers off
Combination switch
1 Switching on windshield wipers
2 Single wipe
Wiping with windshield washer fluid
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
I
Intermittent wiping
II Normal wiper speed
III Fast wiper speed
Intermittent wiping
! Do not leave windshield wipers in intermittent setting when the vehicle is taken to an automatic car wash or during windshield cleaning.
Windshield wipers will operate in the presence of
water sprayed on the windshield, and windshield
wipers may be damaged as a result.
! If you have set intermittent wiping, dirt on
the surface of the rain sensor or optical effects
may cause the windshield wipers to wipe in an
undesired fashion. This could then damage the
windshield wiper blades or scratch the windows.
You should therefore switch off the windshield
wipers when weather conditions are dry.
The intermittent wiping interval is dependent on the wetness of the windshield.
왘
Turn the combination switch in direction of arrow 1 to position I.
After the initial wipe, pauses between
wipes are controlled by the rain sensor.
57
컄컄
Getting started
Driving
컄컄 i Intermittent wiping is interrupted when the
vehicle is at a standstill and a front door is
opened. This protects persons getting into or out
of the vehicle from being sprayed.
Intermittent wiping will be continued when
앫
앫
all doors are closed and the gear selector
lever is in position D or R
! If anything blocks the windshield wipers
왘
(leaves, snow, etc.), switch them off immediately.
Push the combination switch in direction of arrow 2 past the resistance
point.
i To prevent smears on the windshield, wipe
the wiper setting is changed using the combination switch
with windshield washer fluid every now and then
even when it is raining.
Press the combination switch briefly in
direction of arrow 2 to the resistance
point.
The windshield wipers wipe one time
without washer fluid.
58
앫
The windshield wipers operate with
washer fluid.
or
Single wipe
왘
Wiping with windshield washer fluid
For safety reasons, stop the vehicle in a safe
location and
앫
remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch
or
앫
For information on filling up the washer
reservoir, see “Windshield washer system
and headlamp cleaning system”
(컄 page 282).
turn off the engine by pressing the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button and
open the driver’s door (with the driver’s
door open, the starter switch is in position 0, same as with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch)
before attempting to remove any blockage.
앫
Remove blockage.
앫
Turn the windshield wipers on again.
If the windshield wipers fail to function at all in
switch position I,
앫
set the combination switch to the next higher wiper speed
앫
have the windshield wipers checked at the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
Getting started
Driving
Problems while driving
The coolant temperature gauge is
above 248°F (120°C)
The engine runs erratically and misfires
The coolant is too hot and is no longer
cooling the engine.
In case of accident
If the vehicle is leaking gasoline:
왘
Do not start the engine under any circumstances.
왘
Notify local fire and/or police authorities.
앫
An ignition cable may be damaged.
앫
The engine electronics may not be operating properly.
앫
Unburned gasoline may have entered
the catalytic converter and damaged it.
왘
Give very little gas.
왘
왘
Have the problem repaired by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
If no damage can be determined on the
왘
Stop the vehicle as soon as possible in
a safe location and turn off the engine.
Allow engine and coolant to cool.
왘
Check the coolant level and add coolant if necessary (컄 page 280).
If the extent of the damage cannot be determined:
Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
앫
major assemblies
앫
fuel system
앫
engine mount:
왘
Start the engine in the usual manner.
59
Getting started
Parking and locking
You have now completed your first drive.
You have properly stopped and parked
your vehicle. End your drive as follows.
Warning!
G
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle.
60
G
앫
When parked on an incline, turn front
wheels towards the road curb.
Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
앫
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 0 and remove the SmartKey
from the starter switch, or press the
start/stop button (vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO*).
앫
Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* and lock vehicle when
leaving.
Warning!
To reduce the risk of personal injury as a result of vehicle movement, before turning off
the engine and leaving the vehicle always:
앫
Keep right foot on brake pedal.
앫
Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
앫
Move the gear selector lever to
position P.
앫
Slowly release brake pedal.
Getting started
Parking and locking
Parking brake
Warning!
1 Release handle
2 Parking brake pedal
왘
Step firmly on parking brake pedal 2.
When the engine is running, the indicator lamp ; (USA only) or 3
(Canada only) in the instrument cluster
will be illuminated.
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take
it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children
could release the parking brake and/or
move the gear selector lever from
position P, either of which could result in an
accident and/or serious injury.
Warning!
G
Getting out of your vehicle with the gear selector lever not fully engaged in position P is
dangerous. Also, when parked on an incline,
position P alone may not prevent your vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people or
objects.
Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to position P (컄 page 170).
When parked on an incline, also turn front
wheels towards the road curb.
Switching off headlamps
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to position M (컄 page 55).
For more information, see “Exterior lamp
switch” (컄 page 128).
61
Getting started
Parking and locking
Turning off the engine
왘
Place the gear selector lever in
position P.
왘
Apply the parking brake (컄 page 61).
i Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to position P.
On slopes, turn the front wheels towards the
road curb.
Turning off with the SmartKey
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 0 (컄 page 40).
왘
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
The immobilizer is activated.
i The SmartKey can only be removed from the
starter switch with the gear selector lever in
position P.
i With the SmartKey removed and the driver’s
door open, a warning sounds if the vehicle’s
exterior lamps are not switched off.
62
Turning off with KEYLESS-GO*
왘
Place the gear selector lever in
position P.
왘
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button (컄 page 40) to turn off the engine.
With the driver’s door closed, the starter switch is now in position 1. With the
driver’s door opened, the starter switch
is set to position 0, same as SmartKey
removed from starter switch
(컄 page 40).
i If you hear a warning signal you have tried to
turn off the engine while the gear selector lever
was not in P.
In addition, the message Gear selector
lever to P appears in the multifunction display.
Place the gear selector lever in position P.
Releasing seat belts
왘
Press the seat belt release button
(컄 page 50).
Allow the retractor to completely rewind the seat belt by guiding the latch
plate.
! Make sure the seat belt retracts fully so that
the seat belt and/or latch plate cannot get
caught or pinched in the door or in the seat
mechanism. This can damage the seat belt and
impair the effectiveness of the seat belt, and/or
cause damage to the door and/or door trim
panel. Such damage is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Damaged seat belts must be replaced. Contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Getting started
Parking and locking
Locking
i If you hear a warning signal you have forgot- Locking with the SmartKey
ten to turn off the headlamps.
Warning!
G
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the door
openings when closing the doors. Be especially careful when small children are
around.
Before closing doors, make sure that there
is no possibility of someone getting caught
in a door during closing.
Warning!
G
In addition the message Turn off lights appears in the multifunction display.
Switch off the headlamps.
왘
Exit the vehicle and close the doors and
the trunk.
i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: A warning signal and the message Don’t forget your key
remind you not to leave the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* in the vehicle.
왘
Press the lock button ‹ on the
SmartKey (컄 page 38).
With the trunk and all doors closed, all
turn signal lamps flash three times. The
locking knobs on the doors move
down. The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
For more information, see “Locking and
unlocking” (컄 page 102).
i Opening a door causes the windows on that
side of the car to open slightly. They will return to
the closed position when the door is closed.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take
it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
63
Getting started
Parking and locking
Locking with KEYLESS-GO*
1 Lock button
왘
Press lock button 1 on a door handle
or the lock button on the trunk lid
(컄 page 110).
With the trunk and all doors closed, the
turn signal lamps flash three times. The
locking knobs on the doors move
down. The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
For more information, see “Locking and
unlocking” (컄 page 102).
64
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Panic alarm
Driving safety systems
Anti-theft systems
65
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
In this section you will learn the most important facts about the restraint systems
of the vehicle.
The restraint systems are
앫
Seat belts (컄 page 77)
앫
Child restraints (컄 page 83)
Additional protection potential provided by
앫
앫
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
with
앫
Air bags (컄 page 68)
앫
Air bag control unit (with crash
sensors)
앫
Emergency tensioning device (ETD)
for seat belts (컄 page 81)
Roll bar (컄 page 81)
66
Air bag system components with
앫
Front passenger front air bag off
indicator lamp (컄 page 76)
앫
Front passenger seat with Occupant
Classification System (OCS)
(컄 page 72)
Although independent systems, their protective functions work in conjunction with
each other.
i For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children, see “Children in
the vehicle” (컄 page 83).
The SRS system conducts a self-test when
the ignition is switched on and in regular
intervals while the engine is running. This
facilitates detection of malfunctions. The
1 indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on when the ignition is switched
on and goes out no later than a few seconds after the engine has been started.
The SRS components are in operational
readiness if the 1 indicator lamp is not
lit when the engine is running.
A malfunction in the system has been
detected if the 1 indicator lamp:
앫
fails to go out after approximately
4 seconds after the engine was started
앫
does not come on at all
앫
comes on after the engine was started
or while driving
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
Modifications to or work improperly conducted on restraint systems (such as seat
belts and anchors, emergency tensioning
devices, seat belt force limiters or air bags)
or their wiring, as well as tampering with interconnected electronic systems, can lead
to the restraint systems no longer functioning as intended.
Air bags or emergency tensioning devices,
for example, could deploy inadvertently or
fail to deploy in accidents although the deceleration threshold for air bag deployment
is exceeded. Therefore, never modify the restraint systems. Do not tamper with electronic components or their software.
Warning!
G
In the event that the 1 indicator lamp
comes on during driving or does not come
on at all, the SRS self-check has detected a
malfunction. For your safety, we strongly
recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have
the system checked; otherwise the SRS may
not deploy when needed in an accident,
which could result in serious or fatal injury,
or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury.
If it is necessary to modify an air bag system
to accommodate a person with disabilities,
contact your local authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) for details.
In addition, improper repair work on the SRS
creates a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended air bag deployment. Work on the SRS must therefore only
be performed by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
67
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Air bags
Warning!
Warning!
G
Air bags are designed to reduce the potential of injury and fatality in certain frontal impacts (front air bags, driver-side knee bag)
or side impacts (head-thorax air bags). However, no system available today can totally
eliminate injuries and fatalities.
The deployment of the air bags temporarily
releases a small amount of dust from the air
bags. This dust, however, is neither injurious
to your health, nor does it indicate a fire in
the vehicle. The dust might cause some temporary breathing difficulty for people with
asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid
this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle
as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any
breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the
vehicle after the air bag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or door.
68
G
앫
Adjust the driver’s seat as far as possible rearward, still permitting proper operation of vehicle controls. The distance
from the center of the driver’s breastbone to the center of the air bag cover
on the steering wheel must be at least
10 inches (25 cm) or more. You should
be able to accomplish this by a combination of adjustments to the seat and
steering wheel. If you have any problems, please see an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫
Do not lean your head or chest close to
the steering wheel or dashboard.
앫
Keep hands on the outside of steering
wheel rim. Placing hands and arms inside the rim can increase the risk and
potential severity of hand/arm injury
when driver’s front air bag inflates.
앫
Adjust the passenger seat as far as possible rearward from the dashboard when
the seat is occupied.
To reduce the risk of injury when the front
air bags inflate, it is very important for the
driver and passenger to always be in a properly seated position and to wear their seat
belts.
For maximum protection in the event of a
collision always be in normal seated position
with your back against the backrest. Fasten
your seat belt and make sure that it is properly positioned on your body (컄 page 49).
Since the air bag inflates with considerable
speed and force, a proper seating and hands
on steering wheel position will help to keep
you at a safe distance from the air bag.
Occupants who are unbelted, out of position
or too close to the air bag can be seriously
injured or killed by an air bag as it inflates
with great force in the blink of an eye:
앫
Sit properly belted in a nearly upright
position with your back against the seat
backrest.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
앫
Occupants, especially children, should
never lean their heads in the area of the
door where the head-thorax air bag inflates. This could result in serious injuries or death should the air bag be
triggered. Always sit nearly upright,
properly use the seat belts and appropriate size infant or child restraint system.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injuries to you or other occupants.
If you sell your vehicle, it is important that
you make the buyer aware of this safety information. Be sure to give the buyer this
Operator’s Manual.
Warning!
G
It should be noted, however, that there is a
possibility for a head-thorax air bag related
injury if occupants, especially children, are
not properly seated or restrained when next
to a head-thorax air bag which needs to deploy rapidly in a side impact in order to do its
job.
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please
follow these guidelines:
(1) Occupants, especially children, should
never place their bodies or lean their
heads in the area of the door where the
head-thorax air bag inflates. This could
result in serious injuries or death should
the head-thorax air bag be triggered.
(2) Always sit nearly upright, properly use
the seat belts and for children 12 years
old and under, use an appropriately
sized infant or toddler restraint or
booster seat recommended for the size
and weight of the child.
(3) Always wear seat belts properly.
If you believe that, even with the use of
these guidelines, it would be safer for your
passenger seat occupants to have the passenger side head-thorax air bag deactivated,
then deactivation can be accomplished
upon your written election to do so at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center at an additional cost. Please contact your local
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
our Customer Assistance Center (in the
USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer
Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100 for
details.
69
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
i Air bags are designed to activate only in cer- Safety guidelines for the seat belt,
tain frontal impacts (front air bags, driver-side
knee bag) and side impacts (head-thorax air
bags) which exceed preset thresholds. Only during these events, will they provide their supplemental protection.
The driver and passenger should always wear
their seat belts. Otherwise it is not possible for
the air bags to provide their intended supplemental protection.
In case of other types of impacts and impacts below air bag deployment thresholds, air bags will
not deploy. The driver and passenger will then be
protected to the extent possible by a properly
fastened seat belt. A properly fastened seat belt
is also needed to provide the best possible protection in a rollover.
We caution you not to rely on the presence of the
air bags in order to avoid wearing your seat belt.
It is important to your safety and that of your passenger that you replace deployed air bags and
repair any malfunctioning air bags to make sure
that the vehicle will continue to provide supplemental crash protection for occupants.
70
emergency tensioning device and
air bag
Warning!
앫
No modifications of any kind may be
made to any components or wiring of
the SRS. This includes changing or
removing any component or part of the
SRS, the installation of additional trim
material, badges, etc. over the steering
wheel hub, passenger front air bag cover, door frame trims, or door trim panels, and installation of additional
electrical/electronic equipment on or
near SRS components and wiring. Keep
area between air bags and occupants
free from objects (e.g. packages, purses, umbrellas, etc.).
앫
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this
may severely weaken them. In a crash,
they may not be able to provide adequate protection.
앫
Air bag system components will be hot
after an air bag has inflated. Do not
touch.
앫
Never place your feet on the instrument
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
keep both feet on the floor in front of the
seat.
G
앫
Damaged seat belts or belts that were
highly stressed in an accident must be
replaced and their anchoring points
must also be checked. Only use belts installed or supplied by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫
Air bags and pyrotechnic emergency
tensioning devices (ETDs) are designed
to function on a one-time-only basis. An
air bag or ETD that has deployed must
be replaced.
앫
Do not pass belts over sharp edges.
They could tear.
앫
Do not make any modification that could
change the effectiveness of the belts.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
앫
앫
앫
In addition, improper repair work on the
SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS
inoperative or causing unintended air
bag deployment. Work on the SRS must
therefore only be performed by qualified
technicians. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
For your protection and the protection
of others, when scrapping the air bag
unit or emergency tensioning device,
our safety instructions must be followed. These instructions are available
from your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Given the considerable deployment
speed, required inflation volume, and
the textile structure of the air bags,
there is the possibility of abrasions or
other, potentially more serious injuries
resulting from air bag deployment.
When you sell your vehicle, we strongly
urge you to give notice to the subsequent
owner that it is equipped with an SRS by
alerting them to the applicable section in
the Operator’s Manual.
Front air bags
i The front air bags in this vehicle have been
designed to inflate in two stages. This allows the
air bag to have different rates of inflation that are
based on the rate of relevant vehicle deceleration as assessed by the air bag control unit.
On the passenger side, the front air bag deployment is additionally influenced by the passenger’s weight category as identified by the
Occupant Classification System (OCS)
(컄 page 72).
1 Driver air bag
2 Passenger air bag
3 Knee bag
Driver and passenger air bags are deployed:
앫
in the event of certain frontal impacts
앫
if impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold
앫
independently of the head-thorax air
bags
The lighter the passenger side occupant, the
higher the vehicle deceleration rate required for
the second stage inflation of the air bag.
The air bags will not deploy in impacts
which do not exceed the system’s deployment thresholds. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belts.
71
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
The passenger front air bag will only be deployed if:
앫
the system, based on OCS weight sensor readings, senses that the front passenger seat is occupied
앫
the 5/ indicator lamp in the
center console is not lit (컄 page 76)
앫
the impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold
Head-thorax air bags
The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
automatically turns the passenger front air
bag on or off based on the classified occupant weight category determined by
weight sensor readings from the
passenger seat.
i The system does not deactivate the
head-thorax air bag and the emergency tensioning device.
Knee bag
1 Head-thorax air bag
The knee bag is located on the driver-side
lower instrument panel. It is designed to
operate together with the driver air bag in
certain frontal impacts exceeding a preset
threshold. The knee bag operates best in
conjunction with a properly positioned and
fastened seat belt.
The head-thorax air bags are deployed:
72
Occupant Classification System
앫
in impacts exceeding a preset deployment threshold
앫
on the impacted side of the vehicle
앫
independently of the front air bags
The head-thorax air bags are not deployed
in impacts which do not exceed the system’s deployment threshold.
Occupants must sit properly belted in a
nearly upright position with their back
against the seat backrest and feet on the
floor to be correctly classified. If the
occupant's weight is transferred to
another object in the vehicle (e.g. by
leaning on armrests), the OCS may not be
able to properly approximate the
occupant’s weight category.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
i If the seat, including the trim cover and
cushion needs to be serviced in any way, take
the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Only seat accessories approved by
Mercedes-Benz may be used.
Both driver and the passenger should always use the 5/ indicator lamp as
an indication of whether or not the passenger is properly positioned.
Warning!
G
If the 5/ indicator lamp illuminates
when an adult or someone larger than a
small individual is in the passenger seat,
have the passenger re-position himself or
herself in the seat until the 5/ indicator lamp goes out.
More information about air bag display
messages (컄 page 356).
In the event of a collision, the air bag control
unit will not allow passenger front air bag
deployment when the OCS classified the
passenger seat occupant as being up to or
less than the weight of a typical
12-month-old child in a standard child
restraint or if the passenger seat is sensed
as being empty.
When the OCS senses that the passenger
seat occupant is classified as being up to or
less than the weight of a typical
12-month-old child in a standard child
restraint, the 5/ indicator lamp will
illuminate when the engine is started and
remain illuminated, indicating that the passenger front air bag is deactivated.
When the OCS senses that the passenger
seat is classified as being empty, the
5/ indicator lamp will illuminate
when the engine is started and remain
illuminated, indicating that the passenger
front air bag is deactivated.
73
컄컄
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
컄컄
When the OCS senses that the passenger
seat occupant is classified as being heavier
than the weight of a typical 12-month-old
child seated in a standard child restraint or
as being a small individual (such as a young
teenager or a small adult), the 5/ indicator lamp will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds when the engine is started and
then, depending on occupant weight sensor
readings from the seat, remain illuminated
or go out. With the 5/ indicator lamp
illuminated, the passenger front air bag is
deactivated. With the 5/ indicator
lamp out, the passenger front air bag is activated.
When the OCS senses that the passenger
seat occupant is classified as an adult or
someone larger than a small individual, the
5/ indicator lamp will illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds when the engine is
started and then go out, indicating that the
passenger front air bag is activated.
74
If the 5/ indicator lamp is
illuminated, the passenger front air bag is
deactivated and will not be deployed.
If the 5/ indicator lamp is not
illuminated, the passenger front air bag is
activated and will be deployed:
앫
in the event of certain frontal impacts
앫
if impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold
앫
independently of the head-thorax air
bags.
Warning!
G
Children 12 years old and under must be
seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant or child restraint recommended
for the size and weight of the child.
The infant or child restraint must be properly
secured with the vehicle's seat belt fully in
accordance with the child seat manufacturer's instructions.
If the passenger front air bag is deployed,
the rate of inflation will be influenced by:
Children can be killed or seriously injured by
an inflating air bag. Note the following
important information:
앫
the rate of relevant vehicle deceleration
as assessed by the air bag control unit
앫
앫
passenger's weight category as identified by the Occupant Classification
System (OCS).
Your vehicle is equipped with air bag
technology designed to turn off the passenger front air bag in your vehicle when
the system senses the weight of a typical 12-month-old child or less along with
the weight of a standard appropriate
child restraint on the passenger seat.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
앫
앫
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on
the passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the passenger
front air bag inflates in a collision which
could occur under some circumstances,
even with the air bag technology installed in your vehicle.
If you install a rear-facing child restraint
on the passenger seat, make sure that
the 5/ indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating that the passenger
front air bag is deactivated. Should the
5/ indicator lamp not illuminate
or go out while the restraint is installed,
please check installation. Periodically
check the 5/ indicator lamp
while driving to make sure the
5/ indicator lamp is illuminated.
If the 5/ indicator lamp goes out
or remains out, do not transport a child
on the passenger seat until the system
has been repaired. A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the passenger seat
will be seriously injured or even killed if
the passenger front air bag inflates.
앫
If you place a child in a forward-facing
child restraint on the passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible,
use the proper child restraint recommended for the age, size and weight of
the child, and secure child restraint with
the vehicle's seat belt according to the
child seat manufacturer's instructions.
For children larger than the typical
12-month-old child, the passenger front
air bag may or may not be activated
(컄 page 74).
i Deployment of the driver front air bag does
not mean that the passenger front air bag also
should have deployed.
The Occupant Classification System (컄 page 72)
may have determined:
앫
that the seat was empty or occupied by the
weight up to or less than that of a typical
12-month-old child seated in a standard
child restraint – both instances where the
system suppresses deployment of the passenger front air bag even though the impact
met the criteria and was of sufficient severity
to deploy the driver front air bag.
앫
that the seat was occupied by a small individual (such as a young teenager or a small
adult) or a child weighing more than the
weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a
standard child restraint – instances where
the system may suppress deployment of the
passenger front air bag even though the
impact met the criteria and was of sufficient
severity to deploy the driver front air bag.
75
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
The 5/ indicator lamp is located in
the upper part of the center console, between the center air vents.
Warning!
G
If the 1 indicator lamp and the
5/ indicator lamp are lit at the same
time, there is a malfunction in the Occupant
Classification System. The passenger front
air bag will be deactivated in this case.
In order to ensure proper operation of the
air bag system and OCS:
1 Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp
The 5/ indicator lamp 1 will be
illuminated, except with the SmartKey
removed or in starter switch position 0.
76
앫
Have the system checked as soon as
possible by qualified technicians.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
앫
Sit properly belted in a nearly upright
position with your back against the seat
backrest.
앫
Do not lean on the armrests or lift yourself from the seat by using the handle
over the door as this may cause the OCS
to be unable to correctly approximate
the occupant weight category.
앫
Only have the seat repaired or replaced
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
앫
Read and observe all warnings in this
chapter.
Self-test Occupant Classification
System
After turning the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once or
twice, the 5/ indicator lamp
located in the upper part of the center console, between the center air vents illuminates. If an adult occupant is properly
sitting on the passenger seat and the system senses the occupant as being an
adult, the 5/ indicator lamp will
illuminate and go out after
approximately 6 seconds.
If the seat is not occupied and the system
senses the passenger seat as being empty,
the 5/ indicator lamp will
illuminate and not go out.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
If the 5/ indicator lamp should not
illuminate, the system is not functioning.
You must see an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center before seating any child on the passenger seat.
More information can be found in the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 345).
Warning!
G
Never place anything between seat cushion
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces
the effectiveness of the Occupant Classification System. The bottom of the child seat
must make full contact with the passenger
seat cushion. An incorrectly mounted child
seat could cause injuries to the child in case
of an accident, instead of increasing protection for the child.
Seat belts
Warning!
The use of seat belts and infant and child
restraint systems is required by law in all
50 states, the District of Columbia, the
U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces.
Even where this is not the case, we strongly recommend that all vehicle occupants
have their seat belts fastened and wear
them properly.
For information on fastening seat belts,
see “Fastening the seat belts” (컄 page 49).
i For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children, see “Children in
the vehicle” (컄 page 83).
G
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure your passengers are
properly restrained, even pregnant women.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and
position your seat belt greatly increases
your risk of injuries and their likely severity
in an accident. You and your passenger
should always wear seat belts.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are properly wearing
your seat belt. Air bags can only protect as
they are designed if the occupants are properly wearing their seat belts.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
installation of child seats.
77
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined position
as this can be dangerous. You could slide
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. This could cause serious or
even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
seat belt provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in a nearly upright position and the
belt is properly positioned on the body.
Keep door storage compartments closed
while vehicle is in motion. Failure to do so
may cause the seat belt to catch at the rear
and prevent proper positioning of the seat
belt.
78
Warning!
G
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Be sure
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt. Never use
a seat belt for more than one person at a
time.
Warning!
G
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
stressed in an accident must be replaced
and their anchoring points must also be
checked.
Only use seat belts which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Do not make any modifications to the seat
belts.
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash, they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Have all work carried out only by qualified
technicians. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
앫
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
앫
앫
Seat belts can only work when used
properly. Never wear seat belts in any
other way than as described in this
section, as that could result in serious
injuries in case of an accident.
Each occupant should wear their seat
belt at all times, because seat belts help
reduce the likelihood of and potential
severity of injuries in accidents, including rollovers. The integrated restraint
system includes SRS (driver air bag,
driver-side knee bag, passenger front air
bag, head-thorax air bags) and ETD (seat
belt emergency tensioning device). The
system is designed to enhance the
protection offered to properly belted
occupants in certain frontal (front air
bags, driver-side knee bag and ETD) and
side (head-thorax air bags and ETD) impacts which exceed preset deployment
thresholds.
앫
앫
앫
Never wear the shoulder belt under your
arm, against your neck or off your shoulder. In a crash, your body would move
too far forward. That would increase the
chance of head and neck injuries. The
belt would also apply too much force to
the ribs or abdomen, which could severely injure internal organs such as
your liver or spleen.
Never wear belts over rigid or breakable
objects in or on your clothing, such as
eyeglasses, pens, keys, etc., as these
might cause injuries.
Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips and not across the abdomen. If the belt is positioned across your
abdomen, it could cause serious injuries
in a crash.
앫
Belts should not be worn twisted. In a
crash, you would not have the full width
of the belt to manage impact forces. The
twisted belt against your body could
cause injuries.
앫
Pregnant women should also use a
lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
should be positioned as low as possible
on the hips to avoid any possible pressure on the abdomen.
앫
Never place your feet on the instrument
panel, dashboard or on the seat. Always
keep both feet on the floor in front of the
seat.
앫
When using a seat belt to secure infant
or toddler restraints or children in
booster seats, always follow the child
seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time. Do not fasten a seat
belt around a person and another person or other objects.
79
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Enhanced seat belt reminder system
When the engine is started, the seat belt
telltale < illuminates for a maximum of
6 seconds and a warning chime sounds to
remind you and your passenger to fasten
your seat belts.
If after these 6 seconds, the driver’s or the
passenger’s seat belt (with the passenger
seat occupied) are not fastened with all
doors closed,
1 Seat belt housing
2 Latch plate
3 Buckle
4 Release button
80
앫
and the vehicle speed does not exceed
15 mph (25 km/h), the seat belt
telltale < remains illuminated for as
long as either the driver’s or
passenger’s seat belt is not fastened
앫
and the vehicle speed exceeds
15 mph (25 km/h), the seat belt
telltale < starts flashing and a
warning chime sounds with increasing
intensity until both the driver’s and
passenger’s seat belt are fastened, or
for a maximum of 60 seconds from
the time the vehicle speed
exceeded 15 mph (25 km/h) if either
the driver’s or passenger’s seat belt
remains unfastened.
If the driver’s or passenger’s seat belt
remains unfastened after 60 seconds,
the seat belt telltale < stops flashing and the warning chime stops
sounding. The seat belt telltale <
then continues to be illuminated for as
long as either the driver’s or passenger’s seat belt are not fastened.
The seat belt telltale < will only go out
if both the driver’s and the passenger’s
seat belt (with the front passenger seat occupied) are fastened, or the vehicle is
standing still and a front door is opened.
For more information, on the seat belt
telltale <, see the “Practical hints” section (컄 page 341).
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Emergency tensioning device (ETD),
seat belt force limiter
The seat belts are equipped with emergency tensioning devices and belt force
limiters.
The ETD is designed to activate in the following cases:
앫
앫
앫
in frontal or rear-end impacts exceeding the system deployment threshold
if the restraint systems are operational
and functioning correctly, see 1 indicator lamp (컄 page 66)
in certain vehicle rollovers if the system determines an additional degree of
protection
i The ETDs will only activate if the seat belts
are fastened (latch plate properly inserted into
buckle).
When activated, emergency tensioning devices remove slack from the belts in such a
way that the seat belts fit more snugly
against the body. Belt force limiters reduce
the force exerted by the seat belts on occupants during a crash.
Warning!
G
An emergency tensioning device (ETD) that
was activated must be replaced.
When disposing of the emergency tensioning device, our safety instructions must be
followed. These are available at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Automatic comfort-fit feature seat belt
The automatic comfort-fit feature reduces
the retracting force of the seat belts when
they are in normal use.
Roll bar
Warning!
G
This vehicle is a two occupant vehicle. The
rear storage area is not intended for use by
occupants and is not equipped for properly
seating or restraining occupants. Thus this
area should never be used by any persons.
Before operating the roll bar switch make
sure that the roll bar’s path is clear and no
persons are injured by the moving roll bar
due to inattention. Raising or lowering of the
roll bar could injure someone in it’s proximity.
For your own safety, we recommend to drive
with the roll bar raised if the outside temperature is below +5°F (-15°C).
! If the outside temperature falls below +5°F
(-15°C), the roll bar must be raised manually using the buttons provided to avoid damaging the
hydraulics.
81
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
The roll bar raises automatically in an accident or in a critical driving situation. You
can also raise and lower the roll bar manually using the buttons provided.
i When the roll bar is raised automatically,
you will hear a ratcheting sound.
The buttons for the roll bar are on the center console under the retractable hardtop
switch.
Warning!
G
If the roll bar warning light \ in the tachometer remains lit after starting the engine, there is a malfunction. In the display
you see the message Raise roll-over
bar.
For safety reasons, drive only with the roll
bar upright until the malfunction is repaired.
Have your vehicle checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Raising the roll bar
1 Raise roll bar
2 Lower roll bar
The roll bar can be moved manually when
the ignition is switched on (컄 page 39).
82
왘
Lift the switch for the retractable hardtop.
왘
Press and hold button 1 until the roll
bar is raised.
Lowering the roll bar
왘
Lift the switch for the retractable hardtop.
If the roll bar was raised manually:
왘
Press and hold button 2 until the roll
bar is lowered.
If the roll bar was raised automatically:
왘
Press and hold button 1 until you hear
the roll bar lock into place.
왘
Press and hold button 2 until the roll
bar is lowered.
i If you have raised the roll bar manually using
the button, the roll bar will automatically be lowered and then raised again when you close and
open the retractable hardtop.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Children in the vehicle
If an infant or child is traveling with you in
the vehicle:
앫
Secure the child using an infant or child
restraint appropriate to the age and
size of the child.
앫
Make sure the infant or child is properly secured at all times while the vehicle
is in motion.
Infant and child restraint seats and
information on choosing an appropriate
restraint system can be obtained from any
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!
G
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
restraint system. The children could
앫
injure themselves on parts of the vehicle
앫
be seriously or fatally injured through
excessive exposure to extreme heat or
cold
Do not expose the child restraint system to
direct sunlight. The child restraint system’s
metal parts, for example, could become very
hot, and the child could be burned on these
parts.
If children open a door, they could
앫
injure other persons
앫
get out of the car and injure themselves
or be injured by following traffic
Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the
passenger compartment unless they are
firmly secured in place.
For more information, please refer to the
“Useful features” section (컄 page 233)
through (컄 page 238).
Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo
increases a child’s risk of injury in the event
of
앫
strong braking maneuvers
앫
sudden changes of direction
앫
an accident
Infant and child restraint systems
We recommend all infants and children be
properly restrained at all times while the
vehicle is in motion.
The passenger lap-shoulder belt has a special seat belt retractor for the secure fastening of child restraints.
To fasten a child restraint follow child restraint instructions for mounting. Then pull
the shoulder belt out completely and let it
retract. During the seat belt retraction a
ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate
that the special seat belt retractor is activated. The belt is now locked. Push down
on child restraint to take up any slack.
To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and
let seat belt retract completely. The seat
belt can again be used in the usual manner.
83
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
Never release the seat belt buckle while the
vehicle is in motion, since the special seat
belt retractor will be deactivated.
The use of infant or child restraints is required by law in all 50 states, the District of
Columbia, the U.S. territories, and all Canadian provinces.
Infants and small children should be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system which is properly secured
by a lap-shoulder belt and that complies
with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213 and Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard 213.
A statement by the child restraint manufacturer of compliance with this standard
can be found on the instruction label on
the restraint and in the instruction manual
provided with the restraint.
84
When using any infant or child restraint
system, be sure to carefully read and follow all manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.
G
Occupants, especially children, should never place their bodies or lean their heads in
the area of the door where the head-thorax
air bag inflates. This could result in serious
injuries or death should the head-thorax air
bag be triggered. Always sit nearly upright,
properly use the seat belt and use an appropriately sized infant or toddler restraint or
booster seat recommended for the size and
weight of the child.
Children 12 years old and under must be
seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant or child restraint recommended
for the size and weight of the child.
Children can be killed or seriously injured by
an inflating air bag. Note the following
important information when you place a
child in the passenger seat:
The infant or child restraint must be properly
secured with the vehicle's seat belt fully in
accordance with the child seat manufacturer's instructions.
앫
Please read and observe warning labels affixed to inside of vehicle and to infant or
child restraints.
Warning!
Your vehicle is equipped with air bag
technology designed to turn off the front
passenger front air bag in your vehicle
when the OCS senses the weight of a
typical 12-month-old child or less along
with the weight of a standard
appropriate child restraint on the front
passenger seat.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
앫
앫
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on
the passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the passenger
front air bag inflates in a collision which
could occur under some circumstances,
even with the air bag technology installed in your vehicle.
If you install a rear-facing child restraint
on the passenger seat, make sure that
the 5/ indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating that the passenger
front air bag is deactivated. Should the
5/ indicator lamp not illuminate
or go out while the restraint is installed,
please check installation. Periodically
check the 5/ indicator lamp
while driving to make sure the
5/ indicator lamp is illuminated.
If the 5/ indicator lamp goes out
or remains out, do not transport a child
on the passenger seat until the system
has been repaired. A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the passenger seat
will be seriously injured or even killed if
the passenger front air bag inflates.
앫
If you place a child in a forward-facing
child restraint on the passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible,
use the proper child restraint recommended for the age, size and weight of
the child, and secure child restraint with
the vehicle’s seat belt according to the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
For children larger than the typical
12-month-old child, the passenger front
air bag may or may not be activated
(컄 page 74).
Warning!
G
Infants and small children should never
share a seat belt with another occupant.
During an accident, they could be crushed
between the occupant and seat belt.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
Warning!
G
Children too big for a toddler restraint must
ride in seats using regular seat belts. Position the shoulder belt across chest and
shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat
may be necessary to achieve proper belt positioning for children over 41 lbs until they
reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt fits
properly without a booster.
When the child restraint is not in use,
remove it from the vehicle or secure it with
the seat belt to prevent the child restraint
from becoming a projectile in the event of
an accident.
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, even if the children are secured in a
child restraint system. Unsupervised children in a child restraint system may use vehicle equipment and cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
85
Safety and Security
Panic alarm
An audible alarm and flashing exterior
lamps will operate briefly.
i USA only: This device complies with Part 15
Activating
of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
왘
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
1 Â button
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Deactivating
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
or
i Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
86
Press and hold button 1 for at least
1 second.
왘
왘
Press button 1 again.
Insert SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* in starter switch.
or
왘
Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button on the gear selector lever.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must
be in the vehicle.
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
왔 Driving safety systems
In this section you will find information on
the following driving safety systems:
앫
ABS (Antilock Brake System)
앫
Warning!
G
ABS
G
Warning!
BAS (Brake Assist System)
The following factors increase the risk of accidents:
앫
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
앫
Excessive speed, especially in turns
앫
Electro-hydraulic brake system
앫
Wet and slippery road surfaces
앫
Following another vehicle too closely
Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm,
steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pumping the brake pedal defeats the purpose of
the ABS and significantly reduces braking
effectiveness.
The ABS, BAS, ESP®, and the electro-hydraulic brake system cannot reduce this
risk.
Always adjust your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates
the brake pressure so that the wheels do
not lock during braking. This allows you to
maintain the ability to steer your vehicle.
i In winter operation, the maximum effective- The ABS is functional above a speed of
ness of the ABS, the BAS, the ESP®, and the
electro-hydraulic brake system is only achieved
with winter tires (컄 page 316) or snow chains as
required.
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent of road surface conditions.
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will respond even to light brake pressure.
87
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
The - indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster comes on when you switch on the
ignition. It goes out when the engine is running.
The ABS/ESP® warning lamp v flashes
whenever the ABS is activated which can
be an indication of hazardous road conditions and functions as a reminder to take
extra care while driving.
Braking
If the ABS activates during braking, the
ABS/ESP® warning lamp v in the instrument cluster dial flashes. Because of
the electro-hydraulic brake system, you
will not feel any pulsation in the brake pedal.
왘
Keep firm and steady pressure on the
brake pedal.
Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure
yields the advantages provided by the ABS,
namely braking power and the ability to
steer the vehicle.
Emergency brake maneuver
왘
Keep continuous, full pressure on the
brake pedal.
Warning!
G
When the ABS is malfunctioning, the BAS
and the ESP® are also switched off.
When the ABS is malfunctioning, the wheels
may lock during hard braking, reducing
steering capability and extending the braking distance.
Warning!
G
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded. The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another
vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ABS
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in
a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
For more information, see the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 332).
88
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
BAS
Warning!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in
emergency situations. If you apply the
brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically
provides full brake boost, thereby potentially reducing the braking distance.
왘
Apply continuous full braking pressure
until the emergency braking situation is
over.
The ABS will prevent the wheels from
locking.
When you release the brake pedal, the
brakes function again as normal. The BAS
is then deactivated.
Warning!
G
If the BAS is malfunctioning, the brake system is still functioning normally, but without
the additional brake boost available that
BAS would normally provide in an emergency braking maneuver. Therefore, the braking
distance may increase.
G
BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes
and tires or the traction afforded. The BAS
cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s
safety or the safety of others.
ESP®
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) is
operational as soon as the engine is running and monitors the vehicle’s traction
(force of adhesive friction between the
tires and the road surface) and handling.
The ESP® recognizes when a wheel is spinning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By applying brakes to the appropriate wheel and
by limiting engine output, the ESP® works
to stabilize the vehicle. The ESP® is especially useful while driving off and on wet or
slippery road surfaces. The ESP® also stabilizes the vehicle during braking maneuvers.
The ABS/ESP® warning lamp v in the
instrument cluster (컄 page 27) flashes
when the ESP® is engaged.
The ABS/ESP® warning lamp v in the
instrument cluster comes on when you
switch on the ignition. It goes out when the
engine is running.
89
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Warning!
G
Never switch off the ESP® when you see the
ABS/ESP® warning lamp v flashing in
the instrument cluster. In this case proceed
as follows:
앫
앫
앫
While driving off, apply as little throttle
as possible.
While driving, ease up on the accelerator.
Adapt your speed and driving style to
the prevailing road conditions.
Failure to observe these guidelines could
cause the vehicle to skid.
The ESP® cannot prevent accidents resulting from excessive speed.
90
Warning!
G
The ESP® cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase the traction afforded. The ESP®
cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, or
hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESP® equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
! Because the ESP® operates automatically,
the engine must be shut off (SmartKey in starter
switch position 0 or 1or KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button in position 0 or 1) when
앫
the parking brake is being tested on a brake
test dynamometer
앫
the vehicle is being towed with the
front/rear axle raised
Active braking action through the ESP® may otherwise seriously damage the brake system.
The ESP® will only function properly if you use
wheels of the recommended tire size
(컄 page 435).
i The cruise control and the Distronic* system deactivate automatically when the ESP® is
in operation (컄 page 220).
For more information, see the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 332) and
(컄 page 355).
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Switching off the ESP®
Electronic traction system
The electronic traction system is a component of ESP®.
If you are driving too fast, the electronic
traction system cannot reduce the risk of an
accident.
The electronic traction system cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting
on the vehicle.
앫
the ESP® does not stabilize the vehicle
앫
the engine output is not limited, which
allows the drive wheels to spin and
thus cut into surfaces for better grip
앫
the electronic traction system will still
apply the brakes to a spinning wheel
앫
the ESP® continues to operate when
you are braking
앫
you cannot activate the cruise control
or the Distronic* system
앫
the cruise control or the Distronic* system switch off if currently activated
®
ESP should not be switched off during normal driving other than in the circumstances
described below. Disabling of the system
will reduce vehicle stability in standard driving maneuvers.
When you switch off the ESP®, the electronic traction system is still enabled.
G
G
Warning!
The electronic traction system improves
the vehicle’s ability to utilize available traction, especially under slippery road conditions by applying the brakes to a spinning
wheel.
Warning!
When you switch off the ESP®
Do not switch off the
wheel is mounted.
ESP®
when a spare
To improve the vehicle’s traction, switch
off the ESP® in driving situations where it
would be advantageous to have the drive
wheels spin and thus cut into surfaces for
better grip such as:
앫
when driving with snow chains
앫
in deep snow
앫
in sand or gravel
i When the ESP® is switched off and one or
more drive wheels are spinning, the ABS/ESP®
warning lamp v in the speedometer flashes.
However, the ESP® will then not stabilize the
vehicle.
! Switch on the ESP® immediately if the
aforementioned circumstances do not apply
anymore.
91
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
The switch is located in the lower part of
the center console.
Warning!
G
When the ABS/ESP® warning lamp v is
illuminated continuously, the ESP® is
switched off or is not operational due to a
malfunction. Vehicle stability in standard
driving maneuvers reduces.
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and to the non-operating
status of the ESP®.
1 ESP® switch
왘
Press ESP® switch 1 until the
ABS/ESP® warning lamp v in the
instrument cluster comes on.
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period with the ESP® switched off. This
may cause serious damage to the drivetrain
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
The ESP® is deactivated.
Switching on the ESP®
왘
Press ESP® switch 1.
The ABS/ESP® warning lamp v in
the instrument cluster goes out.
You are now again in normal driving
mode with the ESP® switched on.
92
Electro-hydraulic brake system
The electro-hydraulic brake system combines a hydraulic brake circuit with electronically controlled brake servo
assistance. You have increased braking
safety and improved braking comfort.
Warning!
G
Never ignore a brake malfunction indicated
in the speedometer display, for example by
the ; (USA only) or 3 (Canada only)
indicator lamp. Refer to the “Practical hints”
section (컄 page 335). Also read and observe the messages in the instrument cluster multifunction display (컄 page 366).
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Warning!
G
The electro-hydraulic brake system requires
electrical power to operate.
A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply
or electrical system may impair brake system operation and switch it into its emergency operation mode. In such a case, the
red brake warning lamp (컄 page 335)
comes on and warning messages
(컄 page 366) appear in the multifunction
display while driving. To brake, the driver
must then apply significantly greater brake
pedal pressure and depress the pedal much
further to obtain the expected braking effect. If necessary, apply full pressure to the
brake pedal. Brakes are only applied to the
front wheels. Stopping distance is increased!
If there is a malfunction in the
electro-hydraulic brake system, we recommend that the vehicle be transported with
all wheels off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly equipment.
A tow bar must be used if circumstances do
not permit the use of the recommended
towing methods and the vehicle requires
towing with all four wheels on the ground.
Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on
the ground is only permissible for distances
up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to
exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). For more information, see “Towing the vehicle”
(컄 page 421).
The electro-hydraulic brake system is automatically activated when you
앫
unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey
or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
앫
open the driver’s or passenger door
앫
turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 1
앫
in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*, press
the start/stop button on the gear selector lever once
앫
depress the brake pedal
앫
release the parking brake
93
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
i If the electro-hydraulic brake system is activated as the brake pedal is first depressed, you
may feel a reduced pedal resistance and longer
pedal travel than normal. When releasing the
pedal, you may also feel the brake pedal pulsate
and you may hear a sound which is caused by the
activation of the electro-hydraulic brake system
pump. This is normal and not an indication of a
malfunction. Pedal travel returns to normal when
you release the brake pedal and the sound soon
ceases.
If you experience the above while driving and the
red brake warning lamp (컄 page 335) illuminates and/or warning messages appear in the
multifunction display (컄 page 366), the brake
system is malfunctioning. Follow the instructions
of the warning message(s) and have the brake
system checked immediately.
94
Warning!
G
Have brake pad replacement and other work
on the electro-hydraulic brake system carried out by qualified technicians only. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for further information. The electro-hydraulic brake system must be deactivated prior
to working on the system. High pressure is
intermittently built up in the system as part
of its automatic self-test. In addition, the
system is automatically activated when the
vehicle is unlocked by remote control, when
the driver or passenger door is opened,
when the SmartKey in the starter switch is
turned to position 1 or the KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button is pressed once, when the
brake pedal is depressed or when the parking brake is released. Failure to deactivate
the system prior to maintenance will cause
brake pistons to extend and brake fluid to
leak, which may result in injuries (contusions and acid burns). Extended brake pistons may also cause injury.
The electro-hydraulic brake system switches off automatically
앫
approximately 2 minutes after you
turned the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 0 or removed the
SmartKey
앫
approximately 2 minutes after you
pressed the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button to turn off the engine or power
supply and opened the driver’s door
(with driver’s door open, the starter
switch is set to position 0, same as
SmartKey removed from starter
switch)
앫
approximately 20 seconds after you
locked the vehicle from outside
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Notes on driving with the
electro-hydraulic brake system
앫
Following extended periods of only minor loads to your brake system, you
should occasionally apply the brakes
when traveling at high speeds. This improves the grip of the brake pads.
After driving on wet or snow-covered
roads, you should apply your brakes
firmly before parking your vehicle. This
produces heat which serves to dry the
brake disks and help prevent corrosion.
Warning!
앫
On long and steep grades, shift to a
lower gear (gear range 1, 2, or 3) to
prevent the brakes from overheating
and to reduce brake wear.
앫
After hard braking, it is advisable to
drive on for some time so that the air
stream will cool down the brakes faster.
앫
Only Mercedes-Benz approved components (e.g. brake pads) should be installed on your vehicle. Brake pads not
approved by Mercedes-Benz may impair the safety of your vehicle.
G
Be very careful not to endanger other road
users when you apply the brakes.
95
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Immobilizer
Deactivating
Anti-theft alarm system
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized
persons from starting your vehicle.
With the SmartKey
Once the alarm system has been armed, a
visual and audible alarm is triggered when
someone opens
왘
Activating
With the SmartKey
왘
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 2 (컄 page 40).
앫
a door
With KEYLESS-GO*
앫
the trunk lid
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 41).
앫
the hood
i Starting the engine will also deactivate the
앫
a storage compartment in the rear
앫
the glove box
앫
the storage compartment under the
armrest
immobilizer.
With KEYLESS-GO*
왘
Press the start/stop button on the gear
selector lever once.
The engine is turned off.
왘
Open the driver’s door.
96
In case the engine cannot be started (yet the
vehicle’s battery is charged), the system is not
operational. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or call
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA), or
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
The alarm will stay on, even if the activating element (a door, for example) is immediately closed.
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
The alarm system will also be triggered
when
앫
someone attempts to raise the vehicle
앫
unlocking and opening the driver’s
door with the mechanical key
앫
someone opens a door from the inside
앫
someone opens the trunk lid with the
emergency release button
i If the alarm stays on for more than
30 seconds, a call to the Response Center is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system
(컄 page 245) provided Tele Aid service was subscribed to and properly activated, and that necessary cellular service and GPS coverage are
available.
Arming the alarm system
Canceling the alarm
The alarm system is armed after locking
the vehicle with the SmartKey or
KEYLESS-GO*. The turn signal lamps flash
three times to indicate that the alarm system is activated. The indicator lamp in the
central locking switch (컄 page 31) begins
to flash after arming the alarm system.
To cancel the alarm:
i If the turn signal lamps do not flash three
With the SmartKey
왘
or
왘
times, a door or the trunk lid may not be properly
closed.
Close the respective element and lock the vehicle again.
i The alarm system will rearm automatically
Press the Œ or ‹ button on the
SmartKey.
With KEYLESS-GO*
왘
Grasp an outside door handle.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
be within 3 ft. (1 m) of the vehicle.
Disarming the alarm system
The alarm system is disarmed when you
unlock your vehicle with the SmartKey or
KEYLESS-GO*. The turn signal lamps flash
once to indicate that the alarm system is
disarmed.
Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
or
왘
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button (컄 page 40).
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
be inside the vehicle.
again after approximately 40 seconds if no door
was opened.
97
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Tow-away alarm
Once the tow-away alarm is armed, a visual
and audible alarm will be triggered when
someone attempts to raise the vehicle.
i If the alarm stays on for more than
30 seconds, a call to the Response Center is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system
(컄 page 245) provided Tele Aid service was subscribed to and properly activated, and that necessary cellular service and GPS coverage are
available.
Arming tow-away alarm
When you lock your vehicle, the tow-away
alarm is automatically armed after about
30 seconds.
When you unlock your vehicle, the
tow-away protection disarms automatically.
Disabling tow-away alarm
To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm,
disable the tow-away alarm feature before
towing the vehicle, or when parking on a
surface subject to movement, such as a
ferry or auto train.
The button is located on the center console between the driver’s seat and the passenger seat.
98
1 Tow-away alarm off button
2 Indicator lamp
왘
Switch off the ignition and remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch.
i You cannot disarm the tow-away alarm
when the ignition is switched on.
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
왘
왘
Press button 1.
With KEYLESS-GO*
The indicator lamp 2 in the switch
comes on briefly.
왘
Exit and lock your vehicle with the
SmartKey or (vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO*) with the lock button on
each door handle or trunk lid.
The tow-away alarm remains disarmed until you lock the vehicle again.
Grasp an outside door handle.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
be within 3 ft. (1 m) of the vehicle.
or
왘
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button (컄 page 40).
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
be inside the vehicle.
Canceling the alarm
To cancel the alarm:
With the SmartKey
왘
Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
or
왘
Press the Œ or ‹ button on the
SmartKey.
99
100
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Seats
Memory function
Lighting
Instrument cluster
Control system
Automatic transmission
Good visibility
Automatic climate control
Power windows
Retractable hardtop
Driving systems
Useful features
101
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
In the “Controls in detail” section you will
find detailed information on how to operate the equipment installed on your vehicle. If you are already familiar with the
basic functions of your vehicle, this section
will be of particular interest to you.
To quickly familiarize yourself with the basic functions of the vehicle, refer to the
“Getting started” section of this manual.
The corresponding page numbers are given at the beginning of each segment.
For more information on locking and unlocking, see the “Getting started” section
(컄 page 38).
102
SmartKey
Your vehicle comes supplied with two
SmartKeys, each with remote control and
a removable mechanical key.
The locking tabs for the mechanical key
portion of the two SmartKeys are a different color to help distinguish each
SmartKey unit.
The SmartKey provides an extended operating range. To prevent theft, however, it is
advisable to only unlock the vehicle when
you are in close proximity to it.
The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks:
앫
the doors
앫
the trunk lid
앫
the glove box
앫
the storage compartment under the
armrest
앫
the storage compartment in the rear
앫
the fuel filler flap
SmartKey with remote control
1 ‹ Lock button
2 Š Opening button for trunk
(컄 page 111)
3 Mechanical key locking tab
4 ΠUnlock button
5 Battery check lamp
6 Â Panic button (컄 page 86)
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. It is possible
for children to open a locked door from the
inside, which could result in an accident
and/or serious injury.
i Canada only:
Factory setting
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
Global unlocking
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
왘
Press button Œ.
All turn signals flash once. The locking
knobs in the doors move up. The
anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
The vehicle will lock again automatically
and reactivate the alarm system within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking if:
i You can also open and close the power win-
앫
neither door nor trunk is opened
앫
the SmartKey is not inserted in the
starter switch
i USA only: This device complies with Part 15
of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
앫
the central locking switch is not activated
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
Global locking
! To prevent possible malfunction, avoid exposing the SmartKey to high levels of electromagnetic radiation.
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
dows (컄 page 196) and the retractable hardtop
using the SmartKey (컄 page 201).
왘
Press button ‹.
With the trunk and all doors closed, all
turn signals flash three times. The locking knobs in the doors move down.
The anti-theft alarm system is armed.
103
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Selective setting
Global unlocking
! If you can no longer lock or unlock the vehi-
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish
to reprogram the SmartKey so that
pressing Œ only unlocks the driver’s
door, interior lockable storage compartments and the fuel filler flap.
왘
cle with the SmartKey, then the batteries in the
SmartKey are discharged, the SmartKey is malfunctioning or the vehicle battery is drained.
왘
Press and hold buttons Πand
‹ simultaneously for about
6 seconds until battery check lamp 5
flashes twice.
The SmartKey will then function as follows:
Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
flap
왘
Press button Πonce.
All turn signals flash once. The locking
knob in the driver’s door moves up.
The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.
104
Press button Πtwice.
All turn signals flash once. The locking
knobs in the doors move up. The anti-theft
alarm system is disarmed.
앫
Check the batteries in the SmartKey
(컄 page 105) and replace them if necessary
(컄 page 395).
Global locking
앫
Use the mechanical key to unlock the driver’s door (컄 page 391) and the trunk
(컄 page 117).
앫
Have the vehicle batteries and their connections checked (컄 page 414).
앫
Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the
doors (컄 page 393).
왘
Press button ‹.
All turn signals flash three times. The locking knobs in the doors move down.
The anti-theft alarm system is armed.
Restoring to factory setting
왘
Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about 6 seconds
until battery check lamp 5
(컄 page 102) flashes twice.
If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Checking the batteries
Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key
왘
If you lose a SmartKey or mechanical key,
you should do the following:
Press button ‹ or Œ.
Battery check lamp 5 (컄 page 102)
comes on briefly to indicate that the
SmartKey batteries are in order.
왘
Have the SmartKey deactivated by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i If battery check lamp 5 does not come on
briefly during check, then the SmartKey batteries are discharged.
왘
Report the loss of the SmartKey or the
mechanical key to your car insurance
company immediately.
앫
왘
If necessary, have the mechanical lock
replaced.
Replace the batteries (컄 page 395).
You can obtain the required batteries at any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i If the batteries are checked within signal
range of the vehicle, pressing the ‹ or Œ
button will lock or unlock the vehicle accordingly.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
will be glad to supply you with a replacement.
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
Vehicles equipped with KEYLESS-GO come
with two SmartKeys with KEYLESS-GO,
each with remote controls and a removable mechanical key.
The locking tabs for the mechanical key
portion of the two SmartKeys with
KEYLESS-GO are a different color to help
distinguish each SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO unit.
The function of the SmartKey overrules the
KEYLESS-GO function.
The KEYLESS-GO function is integrated
into the SmartKey. On these vehicles, the
validity of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
is checked every time you grasp a door
handle.
105
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is valid,
your vehicle unlocks
앫
the doors
앫
the trunk lid
앫
the glove box
앫
the storage compartment under the
armrest
앫
the storage compartment in the rear
앫
the fuel filler flap
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
1 ‹ Lock button
2 Š Opening button for trunk
(컄 page 111)
3 Mechanical key locking tab
4 ΠUnlock button
5 Battery check lamp
6 Â Panic button (컄 page 86)
For information on using the SmartKey
buttons, see “SmartKey” (컄 page 102).
! To prevent possible malfunction, avoid exposing the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO to high
levels of electromagnetic radiation.
i USA only: This device complies with Part 15
of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
106
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
i Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO
앫
You can also use the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO like a normal SmartKey
(컄 page 102).
앫
You can combine KEYLESS-GO functions with normal SmartKey functions
(e.g. unlocking with KEYLESS-GO and
locking with the ‹ button).
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
i You can also close the power windows
(컄 page 196) and the retractable hardtop using
the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO (컄 page 201).
i When you unlock the vehicle, the
앫
앫
앫
To lock or unlock the vehicle, the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
located outside the vehicle within approximately 3 ft (1 m) of a door or the
trunk.
앫
In order to start the engine with the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO:
Always carry the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO with you.
Never store the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO together with:
앫
electro-hydraulic brake system is activated.
앫
Electronic items such as a cellular
phone or another SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO
Metallic objects such as coins or
metal foil
Doing so could impair the function of
the KEYLESS-GO system.
앫
앫
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
must be located in the vehicle.
앫
All doors must be closed.
앫
The brake pedal must be firmly depressed. Do not depress the accelerator.
If you have started the engine with the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
(컄 page 40), you can only turn it off
again with this button, even if you have
put the SmartKey in the starter switch
in the meantime.
107
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
앫
앫
앫
This does not apply if, after starting, the
selector lever is still in position P and
the SmartKey is then inserted in the
starter switch. The SmartKey will then
have priority over the KEYLESS-GO
function and the vehicle’s electrical
system will operate according to the
position of the SmartKey in the starter
switch, even stopping the engine.
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
positioned farther away from the vehicle, the system may no longer recognize the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO.
The vehicle then cannot be locked or
the engine started via the KEYLESS-GO
system.
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is removed from the vehicle while the engine is running (e.g. if passenger exits
the vehicle with the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO), the message Key not
detected! will appear in the multifunction display while driving off.
108
앫
Find the SmartKey or change its
present location immediately (e.g.
place it on the front passenger seat or
insert it in shirt pocket).
The vehicle will lock again automatically
and reactivate the alarm system within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking if
neither a door nor the trunk is opened.
Remember that the engine can be
started by anyone with a SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO that is left inside the
vehicle. If you leave the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO behind when exiting and
locking the vehicle, the message Key
recognized in vehicle! will appear in
the multifunction display.
i The vehicle could inadvertently unlock if the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is within 3 ft (1 m)
of the vehicle and
Factory setting
앫
or
앫
왘
Grasp an outside door handle.
All turn signals flash once. The locking
knobs in the doors move up. The
anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.
i If the vehicle has been parked for more than
72 hours, you must pull an outside door handle
in order to activate the KEYLESS-GO function.
you attempt to clean an outside door handle
Global locking
왘
Global unlocking
an outside door handle is splashed with
water
Press lock button on an outside door
handle (컄 page 64) or the trunk lid
(컄 page 110).
With the trunk and all doors closed, all
turn signals flash three times. The locking knobs in the doors move down.
The anti-theft alarm system is armed.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Selective setting
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish
to reprogram the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO so that grasping an outside
door handle only unlocks the driver’s door,
interior lockable storage compartments
and the fuel filler flap.
왘
Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about 6 seconds
until battery check lamp 5
(컄 page 106) flashes twice.
Unlocking the driver’s door and fuel filler flap
왘
Global unlocking
Grasp the door handle on the passenger side.
All turn signals flash once. The locking
knobs in the doors move up. The
anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO will
then function as follows:
왘
Grasp the driver’s door handle.
All turn signals flash once. The locking
knob in the driver’s door moves up. The
anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.
왘
Restoring to factory setting
! If you can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO, then
the batteries in the SmartKey are discharged,
the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning or the vehicle battery is drained.
앫
Check the batteries in the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO (컄 page 105) and replace
them if necessary (컄 page 395).
앫
Use the mechanical key to unlock the driver’s door (컄 page 391) and the trunk
(컄 page 117).
앫
Have the vehicle batteries and their connections checked (컄 page 414).
앫
Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the
doors (컄 page 393).
Global locking
왘
Press lock button on an outside door
handle or the trunk lid.
With the trunk and all doors closed, all
turn signals flash three times. The locking knobs in the doors move down.
The anti-theft alarm system is armed.
Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about 6 seconds
until battery check lamp 5
(컄 page 106) flashes twice.
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
109
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Global locking using the lock button on
the trunk lid
왘
i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: To prevent a
possible inadvertent lockout, the trunk lid will
open automatically if a SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO is recognized inside the trunk.
When the hardtop is retracted, it must be completely lowered in the trunk before the trunk lid
can be closed (컄 page 242).
Press lock button 1 on the trunk lid.
Loss of SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
With the trunk and all doors closed, all
turn signals flash three times. The locking knobs in the doors move down.
The anti-theft alarm system is armed.
If you lose your SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO, you should do the following:
button on an outside door handle (컄 page 64).
왘
Report the loss of the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO or the mechanical key to
your car insurance company immediately.
왘
Have the mechanical lock replaced if
necessary.
Checking the batteries
Press button ‹ or Œ.
Battery check lamp 5 (컄 page 106)
comes on briefly to indicate that the
SmartKey batteries are in order.
i If battery check lamp 5 (컄 page 106) does
not come on briefly during check, then the
SmartKey batteries are discharged.
앫
Replace the batteries (컄 page 395).
You can obtain the required batteries at any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i If the batteries are checked within signal
range of the vehicle, pressing the ‹ or Œ
button will lock or unlock the vehicle accordingly.
110
Have the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
deactivated by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
i You can also lock the vehicle using the lock
왘
1 Lock button
왘
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
will be glad to supply you with a replacement.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Opening the doors from the inside
You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so.
i If the vehicle has previously been locked
with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, opening a
door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft
alarm system.
To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:
앫
Press button Œ or ‹ on the
SmartKey.
앫
Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
앫
Grasp an outside door handle.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
within 3 ft. (1 m) of the vehicle.
앫
1 Locking knob
2 Inside door handle
왘
Pull on inside door handle 2 in direction of arrow.
If the door was locked, locking knob 1
will move up.
i If you open a door, the side windows on that
side of the vehicle will lower slightly. The windows close again when you close the door.
Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button
(컄 page 40).
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be inside the vehicle.
Opening the trunk
You can open the trunk if the vehicle is stationary and the retractable hardtop is fully
opened or closed.
Warning!
G
Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
other dangers such as blocked visibility, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior.
A minimum height clearance of
6.2 ft (1.88 m) is required to open the
trunk lid.
i If the trunk lid does not open, the trunk lid is
still locked separately (컄 page 117).
i To facilitate trunk loading and unloading
when the hardtop is retracted, you can raise the
hardtop from its storage position in the trunk using the load assist feature (컄 page 241). You
may also unhook the luggage cover.
Remember to re-secure the luggage cover after
loading/unloading the trunk. Otherwise you will
not be able to lower the retractable hardtop.
111
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Opening the trunk from the outside
Vehicles with trunk opening/closing
system*
왘
Press and hold button Š on the
SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* until trunk unlocks and
begins to open.
Opening the trunk from the inside
Vehicles without trunk opening/closing
system*
or
왘
1 Trunk lid handle
Vehicles without trunk opening/closing
system*
왘
Press button Š on the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*.
or
왘
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO*: The
vehicle must be unlocked.
! The trunk lid swings open upwards automatically. Always make sure that there is sufficient
overhead clearance.
! To stop the opening procedure, press
button Š on the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* or pull the trunk lid handle.
1 Remote trunk opening switch
2 Indicator lamp
왘
Lift the trunk lid.
112
Pull switch 1 until the trunk begins to
open.
The trunk lid unlocks. Indicator
lamp 2 comes on and remains lit until
the trunk is closed again.
Pull on handle 1.
In vehicles without KEYLESS-GO*: The
vehicle must be unlocked.
왘
Pull on handle 1.
왘
Lift the trunk lid.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Vehicles with trunk opening/closing
system*
Closing the trunk
Warning!
Closing trunk from outside manually
G
Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
other dangers such as blocked visibility, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior.
i When the hardtop is retracted, it must be
1 Remote trunk opening/closing* switch
2 Indicator lamp
왘
Pull and hold switch 1 until the trunk
unlocks and begins to open.
Indicator lamp 2 comes on and remains lit until the trunk closed.
왘
Release switch 1.
! The trunk lid swings open upwards automatically. Always make sure that there is sufficient
overhead clearance.
To interrupt the opening procedure:
왘
Press or pull switch 1.
completely lowered in the trunk before the trunk
can be closed (컄 page 199).
1 Handle
i Do not place the SmartKey in the open
왘
Lower trunk lid by pulling firmly on
handle 1.
왘
Close trunk lid with hands placed flat
on trunk lid.
trunk. You may lock yourself out.
i If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked, the trunk will lock automatically after
closing it. All turn signal lamps flash three times
to confirm locking.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, the trunk will open automatically if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
recognized inside the vehicle or in the trunk.
The power closing assist automatically ensures that the lid is pulled closed completely (컄 page 118).
The vehicle is only locked when the turn signals
flash three times. If you are carrying a second
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you, you can
still lock the vehicle.
113
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Warning!
G
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the trunk
lid opening when closing the trunk. Be especially careful when small children are
around.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
114
Closing trunk from inside
automatically*
Warning!
G
Maintain sight of trunk area while operating
door mounted switch. Monitor the closing
procedure carefully to make sure no one is
in danger of being injured.
i If the trunk lid comes into contact with an
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has been
piled too high) in the upper motion sequence, the
closing procedure is stopped and the trunk reopens slightly.
In vehicles with trunk opening/closing
system* you can close the trunk from
the inside using the remote trunk
opening/ closing* switch.
To interrupt the closing procedure, release
the door mounted remote trunk opening/closing* switch again.
Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* removed from the starter
switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
removed from the vehicle, the remote trunk
opening/closing* switch can be operated.
Therefore, do not leave children unattended
in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
1 Remote trunk opening/closing* switch
(vehicles with trunk opening/closing
system*)
2 Indicator lamp
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
왘
Press and hold switch 1 until the
trunk is closed.
Indicator lamp 2 in the switch goes
out when the trunk is closed.
To interrupt the closing procedure:
왘
Release switch 1.
Closing trunk from outside
automatically*
Warning!
G
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
make sure no one is in danger of being injured. To prevent possible personal injury,
always keep hands and fingers away from
the trunk lid opening when closing the trunk.
Be especially careful when small children
are around. To stop the closing procedure,
do one of the following:
앫
Press button Š on the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*.
앫
Press the trunk opening/closing*
switch (on the driver’s door).
앫
Press trunk closing switch.
앫
Press the KEYLESS-GO locking/closing
switch*.
앫
Pull the trunk lid handle.
Even with the SmartKey removed from the
starter switch, the trunk opening/closing*
switch can be operated. Therefore, do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
In vehicles with trunk opening/closing system* you can close the trunk separately
from the outside using the trunk closing
switch.
115
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
왘
Press trunk closing switch 1 briefly.
왘
Make sure you have the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO with you.
왘
Press switch 1 briefly.
The trunk closes.
Closing trunk and locking vehicle from
outside (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*)
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO*
In vehicles with trunk opening/closing system* and KEYLESS-GO*, you can close the
trunk and lock the vehicle simultaneously
from the outside using the KEYLESS-GO
locking/closing switch.
1 Trunk closing switch
1 KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*
1 Trunk closing switch
116
With the doors closed, the locking
knobs in the doors move down and the
trunk starts to close automatically.
All turn signal lamps flash three times
to confirm locking once the trunk has
closed completely. The anti-theft alarm
system is activated.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Valet locking
i To deny any unauthorized person access to
the trunk, e.g. when you valet park the vehicle,
lock it separately with the mechanical key. Leave
only the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* less its mechanical key with the
vehicle.
왘
Close the trunk (컄 page 113).
Trunk lid emergency release
왘
Pull the mechanical key out of the
SmartKey (컄 page 391).
With the emergency release button, the
trunk can be opened from inside the trunk.
왘
Insert the mechanical key in the trunk
lid lock.
왘
Turn the mechanical key clockwise to
position 2 and remove the mechanical key in that position to lock the
trunk.
The lock is located next to the handle
above the rear license plate recess.
The emergency release button is located
on the left side of the trunk.
The trunk remains locked even when the
vehicle is centrally unlocked.
i You can only cancel the separate trunk locking mode by means of the mechanical key.
왘
왘
1 Neutral position
2 Locked
Insert the mechanical key in the trunk
lid lock.
Turn the mechanical key counterclockwise to neutral position 1 and remove
the mechanical key in that position to
unlock the trunk.
1 Emergency release button
왘
Briefly press emergency release
button 1.
컄컄
The trunk opens.
You can now open the trunk
(컄 page 111).
117
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
컄컄 i The emergency release button unlocks and
opens the trunk while the vehicle is standing still
or in motion.
Illumination of the emergency release button:
앫
The button flashes for 30 minutes after
opening the trunk.
앫
The button flashes for 60 minutes after
closing the trunk.
i The emergency release button does not
open the trunk lid if the vehicle battery is discharged or disconnected.
Power closing assist for trunk lid
Power closing assist for trunk lid
It is not necessary to slam the trunk lid
closed. A electrical power-assisted mechanism draws trunk lid closed quietly and automatically once trunk lid has been
latched. When the pneumatic power-assisted mechanism has stopped, trunk can
be re-opened.
Warning!
G
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the trunk
lid opening when closing the trunk. Be especially careful when small children are
around.
In case of danger, pull the inside or outside
door handle, or press the trunk lid lock.
To prevent personal injury, never actuate
the closing assist mechanism by tampering
with the door or trunk lid latch.
118
왘
Press the trunk lid gently into its lock.
The trunk closes automatically.
Warning!
G
Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
other dangers such as blocked visibility, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Automatic central locking
Locking and unlocking from the inside
The doors and the trunk lid lock automatically when the vehicle is set into motion.
You can lock or unlock the vehicle from inside using the central locking switches.
This can be useful, for example, if you want
to unlock the passenger door from the inside or want to lock the vehicle before
starting to drive.
Warning!
You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so.
i The doors unlock automatically after an accident if the force of the impact exceeds a preset
threshold.
The vehicle locks automatically when the ignition
is switched on and the wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h)
or more. You could therefore lock yourself out
when the vehicle
앫
is pushed
앫
is on a test stand
You can deactivate the automatic locking
using the control system (컄 page 162).
The central locking switch does not lock or
unlock the fuel filler flap.
Warning!
G
You can open a locked door from inside at
any time. Open door only when conditions
are safe to do so.
The switches are located above and between the center air vents of the air conditioning.
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take
it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
Central locking switches
1 Locking
2 Unlocking
119
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Locking
왘
Press central locking switch 1.
If all the doors are closed, the vehicle
locks.
Unlocking
왘
Press central unlocking switch 2.
The vehicle unlocks.
i If the vehicle was previously centrally locked
using the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*, it will not unlock using the central
locking switch.
If the vehicle was previously locked with the central locking switch
앫
while in the global remote control mode, the
complete vehicle is unlocked when a door is
opened from the inside
앫
while in the selective remote control mode,
only the door opened from the inside is unlocked
120
Controls in detail
Seats
왔 Seats
For more information on seat adjustment,
see “Seat adjustment” (컄 page 43).
The switch is located on the top side of the
seat.
Lumbar support
You can adjust the contour of the seat’s
lumbar support to help enhance support to
your spine.
Moving the seats forward and
backward
You can move the seats forward and back
to facilitate loading and unloading.
Warning!
G
When moving the seats, be sure that no one
can be caught by them. Never place hands
under seat or near any moving parts during
a seat adjustment procedure. To stop the
seat from moving when potential danger exists:
앫
press the switch again
앫
move the seat adjustment switch on the
door (컄 page 42)
! When moving the seats, make sure that
there are no items in the footwell or behind the
seats. Otherwise you could damage the seats.
1 Seat forward
2 Seat backward
Moving the seat forward
1 Thumbwheel
왘
Press switch at 1 and release.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
The seat moves forward automatically.
왘
Set the lumbar support between 0
and 5.
Moving the seat backward
왘
Press switch at 2 and release.
The seat moves backwards to its previous position automatically.
121
Controls in detail
Seats
Multicontour backrest*
왘
The multicontour backrest has inflatable
air cushions built into the seat backrest to
provide additional lumbar and side support.
Shoulder region support
The seat backrest cushion height and curvature can be continuously varied with
switches on the lower left side (driver’s
seat) or the lower right side (passenger
side) of the seat when the ignition is
switched on.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
Press æ or ç on switch 2.
You can reduce muscle tension during long
trips by periodically using the massage
function.
The air cushion inflates or deflates.
왘
Lumbar region support
왘
Press k or j on rocker
switch 1.
This selects the air cushion you wish to
adjust.
왘
Press æ or ç on rocker
switch 1.
The air cushion inflates or deflates.
Side bolsters adjustment
왘
Press switch 3 to the right or left.
The lateral support increases or decreases.
1 Lumbar region support
2 Shoulder region support
3 Side bolsters adjustment
4 Massage function (PULSE)
122
Massage function (PULSE)
Press button 4.
The indicator lamp on button 4 comes
on. The air cushions in the lumbar region inflate and deflate rhythmically.
i The massage function switches off automatically after approximately 8 minutes. The indicator lamp goes out.
Controls in detail
Seats
Seat heating
The switch is located on the door control
panel.
Switching on rapid seat heating
왘
Vehicles without seat ventilation*
Press upper switch position 2.
Both red indicator lamps on the switch
come on.
The red indicator lamps on the switch indicate the selected heating level:
Switching off rapid seat heating
Level
2
왘
Two red indicator lamps on
(rapid seat heating)
The seat heating automatically
switches to level 1 after approximately 5 minutes.
1
One red indicator lamp on
(normal seat heating)
The seat heating automatically
switches off after approximately
30 minutes.
off
Press upper switch position 2 again.
i If one lamp or both lamps on the seat heat1 Normal heating
2 Rapid heating
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
ing switch are flashing, there is insufficient voltage available since too many electrical
consumers are turned on. The seat heating
switches off automatically.
The seat heating will switch back on again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available.
Switching on seat heating
왘
Press lower switch position 1.
A red indicator lamp on the switch
comes on.
No red indicator lamp on
Switching off seat heating
왘
Press lower switch position 1 once
more.
123
Controls in detail
Seats
Vehicles with seat ventilation*
The red indicator lamps on the switch indicate the selected heating level:
The switch is located on the door control
panel.
Two red indicator lamps on
(rapid seat heating)
The seat heating automatically
switches to level 1 after approximately 5 minutes.
1
One red indicator lamp on
(normal seat heating)
The seat heating automatically
switches off after approximately
30 minutes.
off
No red indicator lamp on
Press button 1 repeatedly until all indicator lamps go out.
The seat heating will switch back on again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available.
1 Seat heating switch
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
Switching on seat heating
왘
Press button 1 repeatedly until the
desired heating level is set.
One or two red indicator lamps on the
button show the selected heating level.
124
왘
i If one or both of the lamps on the seat heating switch are flashing, there is insufficient voltage available since too many electrical
consumers are turned on. The seat heating
switches off automatically.
Level
2
Switching off seat heating
Controls in detail
Seats
Seat ventilation*
The switch is located on the door control
panel.
The blue indicator lamps on the switch indicate the selected ventilation level:
왘
왘
3
Three blue indicator lamps on
(highest level)
2
Two blue indicator lamps on
1
One blue indicator lamp on
(lowest level)
No blue indicator lamp on
Press switch 1.
Three blue indicator lamps on the
switch come on.
Level
off
Switching on seat ventilation
Continue pressing switch 1 until the
desired seat ventilation level is
reached.
Switching off seat ventilation
왘
1 Seat ventilation switch
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
Press switch 1 repeatedly until all indicator lamps go out.
i If one or all of the lamps on the seat ventilation switch are flashing, there is insufficient voltage available since too many electrical
consumers are turned on. The seat ventilation
switches off automatically.
The seat ventilation will switch back on again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available.
125
Controls in detail
Memory function
Prior to operating the vehicle, the driver
should check and adjust the seat height,
seat position fore and aft, and seat backrest angle if necessary, to ensure adequate
control, reach and comfort. The head restraint should also be adjusted for proper
height. See also the section on air bags
(컄 page 68) for proper seat positioning.
In addition, adjust the steering wheel to
ensure adequate control, reach, operation
and comfort. Both the interior and exterior
rear view mirrors should be adjusted for
adequate rear vision.
Fasten seat belts. Infants and small children should be seated in a properly secured restraint system that complies with
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 and Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard 213.
126
With the memory switch you can store up
to three different settings.
The memory switch is located on the door
control panel.
The following settings are stored when using the buttons on the driver’s door:
앫
Driver’s seat and backrest position
앫
Steering wheel position
앫
Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror
position
앫
Passenger side exterior rear view mirror position
The following settings are stored when using the buttons on the passenger door:
앫
Passenger seat and backrest position
Warning!
G
Do not activate the memory function on the
driver’s side while driving. Activating the
memory function while driving could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
M
Memory button
1, 2, 3
Stored positions
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
or
왘
Open the respective door.
Controls in detail
Memory function
Storing positions into memory
Recalling positions from memory
왘
Adjust the seats, steering wheel and
exterior rear view mirrors to the desired position (컄 page 42).
왘
왘
Press memory button M.
왘
Release memory button and press a
stored position button 1, 2, or 3 within
3 seconds.
On memory switch, press and hold
stored position button 1, 2 or 3 until
the seat, steering wheel and exterior
rear view mirrors have fully moved to
the stored positions.
i Releasing the button immediately stops
movement to the stored positions.
All the settings are stored at the selected position.
127
Controls in detail
Lighting
For information on how to switch on the
headlamps and use the turn signals, see
“Switching on headlamps” (컄 page 55)
and “Turn signals” (컄 page 56).
Exterior lamp switch
The exterior lamp switch is located on the
dashboard to the left of the steering wheel.
i If you drive in countries where vehicles drive
on the other side of the road than the country in
which the vehicle is registered, you must have
the headlamps modified for symmetrical low
beams. Relevant information can be obtained at
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Canada only: When the engine is
running, the low beam headlamps
are also switched on.
B Low beam headlamps (or high
beam headlamps when the combination switch is pushed forward)
and parking lamps
ˆ Standing lamps, right (turn left one
stop)
‚ Standing lamps, left (turn left two
stops)
C Indicator lamp for parking lamps
M Off
Daytime running lamp mode
(컄 page 130)
‡ Indicator lamp for front fog lamps
U Automatic headlamp mode
Daytime running lamp mode
(컄 page 130)
i With the SmartKey removed from the starter
switch or the engine turned off with
KEYLESS-GO* and the driver’s door open, a
warning sounds if the parking lamps or the low
beam headlamps are switched on.
C Parking lamps (also tail lamps, license plate lamps, side marker
lamps, instrument panel lamps)
128
† Indicator lamp for rear fog lamp
The message $ Turn off lamps appears in
the multifunction display.
Controls in detail
Lighting
Manual headlamp mode
The low beam headlamps and parking
lamps can be switched on or off with the
exterior lamp switch (컄 page 55).
Warning!
If the exterior lamp switch is set to U,
앫
Automatic headlamp mode
The following lamps switch on and off automatically depending on the brightness of
the ambient light:
앫
Low beam headlamps
앫
Tail lamps
앫
Parking lamps
앫
License plate lamps
앫
Side marker lamps
G
앫
the headlamps may switch off unexpectedly when the system senses bright ambient light, for example light from
oncoming traffic.
the headlamps will not be automatically
switched on under foggy conditions.
To minimize risk to you and to others, activate headlamps by turning exterior lamp
switch to B when driving or when traffic
and/or ambient lighting conditions require
you to do so.
In low ambient lighting conditions, only
switch from position U to B with the
vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
Switching from U to B will briefly
switch off the headlamps. Doing so while
driving in low ambient lighting conditions
may result in an accident.
The automatic headlamp feature is only an
aid to the driver. The driver is responsible for
the operation of the vehicle’s lights at all
times.
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to position U.
With the SmartKey in starter switch
position 1 or the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button pressed once, only
the parking lamps and side marker
lamps will switch on and off automatically.
When the engine is running, the low
beam headlamps, the tail and parking
lamps, the license plate lamps, and the
side marker lamps will switch on and
off automatically.
129
Controls in detail
Lighting
Daytime running lamp mode
Canada only:
USA only:
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position M or U.
The daytime running lamp mode is mandatory and therefore in a constant mode.
When the engine is running, the low
beam headlamps are switched on automatically.
When the engine is running and you shift
from a driving position to position N or P,
the low beam headlamps will switch off
with a three-minute delay.
By default, the daytime running lamp mode
is deactivated. Activate the daytime running lamp mode using the control system,
see “Setting daytime running lamp mode
(USA only)” (컄 page 159).
In low ambient light conditions, the following lamps will switch on additionally:
앫
Tail lamps
앫
Side marker lamps
앫
Parking lamps
앫
License plate lamps
When the engine is running and you
앫
turn the exterior lamp switch to position C, the parking lamps switch on
additionally
앫
turn the exterior lamp switch to position B, the manual headlamp mode
has priority over the daytime running
lamp mode
The corresponding exterior lamps
switch on (컄 page 128).
130
When the engine is running and you turn
the exterior lamp switch to position C
or B, the manual headlamp mode has
priority over the daytime running lamp
mode.
The corresponding exterior lamps switch
on (컄 page 128).
Locator lighting and night security
illumination
Locator lighting and night security illumination are described in the control system
section, see “Setting locator lighting”
(컄 page 160) and “Setting night security illumination” (컄 page 160).
Controls in detail
Lighting
Fog lamps
Warning!
G
In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,
only switch from position U to B with
the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
Switching from U to B will briefly
switch off the headlamps. Doing so while
driving in low ambient lighting conditions
may result in an accident.
i Fog lamps will operate with the parking
lamps and/or the low beam headlamps on. Fog
lamps should only be used in conjunction with
low beam headlamps. Consult your State or
Province Motor Vehicle Regulations regarding
permissible lamp operation.
Front fog lamps
Rear fog lamp (driver’s side only)
왘
Switch on the low beam headlamps
(컄 page 55).
왘
Switch on the front fog lamps
(컄 page 131).
왘
Pull out the exterior lamp switch to first
stop.
왘
Pull out the exterior lamp switch to second stop.
왘
The front fog lamps are switched on.
The rear fog lamp is switched on.
The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
exterior lamp switch comes on
(컄 page 128).
The yellow indicator lamp † in the
lamp switch comes on (컄 page 128).
왘
Push in the exterior lamp switch.
Push in the exterior lamp switch to first
stop.
The front fog lamps are switched off.
The rear fog lamp is switched off.
The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
exterior lamp switch goes out.
The yellow indicator lamp † in the
exterior lamp switch goes out.
The front fog lamps remain lit.
i The fog lamps cannot be switched on with
the exterior lamp switch in position U. To
switch on the fog lamps, turn the exterior lamp
switch to position B first.
131
Controls in detail
Lighting
Corner-illuminating front fog lamps
Driving forward
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps improve illumination of the road into which
you are turning.
Switching on corner-illuminating front
fog lamps
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will
operate with the engine running and with
앫
the exterior lamp switch in
position B (컄 page 128)
or
앫
the exterior lamp switch in
position U (컄 page 128)
or
앫
the daytime running lamp mode
activated (컄 page 130)
i Corner-illuminating front fog lamps will only
come on in low ambient lighting conditions.
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps function
is not available at a vehicle speed above 25 mph
(40 km/h).
왘
Depending on whether you are turning
left or right, switch on the left or right
turn signal (컄 page 56).
The respective front fog lamp comes on
and illuminates the road onto which
you are turning.
i The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will
come on automatically depending on the
steering angle, even if you did not switch on either turn signal.
If the corner-illuminating front fog lamps came
on automatically, they will also go out automatically depending on the steering angle.
Switching off corner-illuminating front
fog lamps
The combination switch for the turn signal
resets automatically after major steering
wheel movements. This will switch off the
corner-illuminating front fog lamps if they
were activated by switching on the left or
right turn signal.
If the turn signal should stay on after making the turn, the turn signal and corner-illuminating front fog lamp can be switched
off by returning the combination switch to
its original position.
Driving rearward
Switching on corner-illuminating front
fog lamps
왘
Place the gear selector lever in
position R.
The inverse front fog lamp comes on
automatically depending on the steering direction and steering angle.
Switching off corner-illuminating front
fog lamps
왘
Place the gear selector lever out of
position R.
The respective front fog lamp goes out.
132
Controls in detail
Lighting
Combination switch
The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column.
High beam
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to B
or to U (컄 page 128).
왘
Push the combination switch in direction of arrow 1 to switch on the high
beam headlamps.
The hazard warning flasher can be
switched on at all times, even with the
SmartKey removed from the starter switch
or with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
removed from the vehicle.
The high beam indicator lamp A in
the instrument cluster comes on.
The hazard warning flasher switches on
automatically when an air bag deploys.
Pull the combination switch in direction
of arrow 2 to its original position to
switch off the high beam headlamps.
The switch is located on the dashboard between the center air vents.
왘
The high beam indicator lamp A in
the instrument cluster goes out.
Combination switch
1 High beam
2 High beam flasher
Hazard warning flasher
High beam flasher
왘
Pull the combination switch briefly in
direction of arrow 2.
1 Hazard warning flasher switch
133
Controls in detail
Lighting
Switching on the hazard warning
flasher
왘
Press hazard warning flasher
switch 1.
Interior lighting
The interior lighting controls are located in
the overhead control panel.
and the combination switch set for either left or
right turn, only the respective turn signals will
operate when the ignition is switched on.
Switching off the hazard warning
flasher
i If the hazard warning flasher was switched
on automatically because of an air bag that has
deployed, press hazard warning flasher
switch 1 once to switch it off.
1 Left reading lamp on/off
2 Right reading lamp on/off
3 Interior lighting on/off
4 Slide switch for interior lighting control
! An interior lamp switched on manually does
not go out automatically.
Leaving the interior lighting switch in the ON position for extended periods of time with the engine turned off could result in discharged
batteries.
134
Slide switch 4 to the right.
The interior lighting and the entry/exit
lamps remain switched off in darkness,
even when you
i With the hazard warning flasher activated
Press hazard warning flasher switch 1
again.
i The interior lighting is factory-set to automatic mode.
왘
All turn signals are flashing.
왘
Deactivating automatic control
앫
unlock the vehicle
앫
remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch
앫
open a door
앫
open the trunk
Controls in detail
Lighting
Activating automatic control
왘
Slide switch 4 to the left.
The interior lighting switches on in
darkness when you
앫
앫
Manual control
Courtesy lighting
Switching interior lighting on and off
For better orientation in the dark, courtesy
lamps will illuminate the interior of your vehicle as follows:
왘
The interior lighting switches on.
unlock the vehicle
remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch
앫
open a door
앫
open the trunk
In addition, the entry/exit lamps in the
door trays come on when you open a
door.
The interior lighting switches off after
approximately 10 seconds if the interior lighting delayed switch-off feature is
set to On in the control system
(컄 page 161).
i If a door remains open, the interior lighting
switches off automatically after approximately
5 minutes.
Press switch 3.
왘
Press switch 3 once more.
The interior lighting switches off.
With parking lamps switched on:
앫
the door handles
앫
the driver and passenger footwells
Switching reading lamps on and off
With SmartKey in starter switch position 1:
왘
앫
the door handles
앫
the center console
왘
Press reading lamp switch 1 or 2 to
switch on the desired reading lamp.
Press reading lamp switch 1 or 2
again to switch off the respective reading lamp.
i If you turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 0 and switch off the headlamps, the door handle lamps will remain lit for
approximately 5 minutes.
Trunk lamp
The trunk lamp switches on when the trunk
is opened.
If the trunk lid remains open, the trunk
lighting switches off automatically after approximately 10 minutes.
135
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
For a full view illustration of the instrument
cluster, see “Instrument cluster”
(컄 page 26).
The instrument cluster is activated when
you
앫
open a door
앫
switch on the ignition
앫
press the reset button (컄 page 26)
앫
switch on the exterior lamps
Adjusting instrument cluster
illumination
Warning!
Use the reset button to adjust the illumination brightness for the instrument cluster
and the switches on the center console.
No messages will be displayed if either the
instrument cluster or the multifunction
display is inoperative.
i The instrument cluster illumination is
As a result, you will not be able to see information about your driving conditions, such
as speed or outside temperature, warning/indicator lamps, malfunction/warning
messages or the failure of any systems.
Driving characteristics may be impaired.
dimmed or brightened to suit ambient light conditions.
Opening a door will activate the instrument
cluster only for about 30 seconds.
If you must continue to drive, do so with
added caution. Visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
You can change the instrument cluster settings in the Instrument cluster submenu of
the control system (컄 page 156).
1 Reset button
136
G
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
To brighten illumination
왘
Turn reset button 1 in the instrument
cluster clockwise.
The instrument cluster illumination will
brighten.
Coolant temperature gauge
Warning!
앫
Driving when your engine is overheated
can cause some fluids which may have
leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire. You could be seriously
burned.
앫
Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns which can occur
just by opening the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it.
To dim illumination
왘
Turn reset button 1 in the instrument
cluster counterclockwise.
The instrument cluster illumination will
dim.
G
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
! Excessive coolant temperature triggers the
coolant temperature warning lamp (컄 page 337)
and a warning in the multifunction display
(컄 page 371).
The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248°F (120°C). Doing so
may cause serious engine damage which is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
i During severe operating conditions, e.g.
stop-and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may
rise close to 248°F (120°C).
Trip odometer
왘
Make sure you are viewing the trip
odometer display (컄 page 139).
왘
If it is not displayed, press the j or
k button on the multifunction
steering wheel repeatedly until the trip
odometer appears.
왘
Press and hold reset button 1
(컄 page 136) until the trip odometer is
reset.
137
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Tachometer
Outside temperature indicator
The red marking on the tachometer denotes excessive engine speed.
Warning!
! Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds, as
it may result in serious engine damage that is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply
is interrupted if the engine is operated
within the red marking.
Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
G
The outside temperature is displayed in
the left or right multifunction display
(컄 page 26), depending on the setting
(컄 page 156).
138
The temperature sensor is located in the
front bumper area. Due to its location, the
sensor can be affected by road or engine
heat during idling or slow driving. Therefore, the accuracy of the displayed temperature can only be verified by comparison to
a thermometer placed next the sensor, not
by comparison to external displays, e.g.
bank signs, etc.
When moving the vehicle into colder ambient temperatures (e.g. when leaving your
garage), you will notice a delay before the
lower temperature is displayed.
A delay also occurs when ambient temperatures rise. This prevents inaccurate temperature indications caused by heat
radiated from the engine during idling or
slow driving.
Controls in detail
Control system
왔 Control system
The control system is activated as soon
as the SmartKey in the starter switch is
turned to position 1 or as soon as the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button is in
position 1. The control system enables
you to
앫
call up information about your vehicle
앫
change vehicle settings
For example, you can use the control system to find out when your vehicle is next
due for service, to set the language for
messages in the instrument cluster display, and much more.
Warning!
G
A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
conditions must always be his/her primary
focus when driving.
For your safety and the safety of others,
selecting features through the multifunction
steering wheel should only be done by the
driver when traffic and road conditions permit it to be done safely.
Multifunction display
The multifunction display consists of the
display fields in the speedometer and the
tachometer. In its default state, the left
multifunction display shows the main
odometer and the outside temperature,
while the trip odometer appears in the
right multifunction display. This default
setting is referred to as the standard
display.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just
30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your
vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet
(approximately 14 m) every second.
The control system relays information to
the multifunction display.
1 Main odometer
2 Outside temperature
3 Current gear selector lever position
4 Trip odometer
5 Automatic transmission program mode
139
Controls in detail
Control system
Multifunction steering wheel
The displays in the multifunction display
and the settings in the control system are
controlled by the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel.
1 Left multifunction display in the
speedometer
2 Right multifunction display in the
tachometer
Operating the control system
3 Selecting the submenu or setting the
volume:
Press button
ç down / to decrease
æ up / to increase
4 Telephone*:
Press button
s to take a call
t to end a call
140
5 Menu systems:
Press button
ÿ for previous menu
è for next menu
6 Moving within a menu:
Press button
j for next display
k for previous display
Depending on the selected menu, pressing
the buttons on the multifunction steering
wheel will alter what appears in the multifunction display.
The information available in the multifunction display is arranged in menus, each
containing a number of functions or submenus.
Controls in detail
Control system
The individual functions are then found
within the relevant menu (radio or CD operations under AUDIO, for example). These
functions serve to call up relevant information or to customize the settings for your
vehicle.
It is helpful to think of the menus, and the
functions within each menu, as being arranged in a circular pattern.
앫
If you press button è or ÿ repeatedly, you will pass through each
menu one after the other.
앫
If you press button k or j repeatedly, you will pass through each
function display, one after the other, in
the current menu.
In the Settings menu, instead of functions
you will find a number of submenus for
calling up and changing settings. For instructions on using these submenus, see
“Settings menu” (컄 page 153).
The number of menus available in the system depends on which optional equipment
is installed in your vehicle.
The menus are described on the following
pages.
141
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus
142
This is what you will see when you scroll
through the menus.
The table below provides an overview of
the individual menus.
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus, submenus and functions
Commands/submenus
Menu 1
Menu 2
1
Menu 3
Menu 4
Menu 5
AUDIO
NAV
Distronic*
Standard display
AMG
(컄 page 145)
(컄 page 146)
(컄 page 149)
(컄 page 151)
(컄 page 151)
Digital speedometer/Outside temperature
Engine oil temperature
Selecting radio station
Show route guidance
instructions, current
direction traveled
Calling up settings
Calling up maintenance Vehicle supply voltage
service indicator
Selecting satellite radio
station
(USA only)
Checking tire inflation
pressure*
Operating CD player
RACETIMER
Checking engine oil lev- Overall analysis
el
Lap analysis
1
AMG vehicles only.
Table continued on next page.
143
Controls in detail
Commands/submenus
Control system
Menu 6
Menu 7
Menu 8
Menu 9
Vehicle status
message memory1
Settings
Trip computer
Telephone*
(컄 page 152)
(컄 page 153)
(컄 page 163)
(컄 page 165)
Calling up vehicle malfunction, warning and
system status messages stored in memory
Resetting to factory set- Fuel consumption statings
tistics after start
Loading phone book
Instrument cluster
submenu
Fuel consumption sta- Searching for name in
tistics since the last re- phone book
set
Time submenu
Distance to empty
Lighting submenu
Vehicle submenu
Convenience submenu
1
You will only see the message memory menu if there is a message.
i The headings used in the menus table are
designed to facilitate navigation within the system and are not necessarily identical to those
shown in the control system displays.
144
The first function displayed in each menu will automatically show you which part of the system
you are in.
Controls in detail
Control system
Standard display menu
1 Main odometer
2 Outside temperature
3 Current gear selector lever position
4 Trip odometer
5 Automatic transmission program mode
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the standard display
menu in the multifunction display.
You can modify the standard display menu.
Instead of outside temperature 2, you
can choose the digital speedometer to be
displayed in the left multifunction display
by changing the setting in the Select display function of the Inst. cluster submenu (컄 page 157).
왘
Press button k or jto select
the functions in the standard display
menu.
Display digital speedometer or outside
temperature
i If you have selected the digital speedometer
for the standard display (컄 page 157), select the
outside temperature display here.
왘
Press button k or juntil the
digital speedometer or, depending on
the chosen setting, the outside temperature appears in the right multifunction
display.
The following functions are available:
Function
Page
Calling up digital speedometer
145
Calling up maintenance service
indicator
320
Checking tire inflation pressure
292
Checking engine oil level
276
145
Controls in detail
Control system
AMG menu
i This function is only available in AMG
vehicles.
The main screen of the AMG menu shows
you the gear currently engaged as well as
the engine oil temperature.
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the AMG menu.
Use buttons k or j to select the following functions in the AMG menu:
Function
Page
Vehicle supply voltage
146
RACETIMER
147
Overall analysis
148
Lap analysis
149
Vehicle supply voltage
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the AMG menu.
왘
Press button j repeatedly until you
see the vehicle supply voltage.
i If the engine reaches the overspeed range in
the manual shift program, the menu will be
shown in red. In addition, you will see UP next to
gear indicator 2 as a reminder to upshift.
1 Engine oil temperature
2 Gear indicator
i The engine oil temperature symbol flashes if
the engine oil temperature has not yet reached
80°C. During this time, avoid driving at full
engine speed.
146
1 Vehicle supply voltage
2 Gear indicator
Controls in detail
Control system
RACETIMER
i You can start the RACETIMER when the
Stopping the RACETIMER
The RACETIMER allows you to time and
save driving stretches in hours, minutes
and seconds.
engine is running or the starter switch is in
position 2 (컄 page 39).
왘
i While the RACETIMER is being displayed,
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the AMG menu.
you cannot adjust the volume using
buttons æ or ç.
왘
Press button j repeatedly until you
see the RACETIMER.
Starting the RACETIMER
왘
Press button æ.
The timer starts.
Displaying intermediate time
왘
1 Lap
2 RACETIMER
3 Gear indicator
Press button ç while the timer is
running.
The intermediate time is shown for
5 seconds.
Press button æ.
The timer stops.
i When you stop the vehicle and turn the
Smartkey to position 1 (컄 page 40) or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*, turn off the engine and
do not open the driver’s door, the RACETIMER
stops timing. Timing is resumed when you
switch the ignition back on (컄 page 39) or
restart the engine (컄 page 52) and then press
the æ button.
Saving lap time and starting a new lap
i You can save up to nine laps.
왘
Press button ç while the timer is
running.
The intermediate time will be shown for
5 seconds.
컄컄
147
Controls in detail
Control system
컄컄 왘
Press button ç within the next
5 seconds.
Resetting current lap
Overall analysis
왘
i These functions are only available if you
have saved at least one lap and have stopped the
RACETIMER.
The intermediate time shown will be
saved as a lap time.
The RACETIMER begins timing the new
lap. The new lap begins to be timed as
soon as the intermediate time is called
up.
Press button æ while the timer is
running.
The timer stops.
왘
Press button ç.
The lap time is reset to “0”.
Deleting all laps
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the AMG menu.
왘
Press button j repeatedly until you
see the overall analysis.
i It is not possible to delete a single saved lap.
왘
Press button æ while the timer is
running.
The timer stops.
1 Best lap time
2 Lap number
3 RACETIMER
4 Gear indicator
왘
Press the reset button twice
(컄 page 27).
왘
Press button æ.
The timer starts. The saved laps are deleted.
i When you switch off the engine, the
RACETIMER will be reset to“0” after 30 seconds.
All laps are deleted.
148
1 Overall analysis of RACETIMER
2 Overall driving time
3 Maximum speed
4 Average speed
5 Overall distance driven
Controls in detail
Control system
Lap analysis
i These functions are only available if you
have saved at least two laps and have stopped
the RACETIMER.
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the AMG menu.
왘
Press button j repeatedly until you
see the lap analysis.
AUDIO menu
Selecting radio station
The functions in the AUDIO menu operate
the audio equipment which you currently
have turned on.
If no audio equipment is currently turned
on, the message AUDIO OFF appears in the
right multifunction display.
왘
Press button j or k to see other
lap analyses.
Turn on COMAND and select radio. Refer to the separate operating instructions.
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the currently tuned station in the right multifunction display.
The following functions are available:
Function
Page
Selecting radio station
149
Selecting satellite radio station 150
(USA only)
1 Lap number
2 Lap time
3 Maximum speed
4 Average speed during lap
5 Lap length
왘
Operating CD player
150
1 Waveband setting
2 Station frequency
왘
Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired station is found.
i You can only store new stations using the
designated feature on the radio. Refer to the
separate operating instructions.
i Each lap is shown in its own submenu. The
fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol 1.
149
Controls in detail
Control system
Selecting satellite radio station
(USA only)
The satellite radio is treated as a radio application.
왘
왘
Select satellite radio with the corresponding key on the COMAND control
panel (SAT).
Operating the CD player
and a subscription to satellite radio service provider are required for satellite radio operation.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for details and availability for your vehicle.
Selecting CD track
왘
Turn on COMAND and select CD. Refer
to the separate COMAND operating instructions.
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the settings for the CD currently
being played appear in the right multifunction display.
For more information, refer to separate
COMAND operating instructions.
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the currently tuned station in the right multifunction display.
1 SAT mode
2 Channel name or number
왘
i Additional optional satellite radio equipment
Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired channel is found.
150
1 Current CD (with additional number
from 1 to 6 when running from CD
changer)
2 Current track
왘
Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired track is selected.
Controls in detail
Control system
Selecting MP3-CD track
왘
Turn on COMAND and select MP3-CD.
Refer to the separate COMAND operating instructions.
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the settings for the MP3-CD currently being played appear in the right
multifunction display.
NAV menu
The NAV menu contains the functions needed to operate your navigation system.
왘
The message shown in the multifunction
display depends on the status of the navigation system:
앫
1 Current track
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the message NAV in the
left multifunction display.
앫
Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired track is selected.
앫
With COMAND switched off, the message NAV off appears in the
multifunction display.
With COMAND switched on but route
guidance not activated, the direction of
travel and, if applicable, the name of
the street currently traveled on appear
in the multifunction display.
Please refer to the COMAND manual for instructions on how to activate the route
guidance system.
Distronic* menu
Use the Distronic menu (컄 page 217) to
display the current settings for your Distronic system. The information shown in
the multifunction display depends on
whether the Distronic system is activated
or deactivated.
Please refer to the “Driving systems” section of this manual (컄 page 213) for instructions on how to activate Distronic.
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
to select the Distronic menu in the
multifunction display.
With COMAND switched on and route
guidance activated, the direction of
travel and maneuver instructions appear in the multifunction display.
151
Controls in detail
Control system
Vehicle status message memory menu
Warning!
Use the vehicle status message memory
menu to scan malfunction and warning
messages that may be stored in the system. Such messages appear in the multifunction display and are based on
conditions or system status the vehicle’s
system has recorded.
The vehicle status message memory menu
only appears, if messages have been
stored.
G
Malfunction and warning messages are only
indicated for certain systems and are intentionally not very detailed. The malfunction
and warning messages are simply a reminder with respect to the operation of certain
systems and do not replace the owner’s
and/or driver’s responsibility to maintain
the vehicle’s operating safety by having all
required maintenance and safety checks
performed on the vehicle and by bringing
the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center to address the malfunction and
warning messages (컄 page 347).
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the vehicle status message memory menu appears in the multifunction
display.
If the vehicle status message memory
menu does not appear, no messages
have been stored.
152
If conditions have occurred causing status
messages to be recorded, the number of
messages appears in the right multifunction display:
1 Number of recorded status messages
왘
Press button k or j.
The stored messages will now be displayed in the order in which they have
occurred. For malfunction and warning
messages, see “Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display”
(컄 page 347).
i After you have scrolled through all recorded
status messages, the first recorded message appears again.
Controls in detail
Control system
Should the vehicle’s system record any
conditions while driving, the number of
messages will reappear in the multifunction display
Settings menu
앫
when the SmartKey in the starter
switch is turned to position 0 or removed from the starter switch
앫
or
앫
앫
when you turn off the engine by pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button on the gear selector lever once and
open the driver’s door (this puts the
starter switch in position 0, same as
with the SmartKey removed from the
starter switch)
i The vehicle status message memory will be
cleared when you then turn the SmartKey in the
starter switch to position 1 or 2, or when you
press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once
or twice without depressing the brake pedal. You
will then only see high priority messages in the
multifunction display (컄 page 347).
Resetting all settings
In the Settings menu there are two functions:
The function Reset, with which you can
reset most settings to those set at the
factory.
A collection of submenus with which
you can make individual settings for
your vehicle.
You can reset the functions of most of the
submenus to the factory settings.
For safety, the Light circuit Headlamp
mode submenu in the Lighting menu can
be reset with the vehicle at standstill only.
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the Settings... menu appears in
the multifunction display.
The following settings and submenus are
available:
Function
Page
Resetting all settings
153
컄컄
Submenus in the Settings menu 154
Instrument cluster submenu
156
Time submenu
157
Lighting submenu
159
Vehicle submenu
162
Convenience submenu
162
153
Controls in detail
Control system
컄컄 왘
Press the reset button in the instrument cluster for approximately
3 seconds.
In the right multifunction display you
will see the request to press the reset
button again to confirm.
왘
Submenus in the Settings menu
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the Settings... menu appears in
the multifunction display.
왘
Press button j.
In the right multifunction display you
see the collection of submenus. There
are more submenus than can be simultaneously displayed.
Press the reset button again.
The functions of all the submenus will
reset to factory settings.
i The settings you have changed will not be reset unless you confirm the action by pressing the
reset button a second time.
왘
Press button ç.
The selection marker moves to the next
submenu.
왘
154
Scroll down with the ç button,
scroll up with the æ button.
왘
With the selection marker on the desired submenu, use the j button to
access the individual functions within
that submenu.
왘
Once within the submenu, use the
j button to move to the next function or the k button to move to the
previous function within that submenu.
왘
Use buttons æ or ç to change
the settings of the respective function.
Controls in detail
Control system
The table below shows what settings can
be changed within the various menus. Detailed instructions on making individual
settings can be found on the following pages.
Instrument cluster
(컄 page 156)
Time
(컄 page 157)
Lighting
(컄 page 159)
Vehicle
(컄 page 162)
Convenience
(컄 page 162)
Selecting standard
display
Synchronizing time with
head unit
Setting daytime running
lamp mode (USA only)
Setting automatic locking Activating
easy-entry/exit feature
Selecting speedometer
display mode
Setting the time (hours)
Setting locator lighting
Selecting language
Setting the time
(minutes)
Setting night security
illumination
Setting interior lighting
delayed switch-off
155
Controls in detail
Control system
Instrument cluster submenu
Selecting speedometer display mode
Selecting language
Access the Inst. cluster submenu via
the Settings menu. Use the Inst. cluster submenu to change the instrument
cluster display settings. The following
functions are available:
왘
Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Inst. cluster
submenu.
왘
Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Inst. cluster
submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the left
multifunction display:
Digital speedometer.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Text appears in the
multifunction display.
Function
Page
Selecting speedometer display
mode
156
Selecting language
156
Selecting standard display
157
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
156
Press æ or ç to set the speedometer units to Kilometers or Miles.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Controls in detail
Control system
왘
Press æ or ç to select the
language to be used for the
multifunction display messages.
Selecting standard display
Time submenu
왘
Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Inst. cluster
submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the left
multifunction display: Select display.
Access the Time submenu via the Settings
menu. Use the Time submenu to change
the time and date settings. The following
functions are available:
Available languages:
앫
German
앫
English
앫
French
앫
Italian
앫
Spanish
앫
Dutch
앫
Swedish
Synchronizing time with head unit
앫
Danish
왘
앫
Turkish
앫
Portuguese
Move the selection marker with the
æ or ç button to the Time
submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Time syncron. with
head unit appears in the multifunction
display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
Press æ or ç to select the desired setting.
The selected option appears in the left
multifunction display.
The option not selected will appear in
the right multifunction display when
scrolling through the standard display
(컄 page 145).
Function
Page
Synchronizing time with head
unit
157
Setting the time (hours)
158
Setting the time (minutes)
158
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
157
Controls in detail
Control system
왘
Press æ or ç enable or disable
this feature.
When you set this feature to On, the time
displayed in the multifunction display is
automatically synchronized with the time
of the COMAND system.
Setting the time (hour)
Setting the time (minutes)
This function is only available if the function Time syncron. with head unit
(컄 page 157) has been set to Off. The time
is then not set automatically by the
COMAND and must be set manually if required.
This function is only available if the function Time sync. with head unit
(컄 page 157) has been set to Off. The time
is then not set automatically by the
COMAND and must be set manually if required.
왘
Move the selection marker with the
æ or ç button to the Time
submenu.
왘
Move the selection marker with the
æ or ç button to the Time
submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Set time Hour
appears in the multifunction display.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Set time Minute(s)
appears in the multifunction display.
i For information on setting the time, refer to
the separate COMAND operating instructions.
The selection marker is on the hour
setting.
왘
158
Press button æ or ç to set the
hour.
The selection marker is on the minute
setting.
왘
Press button æ or ç to set the
minutes.
Controls in detail
Control system
Lighting submenu
Access the Lighting submenu via the
Settings menu. Use the Lighting submenu to change the lamp and lighting settings on your vehicle. The following
functions are available:
Function
Page
Setting daytime running lamp
mode (USA only)
159
Setting locator lighting
160
Setting night security illumination
160
Setting daytime running lamp mode
(USA only)
i This function is not available in countries
where the daytime running lamp mode is mandatory and therefore in a constant mode.
왘
왘
Setting interior lighting delayed 161
switch-off
Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Lighting submenu.
With daytime running lamp mode activated
and the exterior lamp switch at
position M or U the low beam headlamps are switched on when the engine is
running.
In low ambient light conditions the following lamps will switch on additionally:
앫
Parking lamps
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Light circuit
Headlamp mode appears in the multifunction display.
앫
Tail lamps
앫
License plate lamps
앫
Side marker lamps
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
i For safety reasons, resetting to factory settings (컄 page 153) while driving will not deactivate the daytime running lamp mode.
The following message appears in the multifunction display: Cannot be fully reset to
factory settings when driving.
왘
Press button æ or ç to select
manual operation (Manual) or daytime
running lamp mode (Constant).
159
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting locator lighting
왘
With the locator lighting feature activated
and the exterior lamp switch in position
U, the following lamps will switch on
during darkness when the vehicle is unlocked with the SmartKey:
Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Lighting submenu.
Setting night security illumination
(Exterior lamps delayed switch-off feature)
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Locator lighting
appears in the multifunction display.
Use this function to set whether you would
like the exterior lamps to remain on for 15
seconds during darkness after exiting the
vehicle and closing the doors.
앫
Parking lamps
앫
Tail lamps
앫
License plate lamps
앫
Front fog lamps
앫
Side marker lamps
The locator lighting switches off when the
driver’s door is opened.
If you do not open a door after unlocking
the vehicle with the SmartKey, the lamps
will switch off automatically after approximately 40 seconds.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
Press button æ or ç to switch
the locator lighting feature to On.
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to position U when exiting the vehicle.
The locator lighting feature is
activated.
160
With the delayed switch-off feature activated and the exterior lamp switch in position
U before the engine is turned off, the
following lamps will switch on when the engine is turned off:
앫
Parking lamps
앫
Tail lamps
앫
License plate lamps
앫
Side marker lamps
앫
Front fog lamps
Controls in detail
Control system
If after turning off the engine you do not
open a door or do not close an opened
door, the lamps will switch off automatically after 60 seconds.
왘
왘
왘
Press button æ or ç to switch
the delayed switch-off feature On or
Off.
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to position U before turning off the engine.
Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Lighting submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Headlamps delayed
switch-off appears in the multifunction display.
The delayed switch-off feature is activated.
You can temporarily deactivate the delayed switch-off feature:
왘
Before exiting the vehicle turn the
SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 0.
왘
Then turn it to position 2 and back
to 0.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
The delayed switch-off feature is deactivated. It will reactivate as soon as you
reinsert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
Setting interior lighting delayed
switch-off
Use this function to set whether you would
like the interior lighting to remain on for
10 seconds during darkness after you have
removed the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
왘
Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Lighting submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Int. lighting
delayed switch-off appears in the
multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
161
Controls in detail
Control system
왘
Press æ or ç to switch the interior lighting delayed switch-off feature
On or Off.
왘
Vehicle submenu
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Access the Vehicle submenu via the Settings menu. Use the Vehicle submenu to
make general vehicle settings. The following functions are available:
Function
Page
Setting automatic locking
162
Setting automatic locking
Use this function to activate or deactivate
the automatic central locking. With the
automatic central locking system
activated, the vehicle is centrally locked at
a vehicle speed of approximately
9 mph (15 km/h).
왘
Move the selection marker with the
æ or ç button to the Vehicle
submenu.
162
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the left
multifunction display:
Automatic door lock.
Convenience submenu
Access the Convenience submenu via the
Settings menu. Use the Convenience submenu to change the settings for a number
of convenience features. The following
functions are available:
Function
Page
Activating easy-entry/exit
feature
162
Activating easy-entry/exit feature
왘
Press æ or ç to switch
Automatic door lock On or Off.
Use this function to activate and deactivate the easy-entry/exit feature
(컄 page 46).
Controls in detail
Control system
Warning!
G
You must make sure no one can become
trapped or injured by the moving steering
wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is
activated.
왘
왘
Move the selection marker with the
æ or ç button to the Convenience submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see Activate Easy-entry
feature in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
To stop steering wheel adjustment, do one
of the following:
Trip computer menu
Use the trip computer menu to call up statistical data on your vehicle. The following
information is available:
Function
Page
Fuel consumption statistics after 164
start
앫
Move steering column stalk
(컄 page 45).
Fuel consumption statistics
since last reset
164
앫
Press the memory button (컄 page 126).
Distance to empty
165
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could open the driver’s door and
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
feature, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
i The last function called up will reappear the
왘
Press æ or ç to switch the
easy-entry/exit feature On or Off.
next time you enter the trip computer menu.
163
Controls in detail
Control system
Fuel consumption statistics after start
Fuel consumption since last reset
Resetting fuel consumption statistics
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
trip computer menu.
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
trip computer menu.
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
trip computer menu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the left
multifunction display: From start.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the left
multifunction display: From reset.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see the reading that you want
to reset in the left multifunction display.
왘
Press and hold the reset button in the
instrument cluster (컄 page 27) until
the value is reset to 0.
1 Distance driven since start
2 Average speed since start
3 Time elapsed since start
4 Average fuel consumption since start
i All statistics stored since the last engine
start will be reset approximately 4 hours after
the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to
position 0 or removed from the starter switch.
Resetting will not occur if you turn the SmartKey
back to position 1 or 2 within this time period.
164
1 Distance driven since last reset
2 Average speed since last reset
3 Time elapsed since last reset
4 Average fuel consumption since last reset
i The fuel consumption statistics reset automatically to 0 when either of the following values
is exceeded:
앫
distance covered:100000 miles
앫
time elapsed: 10000 hours
Controls in detail
Control system
Distance to empty
왘
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
trip computer menu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the left
multifunction display: Range.
In the right multifunction display you
will see the calculated range based on
the current fuel tank level.
i If only very little fuel is left in the tank, a vehicle at the fuel pump is shown instead of the
range.
TEL menu*
Warning!
G
A driver’s attention to the road must always
be his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location
and stop before placing or taking a telephone call. If you choose to use the telephone while driving, please use the
hands-free device and only use the telephone when weather, road, and traffic conditions permit.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury.
You can use the functions in the TEL menu
to operate your telephone, provided it is
connected to a hands-free system and
switched on.
왘
Switch on the telephone and COMAND.
왘
Press button ÿ or è on the
steering wheel repeatedly until you see
the TEL menu in the left multifunction
display.
165
Controls in detail
Control system
Which messages will appear in the right
multifunction display depends on whether
your telephone is switched on or off:
앫
If the telephone is off, the message in
the multifunction display is: TEL off.
앫
If the telephone is on:
Answering a call
Ending a call
When your telephone is ready to receive
calls, you can answer a call at any time. In
the right multifunction display you will then
see the message:
왘
If your telephone is ready to receive calls,
you may select and dial a number from the
phone book at any time.
왘
Press button s.
You have answered the call. In the right
multifunction display you see the duration of the call.
i If you do not wish to accept a call, press
button t.
앫
This standby message indicates that
your telephone is ready for use and you
can operate it using the control system.
166
You have ended the call. In the right
multifunction display you will again see
the standby message.
Dialing a number from the phone book
The telephone will then search for a
network. During this time the right multifunction display is empty.
As soon as the telephone has found a
network, READY is indicated in the right
multifunction display.
Press button t.
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the TEL menu in the left
multifunction display.
In the right multifunction display you
will see the standby message.
Controls in detail
Control system
왘
Press button j or k.
The control system reads the phone
book which is stored in the telephone.
This may take several minutes. In the
right multifunction display you will see
the message Please wait!.
왘
앫
When the message Please wait! disappears, the phone book has been
loaded.
왘
Press button s.
Redialing
The system dials the selected phone
number.
The control system stores the most recently dialed phone numbers. This eliminates
the need to search through your entire
phone book.
If the connection is successful and this
feature is supported by your network
provider, the name of the party you are
calling (if stored in your phone book)
and the duration of the call will appear
in the display.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the desired name appears in the
right multifunction display.
The stored names are displayed in
ascending or descending alphabetical
order.
i If you press and hold j or k for longer than one second, the system scrolls rapidly
through the list of names until you release the
button again.
Cancel the quick search mode by pressing t.
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the TEL menu in the left
multifunction display.
In the right multifunction display you
will see the standby message.
왘
Press button s.
In the right multifunction display you
see the first number in the redial memory.
앫
If no connection is made, the control
system stores the dialed number in the
redial memory.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the desired name appears in the
right multifunction display.
왘
Press button s.
The control system dials the selected
phone number.
167
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
For more information on driving with an
automatic transmission, see “Automatic
transmission” (컄 page 52).
Your vehicle’s transmission adapts its gear
shifting process to your individual driving
style by continually adjusting the shift
points up or down. These shift point adjustments are performed based on current
operating and driving conditions.
i During the brief warm-up, transmission upshifting is delayed. This allows the catalytic converter to heat up more quickly to operating
temperature.
앫
the gear selector lever
position D (컄 page 170) with
gear ranges (컄 page 172)
앫
the selected program mode:
(C/S) (컄 page 173)
or
If the operating conditions change, the
automatic transmission reacts by
adjusting its shift program.
(MANUAL/C/S) (SL 55 AMG and
SL 65 AMG only) (컄 page 177)
Gearshift pattern for automatic
transmission
168
The automatic transmission selects individual gears automatically, depending on:
앫
the position of the accelerator pedal
(컄 page 171)
앫
the vehicle speed
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Warning!
1 Current gear range/gear selector lever
position
2 Current program mode
The current gear range/gear selector lever
position and program mode (C/S) or
(M/C/S) appear in the right multifunction
display.
G
It is dangerous to shift the gear selector
lever out of P or N if the engine speed is
higher than idle speed. If your foot is not
firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
! Allow engine to warm up under low load use.
Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached.
Shift into reverse gear R or parking position P
only when the vehicle is stopped.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended
period when driving off on slippery road surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the
drivetrain which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
When the gear selector lever is in
position D, you can influence transmission
shifting by:
앫
limiting the gear range
앫
changing gears manually
169
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Gear selector lever position
Effect
ì Park position
Gear selector lever position
when the vehicle is parked. Place
gear selector lever in position P
only when vehicle is stopped.
The park position is not intended
to serve as a brake when the
vehicle is parked. Rather, the
driver should always set the
parking brake in addition to
placing the gear selector lever in
position P to secure the vehicle.
Effect
The SmartKey can only be
removed from the starter switch
with the gear selector lever in
position P. With the SmartKey
removed, the gear selector lever
is locked in position P.
í Reverse gear
Place gear selector lever in
position R only when vehicle is
stopped.
Effect
ë Neutral
No power is transmitted from the
engine to the drive axle. When
the brakes are released, the
vehicle can be moved freely
(pushed or towed).
To avoid damage to the transmission, never engage N while
driving.
If the ESP® is deactivated or
malfunctioning:
Move gear selector lever to N
only if the vehicle is in danger of
skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
ê Drive
The transmission shifts
automatically. All forward gears
are available.
! Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any other
reason with gear selector lever in N can result in
transmission damage that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
170
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Warning!
G
Getting out of your vehicle with the gear
selector lever not fully engaged in position P
is dangerous. Also, position P alone is not
intended to or capable of preventing your
vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people
or objects.
Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to position P (컄 page 61).
When parked on an incline, turn the front
wheels towards the road curb.
Do not park this vehicle in areas where
combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Children could move the
gear selector lever from position P, which
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
Driving tips
Accelerator position
Your driving style influences the
transmission’s shifting behavior:
Less throttle
Earlier upshifting
More throttle
Later upshifting
Kickdown
Use kickdown when you want maximum
acceleration.
왘
Press the accelerator past the point of
resistance.
The transmission shifts into the lowest
possible gear.
왘
Ease on the accelerator when you have
reached the desired speed.
The transmission shifts up again.
171
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Stopping
Maneuvering
When you stop briefly, e.g. at traffic lights:
When you maneuver in tight areas,
e.g. when pulling into a parking space:
왘
Leave the transmission in gear.
왘
Hold the vehicle with the brake.
When you stop longer with the engine
idling and/or on a hill:
왘
Set the parking brake.
왘
Move the gear selector lever to
position P.
Gear ranges
왘
Control the vehicle speed by gradually
releasing the brakes.
왘
Accelerate gently.
왘
Never abruptly step on the accelerator.
Working on the vehicle
Warning!
G
When working on the vehicle, set the
parking brake and move gear selector lever
to position P. Otherwise the vehicle could
roll away.
172
With the gear selector lever in position D
and driving in the automatic shift
program C or S (컄 page 173), you can
select a gear range for the automatic
transmission to operate within:
Gear selector lever (컄 page 174):
You can limit the gear range by pressing
the gear selector lever to the left (D-), and
reverse the gear range limit by pressing
the gear selector lever to the right (D+).
Steering wheel gearshift control*
(컄 page 175):
You can limit the gear range by pulling the
left gearshift paddle on the steering wheel
gearshift control, and reverse the gear
range limit by pulling the right gearshift
paddle on the steering wheel gearshift
control.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
The selected gear range appears in the
right multifunction display (컄 page 169). If
you press on the accelerator when the
engine has reached its rpm limit, the transmission will upshift beyond any gear range
limit selected.
Effect
ï The transmission shifts through
sixth gear only (applies to
vehicles with 7-speed automatic
transmission only).
î The transmission shifts through
fifth gear only (applies to
vehicles with 7-speed automatic
transmission only).
é The transmission shifts through
fourth gear only.
Effect
è The transmission shifts through
third gear only.
With this selection you can use
the braking effect of the engine.
Automatic shift program
The program mode selector switch is
located on the lower part of the center
console.
ç The transmission shifts through
second gear only.
Allows the use of engine’s
braking power when driving:
앫
on steep downgrades
앫
in mountainous regions
앫
under extreme operating
conditions
æ The transmission operates in
first gear only.
For maximum use of engine’s
braking effect on very steep or
lengthy downgrades.
1 Program mode selector switch
C Comfort
For comfort driving
S Sport
For standard driving
The current gear selector lever position
and the selected program mode (C/S) are
indicated in the right multifunction display
(컄 page 169).
173
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
! Never change the program mode when the
gear selector lever is out of position P. This could
result in a change of driving characteristics for
which you may not be prepared.
i The last selected program mode (C or S) is
switched on when the engine is restarted.
왘
Press program mode selector
switch 1 repeatedly until the letter of
the desired program mode appears in
the right multifunction display.
Select C for comfort driving:
앫
The vehicle starts out in second
gear (both forward and reverse) for
gentler starts. This does not apply if
full throttle is applied or gear
range 1 is selected.
앫
Traction and driving stability are
improved on icy roads.
앫
Upshifts occur earlier even when
you give more gas. The engine then
operates at lower rpms and the
wheels are less likely to spin.
174
Gear selector lever one-touch
gearshifting
Even with an automatic transmission, you
can change the gears manually and limit or
extend the gear range for automatic
shifting with the gear selector lever in
position D and driving in the automatic
program mode C or S.
! Allow engine to warm up under low load use.
Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached.
Shift into reverse gear R or parking position P
only when the vehicle is stopped.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended
period when driving off on slippery road
surfaces. This may cause serious damage to
the drivetrain which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Downshifting
Warning!
G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control.
왘
Briefly press the gear selector lever to
the left in the D- direction.
The transmission will shift from the current
gear to the next lower gear as permitted by
the shift program. This action simultaneously limits the gear range of the
transmission (컄 page 172).
i To avoid overrevving the engine when the
gear selector lever is moved to the D- direction,
the transmission will not shift to a lower gear if
the engine’s max. speed would be exceeded.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Upshifting
왘
Briefly press the gear selector lever to
the right in the D+ direction.
The transmission will shift from the current
gear to the next higher gear as permitted
by the shift program. This action simultaneously extends the gear range of the
transmission.
Canceling gear range limit
왘
Press and hold the gear selector lever
in the D+ direction until D reappears in
the right multifunction display.
The transmission will shift from the current
gear range directly to gear range D.
Steering wheel gearshift control
one-touch gearshifting*
! Allow engine to warm up under low load use.
Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached.
Steering wheel gearshift control is available on vehicles with Sport Package*, on
SL 55 AMG, and on SL 65 AMG only.
Shift into reverse gear R or parking position P
only when the vehicle is stopped.
The steering wheel gearshift control provides an alternative method for changing
the gears manually and limiting or extending the gear range for automatic shifting
with the gear selector lever in position D
and driving in the automatic program
mode C or S.
gearshift control in program mode MANUAL
(SL 55 AMG and SL 65 AMG only), see “Manual
shift program” (컄 page 177).
i To avoid overrevving the engine when down-
왘
shifting with the steering wheel gearshift paddle,
the transmission will not shift to a lower gear if
the engine’s max. speed would be exceeded.
The transmission will automatically select
the gear range suited for optimal
acceleration and deceleration. This may
involve shifting down one or more gears.
The gearshift paddles are located to the
left and right of the steering wheel.
i For information on using the steering wheel
Shifting into optimal gear range
Press and hold the gear selector lever
in the D- direction.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended
period when driving off on slippery road
surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the
drivetrain which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
1 Left shift paddle: downshift
2 Right shift paddle: upshift
175
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
i You cannot shift with the steering wheel
gearshift paddle when the gear selector lever is
in position P, N or R.
The last selected program mode (C or S) is
switched on when the engine is restarted.
The following instructions describe operation of the steering wheel gearshift control
when driving in the automatic program
mode C or S.
For instructions on operating the steering
wheel gearshift control and gear selector
lever in the program mode MANUAL, see
“Manual shift program
(SL 55 AMG and SL 65 AMG only)”
(컄 page 177).
Downshifting
Warning!
Upshifting
G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control.
왘
Briefly pull right shift paddle 2
(컄 page 175).
The transmission will shift to the next
higher gear as permitted by the shift
program. This action simultaneously
extends the gear range of the transmission
(컄 page 172).
Canceling gear range limit
왘
Briefly pull left shift paddle 1
(컄 page 175).
The transmission will shift to the next
lower gear as permitted by the shift
program. This action simultaneously limits
the gear range of the transmission
(컄 page 172).
왘
Pull and hold right shift paddle 2
(컄 page 175) until D reappears in the
right multifunction display.
The transmission will shift from the current
gear range directly to gear range D.
Shifting into optimal gear range
왘
Pull and hold left shift paddle 1
(컄 page 175).
The transmission will automatically select
the gear range suited for optimal
acceleration and deceleration. This will
involve shifting down one or more gears.
176
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Manual shift program
(SL 55 AMG and SL 65 AMG only)
The program mode selector switch is
located on the lower part of the center
console.
In addition to the automatic shift
program C or S, your vehicle is equipped
with the manual shift program MANUAL.
i For information on automatic program
modes C or S, see “Automatic shift program”
(컄 page 173), “Gear selector lever one-touch
gearshifting” (컄 page 174), and “Steering wheel
gearshift control one-touch gearshifting”
(컄 page 175).
In the MANUAL program mode,
system-controlled automatic gearshifting
is switched off and you need to change the
gears by manually upshifting or downshifting using the steering wheel gearshift paddles (컄 page 175) or the gear selector
lever.
! Allow engine to warm up under low load use.
Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached.
The current gear selector lever position
and the selected program mode (M/C/S)
are indicated in the right multifunction
display (컄 page 169).
Example illustration SL 65 AMG
1 Program mode selector switch
MANUAL
For manual gear shifting
Shift into reverse gear R or parking position P
only when the vehicle is stopped.
C Comfort
For comfort driving
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended
period when driving off on slippery road
surfaces. This may cause serious damage to
the drivetrain which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
S Sport
For standard driving
177
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Activating manual shift program
Upshifting
왘
! In the MANUAL program mode, the trans-
Press program mode selector
switch 1 repeatedly until the M for
MANUAL program mode appears in
the right multifunction display.
The transmission switches to the
MANUAL program mode. Automatic
shifting is switched off. The gear range
is not limited.
You can change the gears manually when
the gear selector lever is in position D. You
can upshift or downshift through the gears
in succession.
i The MANUAL program mode will not be
stored. When the engine is turned off with the
MANUAL program mode selected, the transmission will go to the automatic program mode
(C or S) when the engine is restarted.
178
mission will not upshift, even if the engine has
reached its overrevving range. Shift up to the
next gear before the engine has reached its overrevving range. Make absolutely certain that the
engine speed does not reach the red marking on
the tachometer (컄 page 26). Otherwise the engine could be damaged which is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
왘
Briefly press the gear selector lever to
the right in the D+ direction.
or
왘
Briefly pull right shift paddle 2
(컄 page 175).
The transmission shifts to the next
higher gear.
If, instead of the manual program mode
symbol M, the symbol p appears in the
right multifunction display (컄 page 169),
shift to the next higher gear. The fuel
supply will otherwise be interrupted to
prevent the engine from overrevving.
i If you have selected the AMG menu in the
control system and the engine reaches the overspeed range in the manual shift program, the color of the display will switch to red and UP
appears after the gear indicator, advising you to
upshift.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Kickdown
Downshifting
Warning!
G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control.
왘
Briefly press the gear selector lever to
the left in the D- direction.
or
왘
Briefly pull left shift paddle 1
(컄 page 175).
The transmission shifts to the next
lower gear.
i When you brake or stop, the transmission
shifts down to a gear from which you can easily
accelerate or take off.
Using the kickdown when driving in the
MANUAL program mode is not possible.
Deactivating manual shift program
왘
Press the program mode selector
switch (컄 page 177) repeatedly
until C or S appears in the right
multifunction display.
or
왘
Restart the engine.
Emergency operation
(Limp-Home Mode)
If vehicle acceleration becomes less responsive or sluggish or the transmission
no longer shifts, the transmission is most
likely operating in limp-home (emergency
operation) mode. In this mode only second
gear and reverse gear can be activated.
왘
Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
왘
Move gear selector lever to P.
왘
Turn off the engine.
The transmission will go to the
automatic program mode (C or S).
왘
Wait at least 10 seconds before
restarting.
The MANUAL program mode is not
stored.
왘
Restart the engine.
왘
Move gear selector lever to drive
position D (for second gear) or reverse
gear R.
왘
Have the transmission checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
179
Controls in detail
Good visibility
For information on windshield wiper operation, see “Windshield wipers” (컄 page 57).
왘
Press button 1.
The headlamps are cleaned with a
high-pressure water jet.
Headlamp cleaning system
Rear view mirrors
For information on setting the rear view
mirrors, see “Mirrors” (컄 page 47).
i The headlamps will automatically be
The button is located on the left side of the
dashboard.
cleaned when you have
Auto-dimming rear view mirrors
앫
The reflection brightness of the exterior
rear view mirror on the driver’s side and
the interior rear view mirror will respond
automatically to glare when
switched on the headlamps
and
앫
operated the windshield wipers with windshield washer fluid fifteen times
When you switch off the ignition, the counter resets.
For information on filling up the washer fluid reservoir, see “Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system”
(컄 page 282).
앫
the ignition is switched on
and
앫
incoming light from headlamps falls on
the sensor in the interior rear view mirror.
1 Headlamp washer button
The interior rear view mirror will not react if
왘
앫
reverse gear is engaged
앫
the interior lighting is switched on
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
180
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Warning!
G
Warning!
G
The auto-dimming function does not react if
incoming light is not aimed directly at sensors in the interior rear view mirror.
In case of an accident liquid electrolyte may
escape from the mirror housing if the mirror
glass breaks.
The interior rear view mirror and the exterior
rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not
react, for example, if the wind screen is installed.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.
Light hitting the mirror(s) at certain angles
(incident light) could blind you. As a result,
you may not be able to observe traffic conditions and could cause an accident.
Warning!
G
Exercise care when using the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your interior rear view mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.
! Electrolyte drops coming into contact with
the vehicle paint finish can be completely removed only while in the liquid state by applying
plenty of water.
181
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Glare through a door window
Sun visors
The sun visors protect you from sun glare
while driving.
Warning!
G
Swing respective sun visor down.
왘
Disengage the sun visor from
mounting 1.
i When the sun visor is disengaged from
mounting 1, vanity mirror lamp 3 switches
off.
Do not use the driver’s-side vanity mirror
while driving.
Keep the vanity mirrors in the sun visors
closed while vehicle is in motion. Reflected
glare can endanger you and others.
왘
왘
1 Mounting
2 Vanity mirror cover
3 Vanity mirror lamp
4 Holder for gas cards
Pivot the sun visor to the side.
! To avoid damage to vanity mirror cover 2,
make sure it is closed before pivoting the sun
visor to the side.
Vanity mirror
Glare through the windshield
182
왘
Make sure the sun visor is properly
engaged in mounting 1.
왘
Swing the respective sun visor down.
왘
When you do not experience glare anymore, swing the sun visor up.
왘
Swing respective sun visor down.
왘
Flip up vanity mirror cover 2 to access
the vanity mirror.
Vanity mirror lamp 3 comes on.
왘
After using the vanity mirror, flip down
vanity mirror cover 2.
왘
Swing the sun visor up.
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Deactivating
Rear window defroster
The rear window defroster uses a large
amount of power. To keep the battery
drain to a minimum, switch off the defroster as soon as the rear window is clear. The
defroster is automatically deactivated after approximately 6 to 17 minutes of operation depending on the outside
temperature.
Warning!
G
Any accumulation of snow and ice should be
removed from the rear window before driving. Visibility could otherwise be impaired,
endangering you and others.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
Activating
왘
Press button F on the automatic climate control panel (컄 page 185).
왘
Press button F (컄 page 185) once
more.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
! The rear window defroster cannot be
switched on when the retractable hardtop is
open. The indicator lamp will start flashing if the
hardtop is open.
앫
Close the retractable hardtop.
The rear window defroster can then be switched
on.
! If the rear window defroster switches off too
soon and the indicator lamp starts flashing, too
many electrical consumers are operating simultaneously and there is insufficient voltage in the
battery. The system responds automatically by
switching the rear window defroster off.
As soon as the battery has sufficient voltage, the
rear window defroster automatically switches
back on automatically.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
183
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
184
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Item
Item
1 Defroster air vents, fixed
1 Air distribution, left
2 Left center air vent, adjustable
2 Front defroster
3 Cockpit air vent, fixed
3 Air recirculation
4 Right center air vent, adjustable
4 Rear window defroster
5 Right side air vent, adjustable
5 Air distribution, right
6 Air volume control for right side air
vent
6 Temperature control, right
7 Air volume control for center air
vents
8 Air volume control for left side air
vent
9 Automatic climate control panel
a Left side air vent, adjustable
Automatic climate control panel
7 Automatic climate control on/off
(entire system)
8 Residual heat/ventilation
9 Air volume control
a AC cooling on/off
b Temperature control, left
i For draft-free ventilation, move the sliders
for center air vent and side air vents to the middle position.
185
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
The automatic climate control is operational whenever the engine is running. You can
operate the automatic climate control system in either the automatic or manual
mode. The system cools or heats the interior depending on the selected interior
temperature and the current outside temperature.
Warning!
G
When operating the automatic climate control, the air that enters the passenger compartment through the air vents can be very
hot or very cold (depending on the set temperature). This may cause burns or frostbite
on unprotected skin in the immediate area
of the air vents. Always keep sufficient distance between unprotected parts of the
body and the air vents. If necessary, use the
air distribution control (컄 page 185) to direct the air to air vents in the vehicle interior
that are not in the immediate area of unprotected skin.
186
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and
odors are filtered out before outside air enters the passenger compartment through
the air distribution system.
i Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution)
may require replacement of the filter before its
scheduled interval. A clogged filter will reduce
the air volume to the interior.
The air conditioning will not engage (no
cooling) if the A/C mode is deactivated
(컄 page 193).
If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the interior
before driving off. The automatic climate control
will then adjust the interior temperature to the
set value much faster.
Warning!
G
Follow the recommended settings for heating and cooling given on the following pages. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
impairing visibility and endangering you and
others.
Keep the air intake grille in front of the windshield free of snow and debris.
When the retractable hardtop is closed, do not
obstruct air flow by placing objects on the air
flow-through exhaust slots below the rear window.
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Deactivating the automatic climate
control system
Reactivating
왘
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
Deactivating
왘
Press button ´ (컄 page 185).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
Warning!
Press button ´ (컄 page 185).
G
When the automatic climate control system
is switched off, the outside air supply and
circulation are also switched off. Only
choose this setting for a short time when the
retractable hardtop is closed. Otherwise the
windows could fog up, impairing visibility
and endangering you and others.
The previous settings are in effect
again.
or
왘
Turn one of the temperature controls
on the automatic climate control panel
(컄 page 185).
The indicator lamp on button ´
goes out.
Operating the automatic climate
control system in automatic mode
Air distribution and air volume can be
adjusted automatically by the automatic
climate control system. You can also adjust the settings for air distribution and air
volume manually.
i When operating the automatic climate
control system in automatic mode, you will only
rarely need to adjust the temperature, air volume
and air distribution.
In automatic mode, cooling with dehumidify is
switched on. This function can be switched off if
necessary (컄 page 185).
187
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Air distribution in automatic mode
Air volume in automatic mode
Setting the temperature
You can separately adjust the air distribution for each side of the passenger compartment.
The air volume settings are the same for
the entire passenger compartment.
Use temperature controls 6 and b
(컄 page 185) to separately adjust the air
temperature on each side of the passenger
compartment. You should raise or lower
the temperature setting in small increments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C).
The automatic climate control will adjust
to the set temperature as fast as possible.
Activating
Activating
왘
The control button is engaged.
The U symbol on the control button
comes on. Air distribution for the respective side of the passenger compartment is adjusted automatically.
Deactivating
왘
왘
Press control button 1 or 5
(컄 page 185).
Press control button 1 or 5
(컄 page 185) once more.
The control button sticks up slightly.
The U symbol on the control button
goes out. Automatic air distribution for
the respective side of the passenger
compartment is switched off. Adjust
the air distribution manually
(컄 page 189).
188
Press control button 9 (컄 page 185).
The control button is engaged.
The U symbol on the control button
comes on.
Deactivating
왘
Press control button 9 (컄 page 185)
once more.
Increasing
왘
The control button sticks up slightly.
The U symbol on the control button
goes out. Adjust the air volume manually (컄 page 190).
Turn temperature control 6
and/or b (컄 page 185) slightly
clockwise.
The automatic climate control system
will correspondingly adjust the interior
air temperature.
Decreasing
왘
Turn temperature control 6
and/or b (컄 page 185) slightly
counterclockwise.
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Automatic air distribution for the respective side of the passenger compartment is switched off.
The automatic climate control system
will correspondingly adjust the interior
air temperature.
Adjusting air distribution
Use air distribution controls 1 and 5
(컄 page 185) to separately adjust the air
distribution on each side of the passenger
compartment. The following symbols are
found on the controls:
Symbol
Function
h
Directs air through the center and side air vents
j
V
Directs air to the windows
k
왘
Directs air into the entire
vehicle interior
Directs air to the footwells
Press control button 1 or 5
(컄 page 185) until the control button
sticks up slightly and the U symbol
on the control button is out.
왘
Closing the cockpit air vent and center
air vents
왘
Turn control button to the desired symbol.
Cockpit air vent 3 and center air vents
2 and 4 (컄 page 184) are closed.
The air distribution is adjusted according to the chosen setting.
i You can also turn the air distribution control
to a position between two symbols.
Opening the side air vents
왘
Opening the center air vents
왘
Opening the cockpit air vent and center
air vents
왘
Turn thumbwheel 7 (컄 page 184) upward all the way.
Turn thumbwheel 6 and 8
(컄 page 184) upward.
The corresponding side air vent is
open.
Turn thumbwheel 7 (컄 page 184) upward to the first stop.
Center air vents 2 and 4
(컄 page 184) are open.
Turn thumbwheel 7 (컄 page 184)
downward.
Closing the side air vents
왘
Turn thumbwheel 6 and 8
(컄 page 184) upward.
The corresponding side air vent is
closed.
i The air vents are continuously variable.
Cockpit air vent 3 and center air vents
2 and 4 (컄 page 184) are open.
189
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Adjusting air volume
Maximum cooling MAXCOOL
Front defroster
Use air volume control 9 (컄 page 185) for
both automatic (컄 page 187) and manual
air volume adjustment. Nine blower
speeds are available.
If the left and right air distribution controls
as well as the airflow volume control are
set to U and there is a high need for
cooling, MAXCOOL is activated.
“MAX COOL” appears on the temperature
controls 6 and b (컄 page 185).
You can use this setting to defrost the
windshield, for example if it is iced up.
You can also defog the windshield and the
side windows.
왘
Press control button 9 (컄 page 185).
The control button sticks up slightly.
The U symbol on the control button
goes out. Automatic air volume control
is switched off. The air volume is adjusted corresponding to the set blower
speed.
This provides the fastest possible cooling
of the vehicle interior (when retractable
hardtop is closed).
Automatic climate control panel with
MAXCOOL activated
190
i Keep this setting selected only until the
windshield or the side windows are clear again.
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Activating
Windshield fogged on the outside
왘
Press button P (컄 page 185).
i Keep this setting selected only until the
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
windshield is clear again.
The air conditioning switches to the following functions automatically:
앫
cooling on to dehumidify
앫
maximum blower speed and
heating power
앫
앫
air flows onto the windshield
and the front side windows
the air recirculation mode is
switched off
Deactivating
왘
Press button P (컄 page 185).
왘
Switch the windshield wipers on
(컄 page 57).
If the automatic air distribution and air volume are switched off:
왘
Turn air distribution controls 1 and 5
(컄 page 185) to position h or k.
or
왘
Press control buttons 1, 5 and 9
(컄 page 185).
The control buttons are engaged. The
U symbol on the control buttons
come on. Air distribution and air volume are adjusted automatically.
Air recirculation mode
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
from the outside. This setting cuts off the
intake of outside air and recirculates the
air in the passenger compartment.
Warning!
G
Fogged windows impair visibility, endangering you and others. If the windows begin to
fog on the inside, switching off the air
recirculation mode immediately should clear
interior window fogging. If interior window
fogging persists, make sure the air
conditioning (컄 page 193) is activated, or
press button P.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. Defrosting is turned off.
The previous settings are in effect
again.
i The cooling remains switched on.
191
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Activating
Deactivating
왘
왘
Briefly press button ,
(컄 page 185).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
Briefly press button ,
(컄 page 185).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
i The air recirculation mode is activated auto- i The manually selected air recirculation
matically
mode is deactivated automatically
앫
at high outside temperatures
앫
앫
if the concentration of carbon monoxide
(CO) and/or nitrogen oxide (NOx) in the outside air increases, for example in a tunnel
after 5 minutes if the outside temperature is
below approximately 41°F (5°C)
앫
after 5 minutes if the air conditioning is
turned off
앫
after 30 minutes if the outside temperature
is above approximately 41°F (5°C)
The indicator lamp on button , is not lit when
the air recirculation mode is automatically
switched on.
A quantity of outside air is added after approximately 30 minutes.
At outside temperatures above 79°F
(26°C) the system will not automatically
switch back to outside air.
Air recirculation mode with convenience closing or opening feature
Warning!
G
Never operate the windows if there is the
possibility of anyone being harmed by the
closing procedure.
In the event that the procedure causes potential danger, the closing of the windows
can be immediately halted by releasing
the , button or by pressing and pulling
the respective window switch.
Activating
왘
Press and hold button ,.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. The air recirculation mode is
activated. The windows will close.
192
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Deactivating
왘
Press and hold button ,.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. The air recirculation mode is deactivated. The windows will return to their
previous position.
i A window will only return to its previous position if it has not moved to another position using the respective window switch after it was
closed with button ,.
Deactivating
Air conditioning
The air conditioning (cooling) function is
operational when the engine is running and
cools the vehicle interior down to the selected temperature. In addition, the cooling function dehumidifies the air in the
vehicle interior, thus preventing the windows from fogging up.
i Condensation may drip out from underneath
It is possible to deactivate the cooling
function of the automatic climate control
system. The air in the vehicle will then no
longer be cooled or dehumidified.
왘
Press button 2 (컄 page 185).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. The cooling function switches off
after a short delay.
the vehicle. This is normal and not an indication
of a malfunction.
Warning!
G
If you turn off the cooling function, the
vehicle will not be cooled when weather
conditions are warm. The windows can fog
up more quickly. Window fogging may
impair visibility and endanger you and
others.
193
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Activating
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
dehumidify the air with the air conditioning.
왘
Press button 2 once more
(컄 page 185).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
The air conditioning uses the refrigerant
R134A. This refrigerant is free of CFCs
which are harmful to the ozone layer.
Residual heat and ventilation
With the engine switched off, it is possible
to continue to heat or ventilate the interior
for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes
use of the residual heat produced by the
engine.
i How long the system will provide heating depends on the coolant temperature and the selected temperature. The blower will run at low
speed regardless of the air distribution control
setting.
Activating
With the SmartKey:
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 1 or 0, or remove it from
the starter switch.
왘
Press button T (컄 page 185).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
With KEYLESS-GO*:
왘
Turn off the engine by pressing the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button and
open the driver’s door (with the driver’s
door open, the starter switch is in position 0, same as with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch)
왘
Press button T (컄 page 185).
! If the 2 button on the automatic climate
control panel starts to flash, this indicates that
the air conditioning is losing refrigerant. The
compressor has turned off. The air conditioning
cannot be turned on again.
앫
Have the air conditioning checked at the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
194
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Deactivating
왘
Press button T (컄 page 185).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
Ventilated glove box
The glove box has its own air vents that allow for cooling ventilation when the automatic climate control system is activated.
The residual heat is automatically turned
off:
앫
when the ignition is switched on
앫
after about 30 minutes
앫
if the battery voltage drops
Opening the air vent
왘
Make sure the air vent in the glove box
is unobstructed.
왘
Turn thumbwheel 1 upwards.
Closing the air vent
왘
Turn thumbwheel 1 downwards.
Glove box
1 Thumbwheel
2 Air vent
i You should keep air vent 2 closed when
outside temperatures are low.
195
Controls in detail
Power windows
Opening and closing the windows
The windows are opened and closed electrically. The switches for all the windows
are on the driver’s door. The switch for the
passenger side windows is on the passenger door.
holding button , on the climate control
panel, the automatic reversal function will
not operate.
The closing of the door windows can be immediately halted by releasing the switch or,
if the switch was pulled past the resistance
point and released, by either pressing or
pulling the respective switch.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take
it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
The closing of the rear side windows can be
immediately halted by releasing the switch.
If a door window encounters an obstruction
that blocks its path in a circumstance where
you pulled the switch past the resistance
point and released it to close the door window, the automatic reversal function will
stop the door window and open it slightly.
1 Left door and rear side windows
2 Right door and rear side windows
Warning!
G
When closing the windows, make sure that
there is no danger of anyone being injured
by the closing procedure.
196
If the door window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance
where you are closing the door window by
pulling and holding the switch, by pressing
and holding button ‹ on the SmartKey,
by pressing and holding the lock button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*) on an outside
door handle, by pressing and holding the retractable hardtop switch, or by pressing and
i Depending on the current position, the windows may also open or close when the air recirculation button , on the control panel of the
automatic climate control (컄 page 191) is
pressed and held.
i After switching off the ignition (컄 page 39)
or removing the SmartKey from the starter
switch, the windows can be operated
앫
until you open a door
앫
for at least 5 minutes if no door was opened
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
Controls in detail
Power windows
Opening the door windows
Closing the door windows
왘
왘
Press switch 1 or 2 to the resistance
point.
The corresponding door window will
move downwards until you release the
switch.
i If the hardtop is open, the respective rear
side window will also open automatically.
Opening the rear side windows when
the hardtop is closed:
왘
Open the door window.
왘
Press switch 1 or 2 to the resistance
point again.
The corresponding rear side window
will open completely.
Pull switch 1 or 2 to the resistance
point.
The corresponding door window will
move upwards until you release the
switch.
Warning!
G
Fully opening the door windows
(Express-open)
왘
Press switch 1 or 2 past the resistance point and release.
The corresponding door window opens
completely.
i If the hardtop is open, the respective rear
side window will also open automatically.
If you pull and hold the switch up when closing the door window, and upward movement
of the door window is blocked by some obstruction including but not limited to arms,
hands, fingers, etc., the automatic reversal
will not operate.
Closing the rear side windows if the
hardtop is closed:
왘
Close the door window.
왘
Pull and hold switch 1 or 2.
The corresponding rear side window
will move upwards until you release the
switch.
197
Controls in detail
Power windows
Fully closing the door windows
(Express-close)
Closing the windows with
KEYLESS-GO*
왘
왘
Pull switch 1 or 2 past the resistance point and release.
The corresponding door window closes
completely.
If the upward movement of the door window is blocked during the closing procedure, the door window will stop and open
slightly.
Warning!
G
Driver’s door only:
If within 5 seconds the switch is again
pulled past the resistance point and released, the automatic reversal will not
operate.
Stopping windows
왘
Press or pull the respective switch
again.
198
Synchronizing power windows
Press and hold lock button on an outside door handle (컄 page 64) until the
windows are closed.
Warning!
G
When closing the windows make sure that
there is no danger of anyone being harmed
by the closing procedure.
The windows will not automatically re-open
if blocked during convenience closing.
If potential danger exists, proceed as follows:
앫
Release the lock button.
앫
Pull on the door handle and hold firmly.
The side windows open for as long as
the door handle is held but the door not
opened.
The power window must be synchronized
each time
앫
after the battery has been disconnected
앫
if the power windows cannot be fully
opened (Express-open) or closed
(Express-close)
Synchronizing the power windows
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
왘
Pull the power window switches until
the side windows are closed.
Hold the switches for approximately
1 second.
The power windows are synchronized.
Controls in detail
Retractable hardtop
왔 Retractable hardtop
Opening and closing the retractable
hardtop
For safety reasons, the retractable hardtop
can only be opened and closed when the
vehicle is standing still.
Warning!
G
To prevent possible accidents, only drive the
vehicle with the retractable hardtop either
completely closed and locked, or fully lowered into its storage compartment.
If the retractable hardtop does not completely open or close, the roof hydraulics will
lose pressure and the retractable hardtop is
lowered
앫
after approximately 7 minutes when the
ignition is switched on
앫
after approximately 15 seconds when
the ignition is switched off
Shortly before the retractable hardtop is
lowered, a warning will sound and in the left
multifunction display you will see K, in
the right multifunction display you will see
the message being lowered.
Lock the retractable hardtop again before
driving any further (컄 page 202). Otherwise,
the unlocked hardtop could open while the
vehicle is in motion and cause you to lose
control of the vehicle. You or others could
be injured as a result.
Warning!
G
Before operating the retractable hardtop
switch, make sure there is no danger of anyone being injured by the moving parts (retractable roof, roof frame, and trunk lid) due
to inattention.
Hands must never be placed near the roof
frame, upper windshield area, hardtop, shelf
behind roll bars, or trunk lid while the retractable hardtop is being raised or lowered.
Serious personal injury may occur.
If potential danger exists, release the retractable hardtop switch. This immediately
interrupts the raising or lowering procedure.
You then can operate the retractable hardtop switch to raise or lower the retractable
hardtop away from the danger zone.
199
Controls in detail
Retractable hardtop
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take
it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
! Never sit or place heavy objects on the rear
shelf. Doing so could cause damage to the retractable hardtop and the rear shelf.
! When opening and closing the retractable
roof, make sure
앫
there is sufficient clearance for the retractable hardtop to move up and for the trunk lid
to move back
앫
the luggage cover is installed, extended and
closed
앫
the trunk is loaded only to the height of the
luggage cover
앫
luggage/cargo does not push up the closed
luggage cover
앫
the trunk lid is closed
앫
the outside temperature is above +5°F
(–15°C)
앫
the roof is dry and clean when opening
Otherwise the retractable hardtop and trunk as
well as other parts of the vehicle could be damaged.
Opening/closing with retractable
hardtop switch
Warning!
G
Before operating the retractable hardtop,
make sure there is no danger of anyone
being injured by the moving parts (retractable roof, roof frame, and trunk lid) due to inattention.
Hands must never be placed near the roof
frame, upper windshield area, hardtop, shelf
behind roll bars, or trunk lid while the retractable hardtop is being raised or lowered.
Serious personal injury may occur.
If potential danger exists, release retractable hardtop switch immediately. This immediately interrupts the raising or lowering
procedure.
The retractable hardtop switch is located
on the lower part of the center console.
200
Controls in detail
Retractable hardtop
Opening
Opening/closing with the SmartKey
i Make sure the retractable hardtop is dry beWarning!
왘
Before operating the retractable hardtop,
make sure there is no danger of anyone
being injured by the moving parts (retractable roof, roof frame, and trunk lid) due to inattention.
Retractable hardtop switch
Engage the parking brake (컄 page 54).
왘
Close the luggage cover, see “Luggage
cover” (컄 page 205).
왘
Close the trunk lid.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
Pull up on the retractable hardtop
switch as indicated by arrow 1 until
the retractable hardtop is completely
lowered into its trunk storage compartment.
The multifunction display will briefly
show the message K in operation.
1 Opening
2 Closing
왘
G
fore you open it. Otherwise water may enter the
trunk interior.
Closing
왘
Press down on the retractable hardtop
switch as indicated by arrow 2 until
the retractable hardtop is completely
closed and locked.
The multifunction display will briefly
show the message K in operation.
Hands must never be placed near the roof
frame, upper windshield area, hardtop, shelf
behind roll bars, or trunk lid while the retractable hardtop is being raised or lowered.
Serious personal injury may occur.
If potential danger exists, release the respective button on the SmartKey. This immediately interrupts the raising or lowering
procedure. You then can press button Œ
or ‹ to raise or lower the hardtop away
from the danger zone.
201
Controls in detail
Retractable hardtop
왘
Press and hold button Πuntil the
retractable hardtop is completely
open.
The seat ventilation* for the driver’s
seat switches on. The rear side windows open.
왘
Release button Πto interrupt procedure.
왘
Engage the parking brake (컄 page 54).
Closing (Convenience feature)
왘
Close the luggage cover, see “Luggage
cover” (컄 page 205).
왘
왘
Close the trunk lid.
Opening (Summer opening feature)
i Make sure the retractable hardtop is dry before you open it. Otherwise water may enter the
trunk interior.
왘
Aim the transmitter eye at an outside
door handle.
The SmartKey must be in close proximity to the outside door handle.
202
Aim the transmitter eye at the outside
door handle.
The SmartKey must be in close proximity to the outside door handle.
왘
Press and hold button ‹ until the
retractable hardtop is completely
closed.
The retractable hardtop and the rear
side windows close.
Locking the retractable hardtop after
raising/lowering
Warning!
G
The hardtop is not fully closed and locked or
not fully opened and locked if:
앫
the message K in operation
appears in the multifunction display
앫
a warning sounds for 10 seconds and
the message K Lock
retractable roof appears in the multifunction display when starting to drive
If the retractable hardtop is not properly
locked, lock it as follows.
Controls in detail
Retractable hardtop
Unlocked status noticed when stopped
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
왘
To lock the retractable hardtop in its
fully closed position, press retractable
hardtop switch forward (컄 page 200).
or:
왘
To lock the retractable hardtop in its
fully opened position, pull up on the retractable hardtop switch (컄 page 200).
Unlocked status noticed while driving
Warning!
G
Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon
as it is safe to do so and lock the hardtop before continuing to drive. You could otherwise endanger yourself and others.
Problems when operating the
retractable hardtop
Several conditions may cause the retractable hardtop to not open, close, or lock
properly:
앫
The luggage cover in the trunk is not
closed.
왘
왘
Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as
soon as it is safe to do so.
왘
Leave the ignition switched on.
왘
To lock the retractable hardtop in its
fully closed position, press retractable
hardtop switch forward (컄 page 200).
or:
왘
앫
The trunk lid is open.
왘
앫
Close the luggage cover in the
trunk.
Close the trunk lid.
The battery voltage is too low.
왘
Start engine and let run while opening/closing the retractable hardtop.
To lock the retractable hardtop in its
fully opened position, pull up on the retractable hardtop switch (컄 page 200).
203
Controls in detail
Retractable hardtop
앫
앫
The hardtop drive system has shut itself down. For safety reasons, no more
than five consecutive attempts may be
made to raise or lower the hardtop.
왘
After about 10 minutes you may
again attempt to open or close the
retractable hardtop.
왘
If the retractable hardtop still does
open, close, or lock properly, have
the retractable hardtop system
checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
There is a malfunction in the retractable hardtop system.
왘
204
Notify an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Wind screen
Warning!
G
The wind screen can restrict the driver’s vision to the rear of the vehicle. To prevent a
possible accident when visibility is limited
(e.g. in darkness), the upper part of the wind
screen should be folded back.
The wind screen deflects drafts away from
the driver and passenger when the retractable hardtop is lowered. It is stored in the
trunk.
1 Guide tabs
왘
Make sure the fastening straps do not
get caught.
Installing
왘
Leave the wind screen folded and place
it on the roll bar.
Slide the wind screen into the roll bar
until guide taps 1 on each side latch
underneath the roll bar.
왘
Adjust the roll bar to a height
(컄 page 81) that allows you to reach
easily underneath it.
Controls in detail
Retractable hardtop
Removing
왘
Fold the upper section of the wind
screen back.
왘
Adjust the roll bar to a height
(컄 page 81) that allows you to reach
easily underneath it.
왘
Make sure the fastening straps do not
get caught.
왘
왘
Guide the fastening straps around the
top of the roll bar and close buckles 2.
왘
Tighten the fastening straps if necessary.
왘
Lower the roll bar (컄 page 81).
왘
Fold the upper section of the wind
screen up towards the head restraints
until it stops.
Pull the wind screen out towards the
front of the vehicle.
Be careful not to damage interior trim
with the guide tabs.
왘
2 Buckle
Lower the roll bar (컄 page 81).
Store the wind screen in a safe place.
Luggage cover
The luggage cover covers luggage/cargo
in the trunk.
! To prevent damage to the retractable hardtop or luggage/cargo when lowering:
1 Release button
왘
Undo the buckles on the upper section
of the roll bar by pressing release
button 1.
앫
Load trunk only to the height of the luggage
cover.
앫
Do not permit luggage/cargo to push up the
closed luggage cover.
앫
Do not load anything on top of or in front of
the luggage cover.
앫
Do not place anything on the shelf behind
the roll bar.
205
Controls in detail
Retractable hardtop
Closing luggage cover
왘
Unhook luggage cover 1 from side
holders 3.
Completely open zipper 2 while the
luggage cover is closed.
왘
While holding on to handle 4, guide
luggage cover 1 in the opposite
direction of arrow.
Open luggage cover 1 see “Opening
luggage cover” (컄 page 206).
The tensioning clasps are on the left and
right sides of the trunk.
Opening luggage cover
왘
왘
Removing luggage cover
Closed luggage cover
1 Luggage cover
2 Zipper
3 Side holder
4 Handle
왘
Pull out luggage cover 1 in direction of
arrow using handle 4.
왘
Hook luggage cover 1 into left and
right side holders 3.
Opened luggage cover
Closed luggage cover
1 Luggage cover
2 Zipper
3 Side holder
4 Handle
왘
206
Fold back the entire length of the zipper’s cloth cover.
5 Tensioning clasp
6 Retainer spring
Controls in detail
Retractable hardtop
Warning!
Installing luggage cover
G
! Before installing the luggage cover, make
sure that the cloth end is in front of the cloth
holder. Otherwise, it could be damaged.
Only open the tensioning clasps when the
luggage cover opened, see “Opening luggage cover” (컄 page 206).
왘
Carefully place luggage cover in trunk.
You could otherwise be injured.
왘
Open tensioning clasps 5 by pulling
them downward.
왘
Unhook retainer springs 6 from holders and flip retainer springs all the way
up.
7 Luggage cover
8 Cloth end
9 Cloth holder
왘
Carefully tilt luggage cover 7 in direction of arrow towards rear of trunk.
왘
Roll up front end of cloth 8 in the
trunk towards the front and fasten it in
place in front of cloth holder 9.
1 Luggage cover
2 Hook
3 Guide rail
왘
Completely remove luggage cover 7
from the trunk.
왘
Insert luggage cover 1 into guide
rails 3 on both sides using hooks 2.
왘
Tilt luggage cover forward in direction
of arrow.
컄컄
207
Controls in detail
Retractable hardtop
컄컄 왘
왘
Fold retainer springs of tensioning
clasps downward and clip them into
holders on both sides (컄 page 206).
Close tensioning clasps on both sides
by pressing them upward.
왘
Pull handle of luggage cover towards
the rear.
왘
Clip eyelets onto side trim panels.
왘
Close the zipper completely
(컄 page 206).
왘
Fold back the zipper’s cloth cover
across the entire length of the luggage
cover.
Sunshade for panorama roof*
Opening
The sunshade protects you from excessive
sunlight coming in through the panorama
roof.
왘
Closing
Warning!
G
Do not operate the sunshade while driving.
Adjusting the sunshade while driving could
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
1 Stop buttons
2 Handle
208
Squeeze stop buttons 1 and guide the
sunshade towards the rear.
왘
Using handle 2, slide the sunshade
towards the front of the vehicle.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
왔 Driving systems
The driving systems of your vehicle are described on the following pages:
앫
앫
앫
앫
Cruise control and Distronic*, with
which the vehicle can maintain a preset
speed
Distance warning function* (only available with Distronic*), which warns of
stationary objects or slower moving vehicles that you are closing in on too
quickly
ABC with vehicle level control systems,
with which you can change vehicle suspension characteristics
Parktronic*, which assists the driver
during parking maneuvers
For information on the BAS, ABS, ESP®,
and the electro-hydraulic brake system,
see “Driving safety systems” (컄 page 87).
Cruise control
Warning!
The cruise control automatically maintains
the speed you set for your vehicle.
The use of the cruise control is recommended for driving at a constant speed for
extended periods of time.
You can set or resume the cruise control at
any speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).
The cruise control function is operated by
means of the cruise control lever.
G
The cruise control is a convenience system
designed to assist the driver during vehicle
operation. The driver is and must always
remain responsible for the vehicle’s speed
and for safe brake operation.
Only use the cruise control if the road,
traffic, and weather conditions make it advisable to travel at a constant speed.
앫
The use of the cruise control can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic because conditions do not allow safe
driving at a constant speed.
앫
The use of the cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes
in tire traction can result in wheel spin
and loss of control.
앫
Deactivate the cruise control when driving in fog.
The cruise control lever is the uppermost
lever on the left-hand side of the steering
column (컄 page 24).
The “Resume” function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this
particular preset speed.
209
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning!
G
The cruise control brakes automatically so
that the set speed is not exceeded.
Keep in mind that the cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation. The driver is and
must always remain responsible for the vehicle’s speed and for safe brake operation.
Activating cruise control
Setting current speed
You can activate the cruise control when
the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (30 km/h).
왘
Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
speed.
왘
In the following cases you cannot activate
the cruise control:
Briefly lift the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 1 or depress in
direction of arrow 2.
앫
when you brake
The current speed is set.
앫
when you have set the parking brake
앫
when the gear selector lever is set to
position P, R, or N
앫
when the ESP® is switched off
i The vehicle speed displayed in the speedometer can briefly vary from the speed setting for
the cruise control system.
1 Setting current or higher speed
2 Setting current or lower speed
3 Canceling the cruise control
4 Activating the cruise control or resuming to last set speed
210
왘
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
The cruise control is activated.
The currently set speed appears in the multifunction display.
i On uphill grades, the cruise control may not
be able to maintain the set speed. Once the
grade eases, the set speed will be resumed.
On downhill grades, the cruise control maintains
the set speed by braking with the vehicle’s brake
system. In addition, on longer downhill grades
the automatic transmission will downshift automatically.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Canceling the cruise control
i The cruise control switches off automatical- ! Moving the gear selector lever to position N
There are several ways to cancel the cruise
control:
ly when
왘
Step on the brake pedal.
The cruise control is canceled. The last
set speed is stored for later use.
앫
you step on the brake pedal
앫
you depress the parking brake pedal
The cruise control also switches off automatically when
앫
the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (30 km/h) (컄 page 209)
앫
the ESP® is in operation or switched off with
the ESP® switch (컄 page 91)
앫
you move the gear selector lever to
position N while driving
or
왘
Briefly push the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 3.
The cruise control is canceled. The last
set speed is stored for later use.
i The last stored speed is canceled when you
turn off the engine.
while driving cancels the cruise control. However, the gear selector lever should not be moved
to position N while driving except to coast when
the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on icy
roads).
i Depressing the accelerator pedal does not
deactivate the cruise control. After brief acceleration (e.g. for passing), the cruise control will resume the last speed set.
An acoustic warning sounds and the message
CC Off appears in the multifunction display for
approximately 5 seconds.
211
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting a higher speed
왘
왘
Lift the cruise control in direction of
arrow 1 (컄 page 210) and hold it
there until the desired speed is
reached.
Setting a lower speed
왘
Faster
왘
Release the cruise control lever.
The new speed is set.
왘
Fine adjustment in 1 mph
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments
Depress the cruise control in direction
of arrow 2 (컄 page 210) and hold it
there until the desired speed is
reached.
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 1 (컄 page 210).
Slower
왘
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 2 (컄 page 210).
Setting to last stored speed
(“Resume” function)
Warning!
The set speed stored in memory should only
be set again if prevailing road conditions
permit. Possible acceleration or deceleration differences arising from returning to the
preset speed could cause an accident
and/or serious injury to you and others.
왘
The new speed is set.
celerate, the brake system will automatically
brake the vehicle if the engine’s braking power
does not brake the vehicle sufficiently.
212
Briefly pull the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 4 (컄 page 210).
The cruise control resumes to the last
set speed or, if no speed is stored, it
will set and store the current speed.
Release the cruise control lever.
i When you use the cruise control lever to de-
G
왘
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
The selected speed appears in the multifunction display.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Distronic*
When activated, the Distronic adaptive
cruise control system increases the driving
convenience afforded by the cruise control
while traveling on expressways and other
major roadways.
앫
앫
If the Distronic distance sensor detects
a slower moving vehicle directly ahead,
your vehicle’s speed will be reduced so
that you follow that vehicle at the preset following distance.
If there is no vehicle directly ahead of
you, Distronic will function in the same
way as standard cruise control
(컄 page 209).
Warning!
G
Distronic adaptive cruise control is not a
substitute for active driving involvement. It
does not react to pedestrians or stationary
objects, recognize or predict the lane curvature nor the movement of preceding
vehicles.
Distronic can only apply a maximum of 20%
of the vehicle’s braking power.
It is the driver’s responsibility at all times to
be attentive to the road, weather and traffic
conditions. In addition, the driver must provide the steering, braking and other driving
inputs necessary to remain in control of the
vehicle.
Warning!
G
Distronic is a convenience system. Its speed
adjustment reduction capability is intended
to make cruise control more effective and
usable when traffic speeds vary. It is not
however, intended to, nor does it, replace
the need for extreme care. The responsibility for the vehicle’s speed, distance to the
preceding vehicle and, most importantly,
brake operation to assure a safe stopping
distance, always rests with the driver.
Warning!
G
Distronic requires familiarity with its operational characteristics. We strongly recommend that you review the following
information carefully before operating the
system.
Warning!
G
Distronic cannot take street and traffic conditions into account. Only use Distronic if
the road, weather and traffic conditions
make it advisable to travel at a constant
speed.
213
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning!
G
Warning!
G
Warning!
G
Use of Distronic can be dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction
can result in wheel spin and loss of control.
Distronic cannot take weather conditions
into account. Switch off Distronic or do not
switch it on if:
Close attention to road and traffic conditions is imperative at all times, regardless of
whether or not Distronic is activated.
Distronic does not act upon adverse sight
distance conditions. Do not use Distronic
during conditions of fog, heavy rain, snow or
sleet.
앫
Use of Distronic can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic because conditions do not allow safe driving at a constant
speed.
roads are slippery or covered with snow
or ice
The wheels could lose traction while
braking or accelerating and the vehicle
could skid.
앫
the sensor is dirty or visibility is diminished due to snow, rain or fog for example
The distance control system functionality could be impaired.
Always pay attention to surrounding traffic
conditions even while Distronic is switched
on. Otherwise, you may not be able to recognize dangerous situations until it is too late.
This could cause an accident in which you
and/or others could be injured.
214
Distronic will not react to stationary objects
on the roadway (e.g. a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). Distronic
will also not respond to oncoming vehicles.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
i USA only:
Switch off Distronic:
앫
when changing from the left to the right
lane if vehicles are moving more slowly
in the left lane
앫
when entering a turn lane or highway off
ramp
앫
in complex driving situations, such as in
highway construction zones
In these situations, Distronic will continue to
maintain the set speed unless deactivated.
Distronic is designed and intended only to
maintain a set speed and keep a set distance from moving objects in front of your
vehicle.
Warning!
G
The “Resume” function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this
particular preset speed.
This device has been approved by the FCC as a
“Vehicle Radar System”. The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system
only. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted
by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
any non-approved way.
Distronic displays in the speedometer
dial
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
i Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
1 Red distance warning lamp E
2 Set speed
Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will
void any warranties, and is not permitted by the
FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any
non-approved way.
When Distronic is activated, distance
warning lamp 1 and the set speed 2 appear in the speedometer dial.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
i The vehicle speed displayed in the speedometer can briefly vary from the speed setting for
the Distronic.
215
Controls in detail
Driving systems
If Distronic detects a vehicle directly
ahead, the Distronic indicator lamp E
in the speedometer dial comes on white.
If Distronic calculates that there is a danger of collision:
앫
The distance warning lamp E in the
speedometer comes on red.
앫
An intermittent warning sounds.
왘
Immediately apply the brake to avoid a
collision.
Under no circumstances should the
driver await the intermittent warning
sound before braking. See the following warning note.
The intermittent warning sound ceases
and the red distance warning
lamp E goes out when the necessary distance to the vehicle ahead is
established again.
Warning!
G
An intermittent warning sounds and the
distance warning lamp (red) E in the
speedometer dial is illuminated if the Distronic system calculates that the distance to
the vehicle ahead and your vehicle’s current
speed indicate that Distronic will not be capable of slowing the vehicle sufficiently to
maintain the preset following distance,
which creates a danger of a collision.
Immediately brake the vehicle to increase
the distance to the preceding vehicle. The
warning sound is intended as a final caution
that you have not interceded with your own
braking inputs to avoid a potentially dangerous situation. Do not wait for the operation
of the warning signal to intercede with your
own braking, as that will result in potentially
dangerous emergency braking which will
not always result in an impact being avoided.
Tailgating increases the risk of an accident.
216
Warning!
G
Distronic brakes your vehicle with a maximum deceleration of 6.5 ft/s2 (2 m/s2).
This corresponds to about 20% of the maximum deceleration ability of your vehicle.
Distronic brakes the vehicle in an effort to
restore the preset distance or to maintain
the set speed.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Distronic menu in the control system
Distronic deactivated
Distronic activated
Use the Distronic menu to display the
current settings for your Distronic system.
The information shown in the multifunction
display depends on whether the Distronic
system is activated (컄 page 218) or deactivated (컄 page 220).
When Distronic is deactivated, you will see
the standard display in the left multifunction display.
When Distronic is activated, the DTR symbol and the set speed appear in the left
multifunction display.
1 Preceding vehicle, if detected
2 Actual distance to preceding vehicle
3 Preset distance threshold to preceding
vehicle
4 Your vehicle
5 Symbol for activated distance warning
function
1 Symbol for activated Distronic
2 Set speed
i For information on the distance warning
function*, see “Distance warning function*”
(컄 page 224).
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see one of the following displays in the multifunction display.
217
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Cruise control lever
Activating Distronic
The Distronic system is operated by means
of the cruise control lever.
You can activate Distronic when the vehicle speed is between 20 mph (30 km/h)
and 110 mph (180 km/h).
The cruise control lever is the uppermost
lever found on the left-hand side of the
steering column.
When Distronic is activated, the left multifunction display will show a message such
as DTR 55 mph.
If Distronic is not activated after the cruise
control lever is pulled, the left multifunction display will show the message
DTR --- mph.
In the following cases you cannot activate
Distronic:
1 Setting current or higher speed
2 Setting current or lower speed
3 Deactivate Distronic
4 Activating Distronic or resuming at last
set speed
218
앫
up to 2 minutes after starting the engine
1 White Distronic indicator lamp E
2 Set speed
앫
when you brake
앫
when you have set the parking brake
i The vehicle speed displayed in the speedometer can briefly vary from the speed setting for
the Distronic.
앫
when the gear selector lever is set to
position P, R, or N.
앫
when the ESP® is switched off
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting the current speed
Setting a higher speed
Setting a lower speed
왘
Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
speed.
왘
왘
왘
Briefly lift the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 1 or depress in
direction of arrow 2 (컄 page 218).
Distronic is activated and the current
speed is set.
왘
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 1 (컄 page 218) to
increase the vehicle speed in increments of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).
The new speed is set.
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 2 (컄 page 218) to decrease the vehicle speed in increments
of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).
The new speed is set.
i Depressing the accelerator pedal does not
i When you use the cruise control lever to de-
deactivate Distronic. After brief acceleration
(e.g. for passing), the cruise control will resume
the last speed set.
celerate, the brakes will be applied to support
deceleration.
In addition, the transmission will automatically
downshift on long downhill grades.
i If you do not take your foot off of the accelerator but continue to accelerate past the set
speed, the following message will appear in the
multifunction display:
Fine adjustment in 1 mph
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments
DTR override.
Faster
The distance to slower moving vehicles in front
of you will not be set. Your vehicle speed will
then be determined only by the accelerator
pedal position.
왘
Briefly pull the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 4 (컄 page 218).
219
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting to last stored speed
(“Resume” function)
Warning!
G
The set speed stored in memory should only
be set again if prevailing road conditions
permit. Possible acceleration or deceleration differences arising from returning to the
preset speed could caused an accident
and/or serious injury to you and others.
왘
Briefly pull the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 4 (컄 page 218).
Distronic resumes the last stored
speed or, if no speed is stored, it will
set and store the current speed.
왘
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
220
Deactivating Distronic
i Distronic deactivates automatically when
There are several ways to deactivate the
Distronic system:
앫
you depress the parking brake pedal
앫
the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (30 km/h) (컄 page 218)
앫
the ESP® is in operation or switched off with
the ESP® switch (컄 page 91)
앫
you move the gear selector lever into
position N
왘
Step on the brake pedal.
or
왘
Briefly push the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 3 (컄 page 218).
Distronic will be deactivated. The last set
speed will be stored into memory.
The following message appears in the multifunction display for approximately
5 seconds: DTR off
i The last stored set speed is deleted when
the engine is turned off.
An acoustic warning sounds and the message DTR off appears in the multifunction
display for approximately 5 seconds.
Warning!
G
Distronic switches off and releases the
brakes when the vehicle decelerates below
the minimum speed of 20 mph (30 km/h)
by operation of the system. At that time the
driver must apply the brakes in order to
reduce vehicle speed further or bring it to a
stop.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
! Moving the gear selector lever to position N
while driving cancels the Distronic. However, the
gear selector lever should not be moved to
position N while driving except to coast when
the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on icy
roads).
i Depressing the accelerator pedal does not
deactivate the Distronic. After brief acceleration
(e.g. for passing), the Distronic will resume the
last speed set.
Warning!
G
It is up to the driver to exercise discretion to
select the appropriate setting given road
conditions, traffic, driver’s preferred driving
style and applicable laws and driving recommendations for safe following distance.
Increasing the distance setting tells
Distronic to maintain a greater following
distance to the preceding vehicle.
왘
Turn thumbwheel 1 towards ¯.
Decreasing distance
Decreasing the distance setting tells
Distronic to maintain a shorter following
distance to the preceding ahead.
Setting the following distance in
Distronic
You can set the specified following distance for Distronic by varying the time setting between 1.0 and 2.0 seconds. Using
this time setting and the current speed of
your vehicle, Distronic calculates and sets
the required following distance to the preceding vehicle. The set distance will appear in the right multifunction display
(컄 page 217).
Increasing distance
왘
Turn thumbwheel 1 towards ®.
1 Thumbwheel for setting following
distance
The distance setting thumbwheel for the
time setting is located on the lower section
of the center console.
221
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Driving with Distronic
This section describes a number of driving
situations where special precaution is required on the part of the driver. Be prepared to brake in such situations. This will
deactivate the Distronic system.
Warning!
G
Distronic works to maintain the speed selected by the driver unless a moving obstacle proceeding directly ahead of it in the
same travel direction is detected (e.g. following another vehicle ahead of you at your
set distance. This means that:
앫
Your vehicle can pass another vehicle
after you have changed lanes.
앫
While in a sharp turn or if the preceding
vehicle is in a sharp turn, Distronic could
lose sight of the preceding vehicle. Your
vehicle could then accelerate to the previously set speed.
222
Distronic regulates only the distance between your vehicle and those directly ahead
of it, but does not register stationary objects
in the road, e.g.:
The most likely cause for a malfunctioning
system is a dirty sensor (located behind
the hood grille), especially at times of snow
and ice or heavy rain. In such a case,
Distronic will switch off, and the message
앫
a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam
앫
a disabled vehicle
Distronic Currently unavailable. See
Oper. Manual appears in the multifunction
앫
an oncoming vehicle
display.
The driver must always be alert, observe all
traffic and intercede as required by means
of steering or braking the vehicle.
Warning!
G
Distronic should not be used in snowy or icy
road conditions.
i If the message Distronic available
again appears in the multifunction display during driving, the dirt (e.g. slush) has dissolved.
Distronic is available again if you reactivate it
(컄 page 218).
For cleaning and care of the Distronic sensor, see “Cleaning the Distronic* system
sensor cover” (컄 page 325).
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Turns and bends
Offset driving
Lane changing
In turns or bends, Distronic may not detect
a moving vehicle in front, or it may detect
one too soon. This may cause your vehicle
to brake late or unexpectedly.
A vehicle traveling in your lane but offset
from your direct line of travel may not be
detected by Distronic. There will be insufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
Distronic has not yet detected the vehicle
changing lanes. There will be insufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle.
223
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Narrow vehicles
Distance warning function*
Warning!
When Distronic* is deactivated, this function will continue to warn you when recognizing a stationary obstacle or a slower
vehicle moving in your vehicle’s path and
the danger of a collision exists:
앫
앫
Because of their narrow profile, the vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the
lane have not yet been detected by
Distronic. There will be insufficient distance to the vehicles ahead.
The distance warning lamp E in the
speedometer comes on red.
An intermittent warning will sound if
necessary.
If these warnings are issued, you must
brake manually to maintain a safe distance
and avoid a collision with the preceding
vehicle.
When depressing the brake pedal, the
warning sound ceases. The warning sound
will also cease when the distance to the
preceding vehicle is sufficient again without applying the brakes. In this case, the
distance warning lamp will also go out.
224
G
If the distance warning lamp (red) E in
the speedometer comes on while driving
and/or an intermittent warning sounds, immediate attention on part of the driver is
required.
As required by the traffic situation, apply the
brakes and navigate around a possible obstacle. However, do not drive by relying on
the distance warning function, as this will
result in an emergency braking application.
This will not always enable you to avoid a
collision, especially when traveling on varying road surface conditions and with varying
driver reaction.
i Complex driving situations are not always
fully recognized by the distance warning function. This could result in wrong or missing distance warnings.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Activating
왘
Press switch 1.
The indicator lamp on the switch
comes on. A loudspeaker symbol appears in the right multifunction display
(컄 page 217).
Active Body Control (ABC)
The ABC system is an active, computer-controlled system that hydraulically adjusts the suspension at all four wheels in
response to various driving situations. It
automatically selects the optimum suspension tuning and ride height for your vehicle.
Deactivating
1 Distance warning function switch
왘
Press switch 1 once more.
Vehicle level control
The indicator lamp on the switch goes
out. No loudspeaker symbol appears in
the right multifunction display.
Warning!
G
To help avoid personal injury, keep hands
and feet away from wheel housing area, and
stay away from under the vehicle when lowering the vehicle chassis.
Your vehicle automatically adjusts its ride
height to:
앫
increase vehicle safety
앫
reduce fuel consumption
225
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The vehicle chassis ride height is raised or
lowered according to the selected level
setting and to the vehicle speed:
앫
앫
With increasing speed, ride height is reduced by up to approximately 0.5 inch
(12 mm).
With decreasing speed, the ride height
is again raised to the selected vehicle
level.
i These height adjustments are so small that
you may not notice any change.
The following vehicle level settings can be
selected when the vehicle is stationary:
i The selected vehicle level setting remains
stored in memory, even if the engine is turned off
and restarted.
Vehicle Use for
level
The ABC vehicle level control button with
the indicator lamps is located in the lower
section of the center console.
Indicator
lamps
Normal For driving on nor- Both
mal roads.
lamps off
Level 1 For driving on
One
rough roads or with lamp on
snow chains
(컄 page 318).
Level 2 For driving on very Both
rough road surface lamps on
conditions.
Select the level 1 and level 2 settings only
when required by current driving conditions. Otherwise:
226
앫
Fuel consumption may increase.
앫
Handling may be impaired.
1 Indicator lamp 1
2 Indicator lamp 2
3 ABC vehicle level control button
Controls in detail
Driving systems
왘
Start the engine (컄 page 52).
Suspension tuning
왘
Briefly press button 3 to change from
one level setting to the next.
The suspension tuning is set according to:
앫
The normal level is selected if both
indicator lamps are off.
앫
At level 1, indicator lamp 1 is on.
앫
At level 2, both indicator lamps are
on.
When the vehicle is at level 2, pressing
the button will return the vehicle to normal level.
i Pressing the button twice in quick succession will cause the vehicle to immediately raise
or lower to the new vehicle level as selected.
앫
Your driving style
앫
Road surface conditions
앫
The vehicle loading
앫
Your choice of suspension style
The ABC suspension tuning button with the
indicator lamp is located in the lower section of the center console.
You can set the following suspension
styles:
앫
Regular (Comfort)
앫
Sporty
1 ABC suspension tuning button
i The selected setting is stored, even if the en- 2 Indicator lamp
gine is turned off.
왘
Start the engine (컄 page 52).
227
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Suspension for sporty driving style
The setting for sporty driving is selected
when indicator lamp 2 is illuminated.
왘
Press button 1.
Indicator lamp 2 comes on.
Suspension for regular driving style
The setting for regular driving is selected
when the indicator lamp 2 is off.
왘
Press button 1.
Indicator lamp 2 goes out.
Parktronic system* (Parking assist)
Warning!
Warning!
G
Parktronic is a supplemental system. It is
not intended to, nor does it replace, the
need for extreme care. The responsibility
during parking and other critical maneuvers
always rests with the driver.
Special attention must be paid to objects
with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes
(e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts, or road
curbs). Such objects may not be detected by
the system and can damage the vehicle.
The operational function of the Parktronic
system can be affected by dirty sensors, especially at times of snow and ice. See
“Cleaning the Parktronic* system sensors”
(컄 page 326).
228
G
Make sure no persons or animals are in the
area in which you are maneuvering. Otherwise you run the risk of causing injury.
! Interference caused by other ultrasonic signals (e.g. working jackhammers, car wash, or the
air brakes of trucks) can cause the system to
send erratic indications, and should be taken
into consideration.
The Parktronic system is an electronic aid
with ultrasonic sensors. It is designed to
assist the driver during parking maneuvers. It visually and audibly indicates the
relative distance between the vehicle and
an obstacle.
The Parktronic system is automatically activated when you switch on the ignition, release the parking brake, or place the gear
selector lever in position D, R, or N. The
Parktronic system deactivates at speeds
exceeding approximately 11 mph
(18 km/h). At lower vehicle speeds the
Parktronic system turns on again.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The Parktronic system also deactivates
when you place the gear selector lever in
position P or depress the parking brake
pedal.
The Parktronic system monitors the surroundings of your vehicle with six sensors
in the front bumper and four sensors in the
rear bumper.
Range of the sensors
Front sensors
Center
approx. 40 in (100 cm)
Corners
approx. 24 in (60 cm)
Rear sensors
Center
approx. 48 in (120 cm)
Corners
approx. 32 in (80 cm)
! During parking maneuvers, pay special attention to objects located above or below the
height of the sensors (e.g. planters or trailer
hitches). The Parktronic system will not detect
such objects at close range and damage to your
vehicle or the object may result.
1 Sensors in the front bumper
Ultrasonic signals from outside sources (e.g.
truck air brakes, car wash, or jackhammers) may
impair the operation of the Parktronic system.
i To function properly, the sensors must be
free of dirt, ice, snow and slush. Clean the sensors regularly, being careful not to scratch or
damage the sensors, see “Cleaning the Parktronic system* sensors” (컄 page 326).
229
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Minimum distance
Center
approx. 8 in (20 cm)
Corners
approx. 6 in (15 cm)
If the system detects an obstacle in this
range, all the distance warning segments
illuminate and you hear a warning signal. If
the obstacle is closer than the minimum
distance, the actual distance may no longer be indicated by the system.
Warning indicators
Visual signals indicate to the driver the relative distance between the sensors and an
obstacle.
The warning indicator for the front area is
located above the center air vents in the
dashboard. The warning indicator for the
rear area is integrated in the rear trim.
Front area warning indicator
1 Left side of the vehicle
2 Right side of the vehicle
230
Each warning indicator is divided into six
yellow and two red distance segments for
either side of the vehicle. The Parktronic
system is ready when the border around
the indicator is illuminated.
The position of the gear selector lever determines which warning indicators will be
activated.
Gear selector
lever position
Warning indicator
D
Front area activated
R or N
Front and rear area
activated
P
Neither activated
Controls in detail
Driving systems
As your vehicle approaches an object, one
or more distance segments will illuminate,
depending on the distance. When the
eighth distance segment illuminates, you
have reached the minimum distance.
앫
앫
Front area: An intermittent acoustic
warning will sound as the first red distance segment illuminates and a constant acoustic warning lasting a
maximum of 2 seconds will sound for
the second distance segment. The signal is canceled when the gear selector
lever is placed in position P or the parking brake is set.
Rear area: An intermittent acoustic
warning will sound when the first distance segment illuminates. This signal
quickens with each additional distance
segment lit. When the eighth distance
segment illuminates, the acoustic
warning becomes a constant signal.
The signal is canceled when the gear
selector lever is placed in position D
or P or the parking brake is set.
Switching the Parktronic system
on/off
Switching on
왘
You can switch off the Parktronic system
manually.
The Parktronic switch is located in the lower part of the center console (컄 page 32).
Press Parktronic switch 1 once more.
Indicator lamp 2 goes out.
i The Parktronic system switches on automatically when you switch on the ignition
(컄 page 39).
Parktronic system malfunction
If only the red distance segments illuminate and an acoustic warning sounds,
there is a malfunction in the Parktronic
system. The Parktronic system will automatically switch off after 20 seconds and
the indicator lamp in the Parktronic switch
comes on.
1 Parktronic switch
2 Indicator lamp
왘
Have the Parktronic system checked
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Switching off
왘
Press Parktronic switch 1.
Indicator lamp 2 comes on.
231
Controls in detail
Driving systems
If only the red distance segments illuminate and no acoustic warning sounds, the
Parktronic system sensors are dirty or
there is an interference from other radio or
ultrasonic signals. The Parktronic system
will automatically switch off after
20 seconds and the indicator lamp in the
Parktronic switch comes on.
왘
Switch off the ignition (컄 page 39).
왘
Clean the Parktronic system sensors
(컄 page 326).
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
or
왘
Check the Parktronic system operation
at another location to rule out interference from outside radio or ultrasonic
signals.
232
Controls in detail
Useful features
왔 Useful features
Storage compartments
Warning!
Glove box
G
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when storing objects in the vehicle. Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if possible. Do not
pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat
backs. Do not place anything on shelf behind roll bar.
Parcel nets cannot secure hard or heavy objects.
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help
to prevent stored objects from being thrown
about and injuring vehicle occupants during
an accident.
Door storage compartments
Warning!
G
Keep the door storage compartments
closed while vehicle is in motion. Failure to
do so may cause the seat belt to catch at the
rear and prevent proper positioning of the
seat belt.
1 Glove box lid release
2 Glove box lid
Opening glove box
왘
Press glove box lid release 1.
Glove box lid 2 opens downward.
Closing glove box
왘
Push glove box lid 2 up to close.
1 Release button
2 Storage compartment lid
233
Controls in detail
Useful features
Opening
왘
Press release button 1.
Storage compartment lid 2 lid opens
upwards.
Armrest storage compartments
The release buttons are located under the
cushion of the armrest.
i The Roadside Assistance button •
(컄 page 247) and the Information button ¡
(컄 page 248) are located in the storage tray.
Opening storage tray
왘
Seat storage compartments
Storage compartments are located in the
seat base of each seat and are intended for
storing small, light weight items.
Press button 1 and lift the armrest.
Opening storage compartment
왘
Press button 2 and lift the armrest.
Passenger seat storage compartment
1 Handle
2 Storage compartment lid
1 Storage tray release
2 Storage compartment release
234
왘
Pull handle 1 up.
왘
Fold lid 2 down.
i The driver’s seat storage compartment contains the first-aid kit, (컄 page 388).
Controls in detail
Useful features
Rear storage compartments
Locking storage compartments
The CD changer is located in the driver’s
side storage compartment.
The storage compartments are centrally
locked when you lock the vehicle from the
outside.
For instructions on the CD changer, see
separate COMAND Operator’s Manual.
You can also lock the storage compartments separately, see “Locking the storage compartments separately”
(컄 page 235).
Locking the storage compartments
separately
You can lock the storage compartments
separately, e.g. when the vehicle is in the
shop for service.
1 Release button
2 Storage compartment lid
1 Separately unlocking storage compartments
2 Separately locking storage compartments
왘
왘
Driver’s side rear storage compartment
Press release button 1.
Storage compartment lid 2 lid opens
upwards.
Remove the mechanical key from the
SmartKey (컄 page 391).
컄컄
235
Controls in detail
Useful features
컄컄 왘
왘
Insert the mechanical key into the
glove box lock.
Unlocking the storage compartments
separately
Turn the mechanical key to
position 2.
왘
Insert the mechanical key into the
glove box lock.
The following storage compartments
will be locked. They remain locked,
even when the vehicle is unlocked with
the SmartKey or with the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO*:
왘
Turn the mechanical key to
position 1.
앫
Glove box
앫
Armrest storage compartments
앫
Rear storage compartments
You can now open the storage compartments.
Parcel net in passenger footwell
A small convenience parcel net is located
in the passenger footwell. It is for small
and light items, such as road maps, mail,
etc.
Warning!
G
The parcel net is intended for storing
light-weight items only.
compartments can only be canceled with the
mechanical key.
Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or
fragile objects may not be transported in the
parcel net. In an accident, during hard braking, or sudden maneuvers, they could be
thrown around inside the vehicle and cause
injury to vehicle occupants.
The storage compartments in the doors cannot
be locked.
The parcel net cannot protect transported
goods in the event of an accident.
i The separate locking status of these storage
i If the glove box cannot be unlocked using
the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*,
see “Unlocking the glove box” (컄 page 392).
236
Controls in detail
Useful features
Parcel nets in trunk
There are three nets available in the trunk
to secure loads:
앫
a pocket net on each side of the right
and left trunk side walls
앫
a trunk floor net
왘
Pull the trunk floor net from the trunk
back wall towards the front over the
luggage.
왘
Hang the hooks of the net on the eyes
on the trunk floor.
Luggage compartment in the rear
Warning!
G
Secure all pieces of luggage in the rear with
the luggage straps. Unsecured pieces of luggage can otherwise cause injury during a
braking maneuver and can increase the risk
of injury in an accident.
Never allow anyone to ride in the rear.
The luggage straps can only secure light luggage items. Carry heavy pieces of luggage in
the trunk.
The rear compartment area is not designed
or intended to accommodate occupants. Severe personal injury or death may be the result in an accident.
1 Strap
2 Holder
3 Latch
4 Release button
237
Controls in detail
Useful features
왘
Pull strap 1 out of holder 2.
왘
Secure the luggage with the strap so
that it cannot move.
왘
Insert strap 1 into latch 3.
Cup holders
Releasing strap
왘
Press release button 4 and guide
strap 1 back to holder 2.
Warning!
G
The shelf below the rear window should not
be used to carry objects. This will avoid such
objects from being thrown about and injuring vehicle occupants during an accident or
sudden maneuver.
The trunk is the preferred place to carry objects.
Warning!
G
In order to help prevent spilling liquids on
vehicle occupants and/or vehicle equipment, only use containers that fit into the
cup holder. Use lids on open containers and
do not fill containers to a height where the
contents, especially hot liquids, could spill
during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an
accident. Liquids spilled on vehicle occupants may cause serious personal injury.
Liquids spilled on vehicle equipment may
cause damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
When not in use, keep the cup holder
closed. An open cup holder may cause injury
to or others when contacted during braking,
vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident.
Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup
holder may come lose during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident and be
thrown around in the vehicle interior. Objects thrown around in the vehicle interior
may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.
1 Left cup holder
2 Right cup holder
Opening
왘
Briefly press cup holder cover.
The cup holder opens automatically.
238
Controls in detail
Useful features
Ashtray
Removing the ashtray insert
Warning!
Cigarette lighter
G
Remove ashtray only with vehicle standing
still. Set the parking brake to secure vehicle
from movement. Move gear selector lever to
position N. With gear selector lever in
position N, turn off the engine.
왘
1 Cover plate
2 Sliding knob
Secure vehicle from movement by setting the parking brake. Move the gear
selector lever to position N.
Opening ashtray
Now you have more room to take out
the insert.
왘
Briefly touch cover plate 1.
왘
The ashtray opens automatically.
Closing ashtray
왘
Press cover plate 1 down until it
latches.
Press sliding knob 2 to the right.
The insert will eject a short distance.
Warning!
G
Never touch the heating element or sides of
the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the
knob only.
Make sure that any children traveling with
you do not injure themselves or start a fire
with the hot cigarette lighter.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take
it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause serious personal injury.
Replacing the ashtray insert
왘
Press the insert into the frame until it
snaps into place.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
239
컄컄
Controls in detail
Useful features
컄컄
1 Cigarette lighter
왘
Push in cigarette lighter 1.
The lighter will pop out automatically
when hot.
! The lighter socket can accommodate
12V DC electrical accessories (up to a maximum
of 85 W) designed for use with the standard
“cigarette lighter” plug type. Keep in mind, however, that connecting accessories to the lighter
socket (for example extensive connecting and
disconnecting, or using plugs that do not fit properly) can damage the lighter socket. With the
socket damaged, the lighter may no longer be
able to be placed in the heating (pushed-in) position, or the lighter may pop out too early with the
lighter not hot enough.
Heated steering wheel*
The steering wheel heating warms up the
leather area of the steering wheel.
The stalk is located on the lower left-hand
side of the steering wheel.
To help avoid damaging the cigarette lighter
socket, we recommend connecting 12V DC electrical accessories designed for use with the standard “cigarette lighter” plug type to the
12V power outlet (컄 page 242) in your vehicle
whenever possible.
1 Switching on
2 Switching off
3 Indicator lamp
240
Controls in detail
Useful features
Switching on
i Indicator lamp 3 flashes or switches off
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
앫
in case of power surge or undervoltage
왘
Turn the switch at the tip of the stalk in
direction of arrow 1.
앫
in case of a steering wheel heating malfunction
The steering wheel is heated. Indicator
lamp 3 comes on.
i The steering wheel heating is temporarily
suspended while indicator lamp 3 remains on
when
앫
the temperature of the vehicle interior is
above 86°F (30°C)
앫
the temperature of the steering wheel is
above 95°F (35°C)
i The steering wheel heating switches off automatically when you remove the SmartKey from
the starter switch or, on vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO*, when you switch off the ignition
(컄 page 40) and open the driver’s door.
For more information on the steering
wheel, see “Multifunction steering wheel”
(컄 page 140).
Load assist in the trunk
To facilitate trunk loading after opening the
trunk lid, use the load assist feature to
raise the retracted hardtop from its storage position in the trunk.
Warning!
G
To prevent injuries, make sure that there is
no possibility of body parts getting caught in
moving parts. If potential danger exists,
press the switch again. This will immediately
stop the movement of the hardtop.
When these conditions do not apply anymore,
steering wheel heating continues.
Switching off
왘
Turn switch at the tip of the stalk in
direction of arrow 2.
The steering wheel heating is switched
off. Indicator lamp 3 goes out.
241
Controls in detail
Useful features
Raising the hardtop
왘
Press button 3.
Hardtop 1 rises a short distance.
Button 3 comes on brightly. You can
now open luggage cover 2.
Power outlet
A power outlet is located on the right side
of the trunk.
Lowering the hardtop
왘
Close luggage cover 2.
1 Retracted hardtop
2 Luggage cover
3 Load assist button
왘
Press button 3.
Hardtop 1 can only be raised or lowered
when
! Only close the trunk if the hardtop is completely lowered. Otherwise you could damage
the hardtop.
앫
luggage cover 2 is closed
앫
the trunk lid is completely opened
242
Hardtop 1 lowers. Button 3 is dimly
lit.
If you begin to close the trunk lid before the hardtop is completely lowered, button 3 will flash
and a warning will sound.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
왘
Flip up cover and insert electrical plug
(cigar lighter type).
i The power outlet can be used to accommodate electrical consumers (e.g. air pump,
auxiliary lamps) up to a maximum of 180 W.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Telephone*
Warning!
Warning!
G
Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s
attention to the road must always be
his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location
and stop before placing or taking a telephone call.
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
If you choose to use the telephone1 while
driving, please use the hands-free device
and only use the telephone when road,
weather, and traffic conditions permit.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.
Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or a citizens band unit, should only
be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on
the outside of the vehicle.
The external antenna must be approved by
Mercedes-Benz. Please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for information on the installation of an approved
external antenna. Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions regarding use
of an external antenna.
G
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet
(approximately 14 m) every second.
You can take and place telephone calls using the s and t buttons on the
steering wheel. To carry out other telephone functions, use the control system
(컄 page 165).
See separate instruction manual for instructions on how to operate the telephone.
Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data System)1 if road, weather, and traffic conditions permit.
1
Observe all legal requirements.
243
Controls in detail
Useful features
Tele Aid
! The initial activation of the Tele Aid system
may only be performed by completing the subscriber agreement and placing an acquaintance
call using the ¡ button. Failure to complete
either of these steps will result in a system that
is not activated.
If you have any questions regarding activation,
please call the Response Center at
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
The Tele Aid system
(Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand)
The Tele Aid system consists of three
types of response:
앫
Automatic and manual emergency
앫
Roadside Assistance
앫
Information
The Tele Aid system is operational providing that the vehicle’s battery is charged,
properly connected, not damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is available.
The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can
be adjusted when using the volume control
on the multifunction steering wheel. To
raise, press button æ and to lower,
press button çor use the volume knob
on your COMAND headunit.
왘
244
To activate, press the SOS button, the
Roadside Assistance button • or
the Information button ¡, depending on the type of response required.
i The SOS button is located above the interior
rear view mirror (컄 page 246).
The Roadside Assistance button • and the
Information button ¡ are located below the
center armrest cover (컄 page 234).
Shortly after the completion of your Tele
Aid acquaintance call, you will receive a
user ID and password. By visiting
www.mbusa.com and selecting “Tele Aid”
(USA only), you will have access to account
information, remote door unlock, and
more.
! The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular network for communication and the GPS (Global Positioning System) satellites for vehicle location. If
either of these signals are unavailable, the Tele
Aid system may not function and if this occurs,
assistance must be summoned by other means.
System self-check
Initially, after switching on the ignition,
malfunctions are detected and indicated
(the indicator lamps in the SOS button, the
Roadside Assistance button • and the
Information button ¡ stay on longer
Controls in detail
Useful features
than 10 seconds or do not come on). The
message
TeleAid malfunction – Visit workshop
appears for approximately 10 seconds in
the multifunction display.
Warning!
G
If the indicator lamps in the SOS button, in
the Roadside Assistance button, and/or in
the Information button do not come on during the system self-check, or if any of these
indicators remain illuminated continuously
in red and/or the message TeleAid
malfunction – Visit workshop is displayed in the multifunction display after the
system self-check, a malfunction in the system has been detected.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
above, the system may not operate as expected. Have the system checked at the
nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Emergency calls
An emergency call is initiated
automatically following an accident in
which the emergency tensioning devices
(ETDs) or air bags deploy.
An emergency call can also be initiated
manually by opening the cover next to the
interior rear view mirror labeled SOS, then
briefly pressing the button located under
the cover. See (컄 page 246) for instructions on initiating an emergency call manually.
Once the emergency call is in progress, the
indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin
to flash. The message Connecting call
appears in the multifunction display and
the audio system is muted. When the connection is established, the message
Call connected appears in the multifunction display. All information relevant to the
emergency, such as the location of the vehicle (determined by the GPS satellite location system), vehicle model, identification
number and color are generated.
A voice connection between the Response
Center and the occupants of the vehicle
will be established automatically soon after the emergency call has been initiated.
The Response Center will attempt to determine more precisely the nature of the
emergency provided they can speak to an
occupant of the vehicle.
The Tele Aid system is available if
앫
it has been activated and is operational
Activation requires a subscription for
monitoring services, connection and
cellular air time.
앫
the relevant cellular phone network
and GPS signals are available and pass
the information on to the Response
Center
i Location of the vehicle on a map is only possible if the vehicle is able to receive signals from
the GPS satellite network and pass the information on to the Response Center.
245
Controls in detail
Useful features
Warning!
G
If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is
flashing continuously and there was no
voice connection to the Response Center
established, then the Tele Aid system could
not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available).
The message Call failed appears in the
multifunction display for approximately
10 seconds.
Should this occur, assistance must be summoned by other means.
Initiating an emergency call manually
Warning!
1 Cover
2 SOS button
왘
Briefly press on cover 1.
The cover opens.
왘
Press SOS button 2 briefly.
The indicator lamp in SOS button 2
will flash until the emergency call is
concluded.
246
왘
Wait for a voice connection to the Response Center.
왘
Close cover 1 after the emergency
call is concluded.
G
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the
vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, vehicle in a dangerous road location), please
do not wait for voice contact after you have
pressed the emergency button. Carefully
leave the vehicle and move to a safe location. The Response Center will automatically
contact local emergency officials with the
vehicle’s approximate location if they receive an automatic SOS signal and cannot
make voice contact with the vehicle occupants.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Roadside Assistance button •
The Roadside Assistance button • is
located below the center armrest cover.
When the connection is established, the
message Call connected appears in the
multifunction display. The Tele Aid system
will transmit data generating the vehicle
identification number, model, color and location (subject to availability of cellular
and GPS signals).
A voice connection between the Roadside
Assistance dispatcher and the occupants
of the vehicle will be established.
왘
1 Roadside Assistance button •
왘
Press and hold button 1 (for longer
than 2 seconds)
A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside
Assistance dispatcher will be initiated.
The button will flash while the call is in
progress. The message
Connecting call will appear in the
multifunction display and the audio
system is muted.
Describe the nature of the need for assistance.
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified
Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to
tow your vehicle to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such
as labor and/or towing, charges may apply. Refer to the Roadside Assistance
Manual for more information.
The following is only available in the USA:
앫
Sign and Drive services: Services such
as jump start, a few gallons of fuel or
the replacement of a flat tire with the
vehicle spare tire are obtainable.
i The indicator lamp in the Roadside
Assistance button • remains illuminated in
red for approximately 10 seconds during the
system self-check after switching on the ignition
(together with the SOS button and the Information button ¡).
See system self-check (컄 page 244) if the indicator lamp does not come on in red or stays on
longer than approximately 10 seconds.
If the indicator lamp in the Roadside Assistance
button • is flashing continuously and there
was no voice connection to the Response Center
established, then the Tele Aid system could not
initiate a Roadside Assistance call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available). The
message Call failed appears in the multifunction display.
Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated using the t button on the multifunction steering wheel or the respective button for ending a
telephone call on the COMAND headunit.
247
Controls in detail
Useful features
Information button ¡
The Information button ¡ is located below the center armrest cover.
1 Information button ¡
왘
Press and hold button 1 (for longer
than 2 seconds).
A call to the Customer Assistance Center will be initiated. The button will
flash while the call is in progress. The
message Connecting call will appear
in the multifunction display and the
audio system is muted.
248
When the connection is established, the
message Call connected appears in the
multifunction display. The Tele Aid system
will transmit data generating the vehicle
identification number, model, color and location (subject to availability of cellular
and GPS signals).
A voice connection between the Customer
Assistance Center representative and the
occupants of the vehicle will be established. Information regarding the operation
of your vehicle, the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz
USA products and services is available to
you.
For more details concerning the Tele Aid
system, please visit www.mbusa.com and
use your ID and password (sent to you separately) to learn more (USA only).
i The indicator lamp in the Information
button ¡ remains illuminated in red for approximately 10 seconds during the system
self-check after switching on the ignition (together with the SOS button and the Roadside Assistance button •).
See system self-check (컄 page 244) if the indicator lamp does not come on in red or stays on
longer than approximately 10 seconds.
If the indicator lamp in the Information
button ¡ is flashing continuously and no
voice connection to the
Response Center was established, then the
Tele Aid system could not initiate an Information
call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is
not available). The message Call failed appears in the multifunction display.
Information calls can be terminated using the
t button on the multifunction steering wheel
or the respective button for ending a telephone
call on the COMAND headunit.
Controls in detail
Useful features
! If the indicator lamps do not start flashing
after pressing one of the buttons or remain illuminated (in red) at any time, the Tele Aid system
has detected a malfunction or the service is currently not active, and may not initiate a call. Visit
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center and have
the system checked or contact the Response
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as soon as possible.
Call priority
i When a Tele Aid call has been initiated, the
If other service calls such as a Roadside
Assistance call or Information call are active, an Emergency call is still possible. In
this case, the Emergency call will take priority and override all other active calls.
COMAND system audio is muted and the selected mode (radio or CD) pauses. The optional cellular phone (if installed) switches off. If you must
use this phone, the vehicle must be parked. Disconnect the coiled cord and place the call. The
COMAND navigation system (if engaged) will
continue to run. The display in the instrument
cluster is available for use and spoken commands are only available by pressing the RPT
button on the COMAND unit. A pop-up window
will appear in the COMAND display to indicate
that a Tele Aid call is in progress.
i The indicator lamp in the respective button
flashes until the call is concluded. Calls can only
be terminated by a Response Center or Customer Assistance Center representative except
Roadside Assistance and Information calls,
which can also be terminated by pressing button
t on the multifunction steering wheel or the
respective button for ending a telephone call on
the COMAND headunit.
! If the indicator lamp continues to flash or
the system does not reset, contact the Response
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) in the USA or Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100 in Canada.
249
Controls in detail
Useful features
Remote door unlock
In case you have locked your vehicle unintentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle),
and the reserve SmartKey is not handy:
왘
Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA)
or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
You will be asked to provide your password which you provided when you
completed the subscriber agreement.
왘
Then return to your vehicle and pull the
trunk recessed handle for a minimum
of 20 seconds until the SOS button is
flashing.
The message Call connected appears
in the multifunction display.
As an alternative, you may unlock the vehicle via Internet using the ID and password
sent to you shortly after the completion of
your acquaintance call.
250
The Response Center will then unlock your
vehicle with the remote door unlocking
feature.
i The remote door unlock feature is available
Stolen Vehicle Recovery services
In the event your vehicle was stolen:
왘
The police will issue a numbered
incident report.
if the relevant cellular phone network is available.
The SOS button will flash and the message Call
connected will appear in the multifunction display to indicate receipt of the door unlock command.
Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Response Center
specialist will attempt to establish voice contact
with the vehicle occupants.
If the trunk recessed handle was pulled for more
than 20 seconds before door unlock authorization was received by the Response Center, you
must wait 15 minutes before pulling the trunk recessed handle again.
Report the incident to the police.
왘
Pass this number on to the
Mercedes-Benz Response Center along
with your password issued to you when
you subscribed to the service.
The Response Center will then attempt
to covertly contact the vehicle’s Tele
Aid system. Once the vehicle is located, the Response Center will contact
the local law enforcement and you. The
vehicle’s location will only be provided
to law enforcement.
i If the anti-theft alarm or the tow-away alarm
stays on for more than 30 seconds, a call to the
Response Center is initiated automatically by the
Tele Aid system provided Tele Aid service was
subscribed to and properly activated, and that
necessary cellular service and GPS coverage are
available. See anti-theft alarm system
(컄 page 96) and tow away alarm (컄 page 98).
Controls in detail
Useful features
Garage door opener
Warning!
The integrated remote control is capable of
operating up to three separately controlled
devices. It provides a convenient way to replace up to three hand-held remote controls used to operate devices such as
garage door openers, gate openers, or other devices compatible with HomeLink® or
some other systems.
Before the integrated remote control can
be used, it must be programmed to the garage door opener, gate operator or other
device you wish to operate. See the following instructions for programming information.
Interior rear view mirror with integrated remote control
1
Indicator lamp
2 3 4 Signal transmitter button
Needed for programming (not part of vehicle equipment):
5
Hand-held remote control of garage door opener, gate operator
or other device
6
Hand-held remote control button
G
Before programming the integrated remote
control to a garage door opener or gate
operator, make sure people and objects are
out of the way of the device to prevent potential harm or damage. When programming
a garage door opener, the door moves up or
down. When programming a gate operator,
the gate opens or closes.
Do not use the integrated remote control
with any garage door opener that lacks
safety stop and reverse features as required
by U.S. federal safety standards (this
includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982).
A garage door that cannot detect an object
– signaling the door to stop and reverse –
does not meet current U.S. federal safety
standards.
컄컄
251
Controls in detail
Useful features
컄컄
When programming a garage door opener,
park the vehicle outside the garage.
Do not run the engine while programming
the integrated remote control.
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and possible death.
Programming the integrated remote
control
Step 1:
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
Step 2:
Step 3:
왘
왘
If you have previously programmed an
signal transmitter button and wish to
retain its programming, proceed to
step 3.
If you are programming the integrated
remote control for the first time, press
and hold the two outer signal transmitter buttons 2 and 4 and release
them only when indicator lamp 1 begins to flash after approximately
20 seconds (do not hold the button for
longer than 30 seconds). This procedure erases any previous settings for
all three channels and initializes the
memory.
If you later wish to program a second
and/or third hand-held transmitter to
the remaining two signal transmitter
buttons, do not repeat this step and begin directly with step 3.
252
Hold the end of hand-held remote
control 5 of the device you wish to
train approximately 2 to 5 in
(5 to12 cm) away from the signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) to be programmed, while keeping indicator
lamp 1 in view.
Step 4:
왘
Using both hands, simultaneously
press hand-held remote control
button 6 and the desired signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not
release the buttons until step 5 is completed.
Indicator lamp 1 will flash, first slowly
and then rapidly.
i Indicator lamp 1 flashes immediately the
first time the signal transmitter button is programmed. If this button has already been programmed, the indicator lamp will only start
flashing after 20 seconds.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Step 5:
Step 7:
Step 9:
왘
왘
왘
After indicator lamp 1 changes from a
slow to a rapidly flashing light, release
the hand-held remote control button
and the signal transmitter button.
Step 6:
왘
Press and hold the just-trained signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) and
observe indicator lamp 1.
If indicator lamp 1 stays on
constantly, programming is complete
and your device should activate when
the respective signal transmitter
button (2, 3 or 4) is pressed and released.
i If indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly for about
2 seconds and then turns to a constant light,
continue with programming steps 8 through 12
as your garage door opener may be equipped
with the “rolling code” feature.
To program the remaining two signal
transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
above starting with step 3.
Rolling code programming
To train a garage door opener (or other
rolling code devices) with the rolling code
feature, follow these instructions after
completing the “Programming” portion
(steps 1 through 6) of this text. (A second
person may make the following training
procedures quicker and easier.)
Step 8:
왘
Locate “training” button on the garage
door opener motor head unit.
Exact location and color of the button
may vary by garage door opener brand.
Depending on manufacturer, the
“training” button may also be referred
to as “learn” or “smart” button. If there
is difficulty locating the transmitting
button, refer to the garage door opener
Operator’s Manual.
Press the “training” button on the garage door opener motor head unit.
The “training light” is activated.
You have 30 seconds to initiate the following step.
Step 10:
왘
Return to the vehicle and firmly press,
hold for 2 seconds and release the programmed signal transmitter button
(2, 3 or 4).
Step 11:
왘
Press, hold for 2 seconds and release
same signal transmitter button a second time to complete the training process.
i Some garage door openers (or other rolling
code equipped devices) may require you to
press, hold for 2 seconds and release the same
signal transmitter button a third time to com컄컄
plete the training process.
253
Controls in detail
Useful features
컄컄 Step
왘
12:
Confirm the garage door operation by
pressing the programmed signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4).
Step 13:
왘
To program the remaining two signal
transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
above starting with step 3.
Gate operator/Canadian programming
While still holding down the signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4),
“cycle” your hand-held remote control
button 6 as follows: Press and hold
button 6 for 2 seconds, then release
it for 2 seconds, and again press and
hold it for 2 seconds. Repeat this sequence on the hand-held remote control until the frequency signal has been
learned. Upon successful training, indicator lamp 1 will flash slowly and then
rapidly after several seconds.
왘
Proceed with programming step 5 and
step 6 to complete.
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission
which may not be long enough for the
integrated signal transmitter to pick up the
signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
are designed to “time-out” in the same
manner.
If you live in Canada or if you are having
difficulties programming a gate operator
(regardless of where you live) by using the
programming procedures, replace step 4
with the following:
Step 4:
왘
254
왘
Press and hold the signal transmitter
button (2, 3 or 4). Do not release
this button until it has been successfully trained.
i Upon completion of programming the integrated remote control, make sure you retain the
hand-held remote control that came with the garage door opener, gate operator or other device.
You may need it for use in other vehicles, for future programming of an integrated remote control, or simply for continued use as a hand-held
remote control to operate the respective device
in other situations.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Reprogramming a single signal transmitter button
To program a device using a signal transmitter button previously trained, follow
these steps:
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
왘
Press and hold the desired signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4).
Do not release the button.
왘
Indicator lamp 1 will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the
signal transmitter button, proceed with
programming starting with step 3.
Operation of integrated remote control
Programming tips
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
왘
Select and press the appropriate integrated signal transmitter button (2,
3 or 4) to activate the remote controlled device.
If you are having difficulty programming
the integrated remote control, here are
some helpful tips:
앫
Check the frequency of hand-held remote control 5 (typically located on
the reverse side of the remote). The integrated remote control is compatible
with radio-frequency devices operating
between 288-399 MHz.
앫
Put a new battery in hand-held remote
control 5. This will increase the likelihood of the hand-held remote control
sending a faster and more accurate signal to the integrated remote control.
앫
While performing step 3, hold
hand-held remote control 5 at different lengths and angles from the signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) you
are programming. Attempt varying angles at the distance of 2 to 5 inches
(5 to 12 cm) away or the same angle at
varying distances.
The integrated remote control transmitter continues to send the signal as
long as the button is pressed – up to
20 seconds.
Erasing the integrated remote control
memory
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
왘
Simultaneously press and hold outer
signal transmitter buttons 2 and 4,
for approximately 20 seconds, until the
indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly. Do
not hold for longer than 30 seconds.
The codes of all three channels are
erased.
i If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes of all
three channels.
255
Controls in detail
Useful features
앫
앫
If another hand-held remote control is
available for the same device, try the
programming steps again using that
other hand-held remote control. Make
sure new batteries are in the hand-held
remote control before beginning the
procedure.
Straighten the antenna wire from the
garage door opener assembly. This
may help improve transmitting and/or
receiving signals.
i USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
i Certain types of garage door openers are in- i Canada only:
compatible with the integrated remote control. If
you should experience further difficulties with
programming the integrated remote control,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or
call Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (in the USA only) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in
Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
256
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
Driving instructions
At the gas station
Engine compartment
Tires and wheels
Winter driving
Maintenance
Vehicle care
257
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
In the “Operation” section you will find detailed information on operating, maintaining and caring for your vehicle.
258
The more cautiously you treat your vehicle
during the break-in period, the more satisfied you will be with its performance later
on.
앫
Drive your vehicle during the first
1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but
moderate vehicle and engine speeds.
앫
During this period, avoid heavy loads
(full throttle driving) and excessive engine speeds (no more than 2/3 of maximum rpm in each gear).
앫
Avoid accelerating by kickdown.
앫
Do not attempt to slow the vehicle
down by shifting to a lower gear using
the gear selector lever.
앫
Select positions 3, 2 or 1 only when
driving at moderate speeds (for hill
driving).
앫
Select C as the preferred shift program
(컄 page 169) for the first 1000 miles
(1500 km).
After 1000 miles (1500 km), you may
gradually increase vehicle and engine
speeds to the permissible maximum.
! Additional instructions for AMG vehicles:
앫
During the first 1000 miles (1500 km), do
not exceed a speed of 85 mph (140 km/h).
앫
During this period, avoid engine speeds
above 4500 rpm (SL 55 AMG) or 4000 rpm
(SL 65 AMG) in each gear.
All of the above instructions, as may apply
to your vehicle type, also apply when driving the first 1000 miles (1500 km) after
the engine or the rear differential has been
replaced.
i Always obey applicable speed limits.
Operation
Driving instructions
왔 Driving instructions
Drive sensibly – save fuel
Fuel consumption, to a great extent, depends on driving habits and operating conditions.
To save fuel you should:
앫
Keep tires at the recommended inflation pressures.
앫
Remove unnecessary loads.
앫
Allow engine to warm up under low
load use.
앫
Avoid frequent acceleration and deceleration.
앫
Have all maintenance work performed
at the intervals specified in the
Maintenance Booklet and as required
by the maintenance system. Contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Drinking and driving
Warning!
Pedals
G
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs
and driving are a very dangerous combination. Even a small amount of alcohol or
drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions
and judgment.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident are greatly increased when you drink
or take drugs and drive.
Warning!
G
Make sure that absolutely no objects are obstructing the pedal’s range of movement.
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obstacles. If there are any floormats or carpets in
the footwell, make sure the pedals still have
sufficient clearance. This could lead to accidents or injury.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
anyone to drive who has been drinking or
taking drugs.
Fuel consumption is also increased by driving in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic,
on short trips and in hilly area.
259
Operation
Driving instructions
Power assistance
Warning!
G
The brake system requires electrical energy
for operation.
A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply
or electrical system may impair brake system operation and switch it into its emergency operation mode. In such a case, the
red brake warning lamp (컄 page 335) and
warning messages (컄 page 347) in the instrument cluster come on while driving. To
brake, the driver must then apply significantly greater brake pedal pressure and depress the pedal much further to obtain the
expected braking effect. If necessary, apply
full pressure to the brake pedal. Brakes are
only applied to the front wheels. Stopping
distance is increased! If there is a malfunction in the electro-hydraulic brake system,
we recommend that the vehicle be transported with all wheels off the ground using
flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly equipment.
260
A tow bar must be used if circumstances do
not permit the use of the recommended
towing methods and the vehicle requires
towing with all four wheels on the ground.
Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on
the ground is only permissible for distances
up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to
exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). For more information, see “Towing the vehicle”
(컄 page 421).
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle.
Brakes
Warning!
G
After driving in heavy rain for some time
without applying the brakes or through water deep enough to wet brake components,
the first braking action may be somewhat
reduced and increased pedal pressure may
be necessary to obtain expected braking effect. Maintain a safe distance from vehicles
in front.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will
cause excessive and premature wear of the
brake pads.
It can also result in the brakes overheating
thereby significantly reducing their effectiveness. It may not be possible to stop the
vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an accident.
Operation
Driving instructions
To help prevent brake disk corrosion after
driving on wet road surfaces (particularly
salted roads), it is advisable to brake the
vehicle with considerable force prior to
parking. The heat generated serves to dry
the brakes.
If the parking brake is released and the
brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster stays on, there is a malfunction in the
electro-hydraulic brake system
(컄 page 92) or the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is too low.
If your brake system is normally only subjected to moderate loads, you should occasionally test the effectiveness of the
brakes by applying above-normal braking
pressure at higher speeds. This will also
enhance the grip of the brake pads.
Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may
be the reason for low brake fluid in the reservoir.
Warning!
G
Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when carrying out these braking
maneuvers.
Refer to the description of the Brake Assist
System (BAS) (컄 page 89).
Have the brake system inspected immediately.
All checks and service work on the brake
system should be carried out by qualified
technicians only. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Only install brake pads and brake fluid recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
Warning!
G
If other than recommended brake pads are
installed, or other than recommended brake
fluid is used, the braking properties of the
vehicle can be degraded to an extent that
safe braking is substantially impaired. This
could result in an accident.
Be certain to read and observe the warning
notices on brake pad replacement
(컄 page 94).
! When driving down long and steep grades,
relieve the load on the brakes by shifting into a
lower gear to use the engine’s braking power.
This helps prevent overheating of the brakes and
reduces brake pad wear.
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive
on for some time, rather than to park immediately, so the air stream will cool down
the brakes faster.
261
Operation
Driving instructions
High-performance brake system
(AMG vehicles only)
The high-performance brake system is designed to operate under the extremely high
operating demands required to accommodate the performance capabilities of the
vehicle. The brakes may produce a squeaking-type noise depending on the
앫
vehicle speed
앫
brake force applied
앫
ambient conditions, e.g. temperature
and humidity
As with any brake system, the wear of individual brake system components such as
brake pads or disks strongly depends on
your driving style and the conditions under
which you operate the vehicle. Thus, a driving style calling for high demand braking
will cause your vehicle’s brakes to wear
more quickly.
262
Warning!
G
New vehicle brake pads and discs, and
replacement brake pads and discs may take
several hundred miles of driving until they
provide optimum braking efficiency. Until
that time, you may need to use increased
brake pedal pressure while braking. Please
be aware of this and adjust your driving and
braking accordingly during this break-in
period.
Excessive high demand braking will cause
correspondingly high brake wear. Please be
attentive to the brake warning lamp in the
instrument cluster and brake condition messages in the multifunction display. Especially for high performance driving, it is
important to maintain and have the brake
system checked regularly.
Driving off
Apply the brakes to test them briefly after
driving off. Perform this procedure only
when the road is clear of other traffic.
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not
place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached.
When starting off on a slippery surface, do
not allow a drive wheel to spin for an extended period with the ESP® switched off.
Doing so may cause serious damage to the
drivetrain which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
! Simultaneously depressing the accelerator
pedal and applying the brake reduces engine
performance and causes premature brake and
drivetrain wear.
Operation
Driving instructions
Parking
Warning!
G
Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
To reduce the risk of personal injury as a result of vehicle movement, before turning off
the engine and leaving the vehicle always:
앫
Keep right foot on brake pedal.
앫
Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
앫
Move the gear selector lever to
position P.
앫
Slowly release brake pedal.
앫
When parked on an incline, turn front
wheels towards the road curb.
앫
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 0 and remove the SmartKey
from the starter switch, or press the
start/stop button (vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO*).
앫
Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* and lock vehicle when
leaving.
! Set the parking brake whenever parking or
leaving the vehicle. In addition, move gear selector lever to position P. When parking on hills,
turn front wheels towards the road curb.
Tires
Warning!
G
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible damage to your vehicle has occurred,
you should turn on the hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down, and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from
the road.
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
appear unsafe, have the vehicle towed to
the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center or tire
dealer for repairs.
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. These indicators are located in six
places on the tread circumference and become visible at a tread depth of approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which point
the tire is considered worn and should be
replaced.
263
Operation
Driving instructions
The treadwear indicator appears as a solid
band across the tread.
Warning!
G
Although the applicable federal motor vehicle safety laws consider a tire to be worn
when the treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible at approximately 1/16 in
(1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not allow your tires to wear down to that level. As
tread depth approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the
adhesion properties on a wet road are
sharply reduced.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
widely.
264
Specified tire inflation pressures must be
maintained. This applies particularly if the
tires are subjected to extreme operating
conditions (e.g. high speeds, heavy loads,
high ambient temperatures).
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle. Continued
driving with a flat tire or driving at high
speed with a flat tire will cause excessive
heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Hydroplaning
Depending on the depth of the water layer
on the road, hydroplaning may occur, even
at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce
vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the
road and apply brakes cautiously in the
rain.
Operation
Driving instructions
Tire traction
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or
icy road is always lower than on a dry road.
You should pay particular attention to the
condition of the road whenever the outside
temperatures are close to the freezing
point.
Warning!
G
If ice has formed on the road, tire traction
will be substantially reduced. Under such
weather conditions, drive, steer and brake
with extreme caution.
Mercedes-Benz recommends winter tires
(컄 page 316) with a minimum tread depth
of approximately 1/6 in (4 mm) on all four
wheels for the winter season to ensure
normal balanced handling characteristics.
On packed snow, they can reduce your
stopping distance as compared with summer tires. Stopping distance, however, is
still considerably greater than when the
road is not covered with snow or ice. Exercise appropriate caution.
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may
cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Tire speed rating
Regardless of the tire speed rating, local
speed limits should be obeyed. Use prudent driving speeds appropriate to prevailing conditions.
Warning!
G
Even when permitted by law, never operate
a vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed rating of the tires.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure, causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury and possible death, for you
and for others.
265
Operation
Driving instructions
SL 550
SL 55 AMG (Performance Package*)
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
“W”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of 168 mph (270 km/h).
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
“Y”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of 186 mph (300 km/h).
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of
155 mph (250 km/h).
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of
186 mph (300 km/h).
SL 600
SL 55 AMG
SL 65 AMG
SL 550 (Sport Package*)
SL 600 (Sport Package*)
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
“Y”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of 186 mph (300 km/h).
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of
155 mph (250 km/h).
266
Winter driving instructions
The most important rule for slippery or icy
roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid
abrupt acceleration, braking and steering
maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control
system under such conditions.
ter tires, see “All-season and winter tires”
(컄 page 306).
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding,
move gear selector lever to position N. Try
to keep the vehicle under control by corrective steering action.
For additional general information on tire speed
markings on tire sidewall, see “Tire speed rating”
(컄 page 304).
i For information on driving with snow chains,
see “Snow chains” (컄 page 318).
i For information on tire speed rating for win-
Warning!
G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of control loss.
Operation
Driving instructions
Road salts and chemicals can adversely affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal
force may become necessary to produce
the normal brake effect.
Depressing the brake pedal periodically
when traveling at length on salt-strewn
roads can bring road-salt-impaired braking
efficiency back to normal.
If the vehicle is parked after being driven
on salt-treated roads, the braking efficiency should be tested as soon as possible after driving is resumed.
Warning!
Warning!
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make
sure that snow is kept clear of the exhaust
pipe and from around the vehicle with the
engine running. Otherwise, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and
death.
To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation,
open a window slightly on the side of the vehicle not facing the wind.
G
Warning!
Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when carrying out these braking maneuvers.
G
G
Standing water
! Do not drive through flooded areas or water
of unknown depth. Before driving through water,
determine its depth. Never accelerate before
driving into water. The bow wave could force water into the engine and auxiliary equipment, thus
damaging them.
If you must drive through standing water, drive
slowly to prevent water from entering the passenger compartment or the engine compartment. Water in these areas could cause damage
to electrical components or wiring of the engine
or transmission, or could result in water being ingested by the engine through the air intake,
causing severe internal engine damage. Any
such damage is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an Ice-Warning Device
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice.
For more information, see “Winter driving”
(컄 page 316).
267
Operation
Driving instructions
Control and operation of radio transmitters
Passenger compartment
Warning!
G
Warning!
Warning!
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
to vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
G
Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle safely.
Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data System), radio or telephone1 if road, weather, and traffic
conditions permit.
The trunk is the preferred place to carry objects.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.
Driving abroad
268
G
COMAND, radio and telephone
Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible.
Abroad, there is an extensive
Mercedes-Benz service network at your
disposal. If you plan to drive into areas
which are not listed in the index of your
Mercedes-Benz Center directory, you
should request pertinent information from
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Telephones and two-way radios
1
Observe all legal requirements.
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury.
Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or a citizens band unit should only
be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on
the outside of the vehicle.
Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions regarding use of an external antenna.
Operation
Driving instructions
Catalytic converter
Warning!
Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with
monolithic-type catalytic converters, an
important element in conjunction with the
oxygen sensors to achieve substantial control of the pollutants in the exhaust emissions. Keep your vehicle in proper
operating condition by following our recommended maintenance instructions as
outlined in your Maintenance Booklet.
! To prevent damage to the catalytic converters, only use premium unleaded gasoline in this
vehicle.
Any noticeable irregularities in engine operation
should be repaired promptly. Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel may reach the catalytic converter causing it to overheat and potentially start
a fire.
G
As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or operate this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves
can come into contact with the hot exhaust
system, as these materials could be ignited
and cause a vehicle fire.
Emission control
Certain systems of the engine serve to
keep the toxic components of the exhaust
gases within permissible limits required by
law.
These systems, of course, will function
properly only when maintained strictly according to factory specifications. Any adjustments on the engine should therefore
be carried out only by qualified
Mercedes-Benz Center authorized technicians. Engine adjustments should not be
altered in any way. Moreover, the specified
service jobs must be carried out regularly
according to Mercedes-Benz servicing requirements. For details refer to the
Maintenance Booklet.
269
Operation
Driving instructions
Warning!
G
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and possible death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
have the cause determined and corrected
immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive only with at least one window fully open at all times.
270
Coolant temperature
Warning!
During severe operating conditions, e.g.
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to approx. 266°F
(130°C).
The engine should not be operated with
the coolant temperature over 248°F
(120°C). Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
G
앫
Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids, which
may have leaked into the engine compartment, to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
앫
Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns and can occur just
by opening the engine hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it. Turn off the engine, get
out of the vehicle and do not stand near
the vehicle until the engine has cooled
down.
Operation
At the gas station
왔 At the gas station
Refueling
Warning!
G
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.
It burns violently and can cause serious
injury. Whenever you are around gasoline,
avoid inhaling fumes and skin contact,
extinguish all smoking materials. Never
allow sparks, flame or smoking materials
near gasoline!
The fuel filler flap is located on the
right-hand side of the vehicle towards the
rear. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with
the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* automatically locks/unlocks the fuel filler flap.
왘
왘
Turn off the engine before refueling.
Turn off the engine
앫
by turning the SmartKey to
position 0. Remove the SmartKey
from the starter switch.
앫
by pressing the KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button. Open the driver’s door (with the driver’s door
open, starter switch is in position 0,
same as SmartKey removed from
starter switch).
Open fuel filler flap 1 by pushing at
the point indicated by the arrow.
The fuel filler flap springs open.
Warning!
G
Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pressure in the system which could cause a gas
discharge. This could cause the gas to spray
back out when removing the fuel pump nozzle, which could cause personal injury.
1 Fuel filler flap
2 Fuel filler cap
3 Holder
왘
Turn fuel cap 2 counterclockwise and
hold on to it until possible pressure is
released.
왘
Take off fuel cap 2 and place it into
holder 3 located on the inside of the
fuel filler flap.
왘
Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle
unit cuts out – do not top up or overfill.
컄컄
271
Operation
At the gas station
컄컄 왘
왘
Insert fuel cap 2 into fuel filler neck
and turn fuel cap clockwise until it audibly engages.
Close fuel filler flap 1.
You should hear the latch close shut.
Check regularly and before a long trip
For information on quantities and requirements of operating agents, see “Fuels,
coolants, lubricants, etc.” (컄 page 444).
왘
Brake fluid
minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91 (average of
96 RON/86 MON).
For information on brake fluid, see “Fuels,
coolants, lubricants, etc.” (컄 page 444).
Information on gasoline quality can normally be
found on the fuel pump.
! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake
For more information on gasoline, see “Premium
unleaded gasoline” (컄 page 447) or the Factory
Approved Service Pamphlet.
i Leaving the engine running and the fuel cap
For more information, see the “Practical hints”
section (컄 page 336).
272
For information on refilling the reservoir,
see “Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system” (컄 page 282).
Open the hood (컄 page 274).
i Only use premium unleaded gasoline with a
open can cause the engine malfunction indicator
lamp ú (USA only) or the engine malfunction
indicator lamp ± (Canada only) to illuminate.
Windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning system
1 Windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning system
2 Brake fluid
3 Coolant level
fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or
below, have the brake system checked for brake
pad thickness and leaks immediately. Notify an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
Do not add brake fluid as this will not solve the
problem. For more information, see the “Practical hints” section (컄 page 369).
Operation
At the gas station
Coolant level
For information on checking the coolant
level, see “Coolant” (컄 page 280).
Engine oil level
For more information on checking the engine oil level, see “Engine oil”
(컄 page 275).
Vehicle lighting
Check function and cleanliness. For more
information, see “Replacing bulbs”
(컄 page 397).
Exterior lamp switch, see “Switching on
headlamps” (컄 page 55).
Tire inflation pressure
For information on checking the tire inflation pressure, see “Checking tire inflation
pressure” (컄 page 292).
273
Operation
Engine compartment
Hood
Warning!
Warning!
G
Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise the hood could
be forced open by passing air flow.
This could cause the hood to come loose
and injure you and/or others.
You could be injured when the hood is open
– even when the engine is turned off.
Parts of the engine can become very hot. To
prevent burns, only touch owner serviceable
components described in the Operator's
Manual and comply with all relevant safety
precautions.
Opening
Warning!
Warning!
G
If you see flames or smoke coming from the
engine compartment, or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the engine is
overheated, do not open the hood. Move
away from the vehicle and do not open the
hood until the engine has cooled. If necessary, call the fire department.
G
G
Warning!
The engine is equipped with a transistorized
ignition system. Because of the high voltage
it is dangerous to touch any components (ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic
socket) of the ignition system
앫
with the engine running
앫
while starting the engine
앫
if ignition is “on” and the engine is
turned manually
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
moving parts when the hood is open and the
engine is running.
The radiator fan may continue to run for approximately 30 seconds or may even restart
after the engine has been turned off. Stay
clear of fan blades.
1 Hood release
274
G
Operation
Engine compartment
왘
Pull hood release 1.
Closing
The hood is unlocked.
! To avoid damage to the windshield wipers or
hood, never open the hood if the wiper arms are
folded forward away from the windshield.
Warning!
Engine oil
G
When closing the hood, use extreme caution
not to catch hand or fingers. Be careful that
you do not close the hood on anyone.
Make sure the hood is securely engaged before driving. Do not continue driving if the
hood can no longer engage after an accident
for example. The hood could otherwise
come loose while the vehicle is in motion
and injure you and/or others.
왘
2 Lever for opening the hood
왘
Push lever 2 on the hood upwards.
왘
Pull up on the hood and then release it.
The hood will be automatically held
open at shoulder height by gas-filled
struts.
Let the hood drop from a height of approximately 11/2 ft (50 cm).
The hood will lock audibly.
왘
The amount of oil your engine needs will
depend on a number of factors, including
driving style. Higher oil consumption can
occur when
앫
the vehicle is new
앫
the vehicle is driven frequently at
higher engine speeds
Engine oil consumption checks should only
be made after the vehicle break-in period.
i Do not use any special lubricant additives,
as these may damage the drive assemblies. Using special additives not approved by
Mercedes-Benz may cause damage not covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. More
information on this subject is available at any
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Check to make sure the hood is fully
closed.
If you can raise the hood at a point
above the headlamps, then it is not
properly closed. Open it again and let it
drop with somewhat greater force.
275
Operation
Engine compartment
Checking engine oil level with the
control system
왘
The standard display (컄 page 139)
should appear in the multifunction display.
When checking the oil level
앫
앫
앫
the vehicle must be parked on level
ground
with the engine at operating temperature, the vehicle must have been stationary for at least 5 minutes with the
engine turned off
with the engine not at operating temperature, the vehicle must have been
stationary for at least 30 minutes with
the engine turned off
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
왘
Press button k or j on the
steering wheel until the following
message appears in the multifunction
displays:
One of the following messages will
subsequently appear in the right multifunction display:
앫
Engine oil level
OK
앫
Add 1.0 qt.
to reach max.
oil level
(Canada: 1.0 l)
앫
Add 1.5 qts.
to reach max.
oil level
(Canada: 1.5 l)
앫
Add 2.0 qts.
to reach max.
oil level
(Canada: 2.0 l)
i If you want to interrupt the checking procedure, press the k or j button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
276
Operation
Engine compartment
왘
If necessary, add engine oil.
If you see the message:
For information on adding engine oil, see
(컄 page 278).
Observe
waiting time
For more information on engine oil, see the
“Technical data” section (컄 page 444) and
(컄 page 446).
왘
If the engine is at operating temperature, wait 5 minutes before repeating
the check procedure.
왘
If the engine is not at operating temperature yet, wait 30 minutes before repeating the check procedure.
Other display messages
If the SmartKey or the KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button is not in position 2, the
following message will appear:
Turn ignition on to
measure engine
oil level
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
If you see the message:
Engine oil level
Not when
engine on
왘
Turn off the engine.
왘
If the engine is at operating temperature, wait 5 minutes before checking
oil.
왘
If the engine is at operating temperature yet, you must wait 30 minutes before checking oil.
If there is excess engine oil with the engine
at normal operating temperature, the
following message will appear:
Engine oil level
Reduce
oil level
왘
Have excess oil siphoned or drained
off. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
! Excess oil must be siphoned or drained off.
It could cause damage to the engine and catalytic converter not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
For more information on messages in the
display concerning engine oil, see the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 375).
277
Operation
Engine compartment
Checking engine oil level with the oil
dipstick (SL 550 only)
i In vehicles without an oil dipstick, the engine
oil level is measured via the control
system (컄 page 276).
왘
Open the hood (컄 page 274).
Adding engine oil
왘
Pull out oil dipstick 1.
! Only use approved engine oils and oil filters
왘
Wipe oil dipstick 1 clean.
왘
Fully insert oil dipstick 1 into the dipstick guide tube.
왘
Pull out oil dipstick 1 again after approximately 3 seconds to obtain accurate reading.
required for vehicles with Maintenance System
(U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles). For a
listing of approved engine oils and oil filters, refer to the Factory Approved Service Products
pamphlet in your vehicle literature portfolio, or
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
When checking the oil level
앫
앫
the vehicle must be parked on level
ground
the vehicle must have been stationary
for at least 5 minutes with the engine
turned off
The oil level is correct when it is between lower mark 3 (min.) and upper
mark 2 (max.) of the oil dipstick.
i The filling quantity between the upper and
lower marks on the oil dipstick is approximately
2.1 US qt. (2.0 l).
왘
If necessary, add engine
oil (컄 page 278).
For more information on engine oil, see
“Technical data” section (컄 page 444) and
(컄 page 446).
1 Oil dipstick
2 Upper mark
3 Lower mark
278
For information on messages in the multifunction display concerning engine oil, see
the “Practical hints” section (컄 page 375).
Using engine oils and oil filters of specification
other than those expressly required for the Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada
vehicles), or changing of oil and oil filter at
change intervals longer than those called for by
the Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS
(Canada vehicles) will result in engine or emission control system damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Operation
Engine compartment
왘
Unscrew filler cap 1 from filler neck.
왘
Add engine oil as required. Be careful
not to overfill with oil.
Be careful not to spill any oil when adding.
Avoid environmental damage caused by oil
entering the ground or water.
Example illustration SL 550
! Excess oil must be siphoned or drained off.
It could cause damage to the engine and catalytic converter not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
1 Filler cap
왘
Screw filler cap 1 back on filler neck.
For more information on engine oil, see the
“Technical data” section (컄 page 444) and
(컄 page 446).
Transmission fluid level
The transmission fluid level does not need
to be checked. If you notice transmission
fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions,
have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
check the automatic transmission.
Oil level in the ABC system
The oil level in the ABC system does not
need to be checked. If there is visible oil
loss or if malfunction messages appear in
the display, have an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center check the ABC
system.
Example illustration SL 55 AMG
1 Filler cap
279
Operation
Engine compartment
Coolant
Warning!
G
앫
앫
앫
왘
Continue turning the cap counterclockwise and remove it.
The coolant level is correct if the level
앫
for cold coolant: is up to the upper
mark on the bracing rib of the coolant
expansion tank (translucent)
앫
for warm coolant: is approx. 0.6 in
(1.5 cm) higher
왘
Add coolant as required.
Do not remove pressure cap on coolant
reservoir if coolant temperature is
above 158°F (70°C). Allow engine to
cool down before removing cap. The
coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and
is under pressure.
왘
Replace and tighten cap.
Using a rag, slowly open the cap approximately 1/2 turn to relieve excess pressure. If opened immediately, scalding
hot fluid and steam will be blown out under pressure.
For more information, see “Coolants”
(컄 page 449).
In order to avoid any possibly serious burns:
앫
The engine coolant is a mixture of water
and anticorrosion/antifreeze. To check
the coolant level, the vehicle must be
parked on level ground and the engine
must be cool.
Use extreme caution when opening the
hood if there are any signs of steam or
coolant leaking from the cooling system,
or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the coolant is overheated.
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine
parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts.
280
The coolant expansion tank is located on
the passenger side of the engine compartment.
! SL 600 and SL 65 AMG: Only open the cap
on coolant expansion tank 1. Never open the
cap between the two charge-air coolers. Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.
1 Coolant expansion tank
왘
Using a rag, slowly turn the cap approximately one half turn counterclockwise
to release any excess pressure.
Operation
Engine compartment
Battery
G
Warning!
Your vehicle is equipped with two batteries:
앫
The starter battery (located in the engine compartment)
앫
The battery for electrical consumers
(located in the trunk)
Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries.
Risk of explosion.
Keep children away.
These batteries should always be sufficiently charged in order to achieve their
rated service life. Refer to Maintenance
Booklet for battery maintenance intervals.
Fire, open flames and smoking
are prohibited when handling
batteries. Avoid creating sparks.
If you use your vehicle mostly for
short-distance trips, you will need to have
the battery charge checked more frequently.
Battery acid is caustic. Do not
allow it to come into contact
with skin, eyes or clothing.
When replacing batteries, always use batteries approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Wear eye protection.
Rinse any acid spills immediately with clear water. Contact a
physician if necessary.
Wear suitable protective clothing, especially gloves, apron and
faceguard.
Follow the instructions in this
Operator’s Manual.
Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle
for an extended period of time, consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about
steps you need to observe.
281
Operation
Engine compartment
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system
The windshield washer reservoir is located
in the engine compartment.
During all seasons, add MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” to
water. Premix the windshield washer fluid
in a suitable container.
Warning!
G
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze
on hot engine parts, because it may ignite
and burn. You could be seriously burned.
왘
1 Washer fluid reservoir
Fluid for the windshield washer system and
the headlamp cleaning system is supplied
from the windshield washer reservoir. It
has a capacity of approx. 7.4 US qt. (7 l).
282
Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit”
and water (or commercially available
premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze, depending on ambient
temperatures).
Always use washer solvent/antifreeze
where temperatures may fall below
freezing point. Failure to do so could result in damage to the washer system/reservoir.
! Only use washer fluid which is suitable for
plastic lenses. Improper washer fluid can damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps.
For more information, see “Windshield and
headlamp washer system” (컄 page 452).
Operation
Tires and wheels
왔 Tires and wheels
See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for information on tested and
recommended rims and tires for summer
and winter operation. They can also offer
advice concerning tire service and
purchase.
Warning!
G
Replace rims or tires with the same designation, manufacturer and type as shown on the
original part. See an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for further information. If incorrectly sized rims and tires are
mounted:
앫
The wheel brakes or suspension
components can be damaged.
앫
The operating clearance of the wheels
and the tires may no longer be correct.
Warning!
G
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
sustained damage, replace them.
When replacing rims, only use genuine
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
particular rim type. Failure to do so can
result in the bolts loosening and possibly an
accident.
Retreaded tires are not tested or recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous
damage cannot always be recognized on retreads. The operating safety of the vehicle
cannot be assured when such tires are used.
Important guidelines
앫
Only use sets of tires and rims of the
same type and make.
앫
Tires must be of the correct size for the
rim.
앫
Break in new tires for approximately
60 miles (100 km) at moderate
speeds.
앫
Regularly check the tires and rims for
damage. Dented or bent rims can
cause tire inflation pressure loss and
damage to the tire beads.
앫
If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire
inflation pressure and correct as
required.
앫
Do not allow your tires to wear down
too far. Adhesion properties on wet
roads are sharply reduced at tread
depths under 1/8 in (3 mm).
앫
When replacing individual tires, you
should mount new tires on the front
wheels first (on vehicles with
same-sized wheels all around).
283
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire care and maintenance
Warning!
G
Regularly check the tires for damage. Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure
loss. As a result, you could lose control of
your vehicle.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
sustained damage, replace them.
Regularly check your tire inflation pressure
at least once a month. For more information on checking tire inflation pressure,
see “Recommended tire inflation pressure” (컄 page 291).
284
Tire inspection
Life of tire
Every time you check your tire inflation
pressure, you should also inspect your
tires for the following:
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including but not limited to:
앫
excessive treadwear (컄 page 285)
앫
cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber
앫
bumps, bulges, cuts, cracks or splits in
the tread or side of the tire
Replace the tire if you find any of the above
conditions.
Make sure you also inspect the spare tire
periodically for condition and inflation.
Spare tires will age and become worn over
time even if never used, and thus should be
inspected and replaced when necessary.
앫
Driving style
앫
Tire inflation pressure
앫
Distance driven
Warning!
G
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after
6 years, regardless of the remaining tread.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tread depth
Do not allow your tires to wear down too
far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are
sharply reduced at tread depths under
1
/8 in (3 mm).
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. These indicators are located in six
places on the tread circumference and
become visible at a tread depth of approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which point
the tire is considered worn and should be
replaced.
to wear down to that level. As tread depth
approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the adhesion
properties on a wet road are sharply reduced.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
widely.
Storing tires
! Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place
with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease and gasoline.
Cleaning tires
! Never use a round nozzle to power wash
tires. The intense jet of water can result in damage to the tire.
Always replace a damaged tire.
Recommended minimum tire tread depth:
앫
Summer tires 1/8 in (3 mm)
앫
Winter tires 1/6 in (4 mm)
Warning!
G
Although the applicable federal motor safety
laws consider a tire to be worn when the
treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible at
approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not allow your tires
1 TWI (Tread Wear Indicator)
The treadwear indicator appears as a solid
band across the tread.
285
Operation
Tires and wheels
Direction of rotation
Loading the vehicle
Unidirectional tires offer added advantages, such as better hydroplaning performance. To benefit, however, you must
make sure the tires rotate in the direction
specified.
A label on your vehicle shows how much
weight it may properly carry.
앫
An arrow on the sidewall indicates the
intended direction of rotation (spinning) of
the tire.
i Spare wheels may be mounted against the
direction of rotation (spinning) even with a unidirectional tire for temporary use only until the regular drive wheel has been repaired or replaced.
Always observe and follow applicable temporary
use restrictions and speed limitations indicated
on the spare wheel.
286
앫
The Tire and Loading Information
placard can be found on the driver’s
door B-pillar. This placard tells you important information about the number
of people that can be in the vehicle and
the total weight that can be carried in
the vehicle. It also contains information
on the proper size and recommended
tire inflation pressures for the original
equipment tires on your vehicle.
The Certification label, also found on
the driver’s door B-pillar tells you about
the gross weight capacity of your vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the
weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
fuel and cargo. The Certification label
also tells you about the front and rear
axle weight capacity, called the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The GAWR
is the total allowable weight that can be
carried by a single axle (front or rear).
Never exceed the GVWR or GAWR for
either the front axle or rear axle.
1 Driver’s door B-pillar
Following is a discussion on how to work
with the information contained on the
placard with regards to loading your vehicle.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Seating capacity
Tire and Loading Information
Warning!
The seating capacity gives you important
information on the number of occupants
that can be in the vehicle. Observe front
and rear seating capacity. The placard
showing the load limit information is located on the driver’s door B-pillar
(컄 page 286).
G
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit or vehicle capacity
weight as indicated on the placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or
brake failure.
Tire and Loading Information placard
i Data shown on placard example are for illustration purposes only. Load limit data are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown
in the illustration below. Refer to placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle.
i Data shown on placard example are for illus1 Load limit information on the Tire and
Loading Information placard
The placard showing the load limit information is located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
왘
tration purposes only. Seating data are specific
to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in
the illustration below. Refer to placard on vehicle
for actual data specific to your vehicle.
Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX
lbs.” on this placard.
The combined weight of all occupants,
cargo/luggage and trailer tongue load
(if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced in that statement.
1 Seating capacity information on the
Tire and Loading Information placard
287
Operation
Tires and wheels
Steps for determining correct load limit
Step 4
Step 6 (if applicable)
The following steps have been developed
as required of all manufacturers under Title
49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part
575 pursuant to the “National Traffic and
Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
왘
왘
Step 1
왘
Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on
your vehicle’s placard.
Step 2
왘
Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
Step 3
왘
Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.
288
The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lbs. passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
Step 5
왘
Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in step 4.
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle (컄 page 290).
The following table shows examples on
how to calculate total and cargo load
capacities with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants.
The following examples use a load limit
of 1500 lbs. This is for illustration
purposes only. Make sure you are using
the actual load limit for your vehicle stated
on the vehicle’s placard (컄 page 287).
Operation
Tires and wheels
Example Combined
weight limit
of occupants and
cargo from
placard
Number of Occupants weight
occupants
(driver and
passengers)
Combined
Available cargo/luggage and trailer
weight of all tongue weight (total load limit or
occupants
vehicle capacity weight from placard minus combined weight of all
occupants)
1
1500 lbs
1
Occupant 1: 175 lbs
175 lbs
1500 lbs - 175 lbs = 1325 lbs
2
1500 lbs
2
Occupant 1: 175 lbs
Occupant 2: 195 lbs
370 lbs
1500 lbs - 370 lbs = 1130 lbs
The higher the weight of all occupants, the
less cargo and luggage load capacity is
available.
For more information, see “Trailer tongue
load” (컄 page 290).
289
Operation
Tires and wheels
Certification label
Even after careful determination of the
combined weight of all occupants, cargo
and the trailer tongue load (if applicable)
(컄 page 290) as to not exceed the permissible load limit, you must make sure that
your vehicle never exceeds the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the
front or rear axle. You can obtain the
GVWR and GAWR from the Certification label. The Certification Label can be found
on the driver’s door B-pillar, see “Technical
data” (컄 page 430).
290
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The
total weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
all cargo, and the trailer tongue load
(컄 page 290) must never exceed the
GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The total allowable weight that can be carried by
a single axle (front or rear).
To assure that your vehicle does not exceed the maximum permissible weight
limits (GVWR and GAWR for front and rear
axle), have the loaded vehicle (including
driver, passengers and all cargo and, if applicable, trailer fully loaded) weighed on a
suitable commercial scale.
Trailer tongue load
The tongue load of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects
the load you can carry in your vehicle. If a
trailer is towed, the tongue load must be
added to the weight of all occupants riding
and any cargo you are carrying in the
vehicle. The tongue load typically is
10 percent of the trailer weight and everything loaded in it.
Your Mercedes-Benz has been designed
primarily to carry passengers and their
cargo. Mercedes-Benz does not recommend trailer towing with your vehicle.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Recommended tire inflation pressure
Warning!
G
Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel economy,
and are more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
Your vehicle is equipped with the Tire and
Loading Information placard located on
the driver’s door B-pillar (컄 page 286).
The tire inflation pressure should be
checked regularly and should only be adjusted on cold tires. The tires can be considered cold if the vehicle has been parked
for at least 3 hours or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km).
Follow recommended cold tire inflation
pressures listed on placard.
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best handling, tread life and
riding comfort.
In addition to the tire placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar, also consult the fuel
filler flap for any additional information
pertaining to special driving situations. For
more information, see “Important notes on
tire inflation pressure” (컄 page 292).
i Data shown on placard example are for illus-
1 Tire and Loading Information placard
with recommended cold tire inflation
pressures
The Tire and Loading Information placard
lists the recommended cold tire inflation
pressures for maximum loaded vehicle
weight. The tire inflation pressures listed
apply to the tires installed as original
equipment.
tration purposes only. Tire data are specific to
each vehicle and may vary from data shown in
the illustration below. Refer to placard on vehicle
for actual data specific to your vehicle.
291
Operation
Tires and wheels
Important notes on tire inflation
pressure
Warning!
G
If the tire inflation pressure repeatedly
drops:
앫
Check the tires for punctures from
foreign objects.
앫
Check to see whether air is leaking from
the valves or from around the rim.
Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure
are also increased while driving, depending
on the driving speed and the tire load.
If you will be driving your vehicle at high
speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher,
where it is legal and conditions allow,
consult the placard on the inside of the fuel
filler flap on how to adjust the cold tire inflation pressure. If you do not adjust the
tire inflation pressure, excessive heat can
build up and result in sudden tire failure.
292
Be sure to readjust the tire inflation
pressure for normal driving speeds. You
should wait until the tires are cold before
adjusting the tire inflation pressure.
Checking tire inflation pressure
Some vehicles may have supplemental tire
pressure information for vehicle loads less
than the maximum loaded vehicle condition. If such information is provided, it can
be found on the placard located on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
Check and adjust the tire inflation
pressure when the tires are cold. The tires
can be considered cold if the vehicle has
been parked for at least 3 hours or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Tire inflation pressure changes by approximately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18°F (10°C) of
air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire inflation pressure
where the temperature is different from
the outside temperature.
Regularly check your tire inflation pressure
at least once a month.
If you check the tire inflation pressure
when the tires are warm (the vehicle has
been driven for several miles or sitting less
than 3 hours), the reading will be
approximately 4 psi (0.3 bar) higher than
the cold reading. This is normal. Do not let
air out to match the specified cold tire inflation pressure. Otherwise, the tire will be
underinflated.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Warning!
G
Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel economy,
and are more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit or vehicle capacity
weight as indicated on the placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or
brake failure.
Checking tire inflation pressure
manually
Follow the steps below to achieve correct
tire inflation pressure:
왘
Remove the cap from the valve on one
tire.
왘
Firmly press a tire gauge onto the
valve.
왘
Read tire inflation pressure on tire
gauge and check against the recommended tire inflation pressure on the
placard on the driver’s door B-pillar
(컄 page 286). If necessary, add air to
achieve the recommended tire inflation
pressure.
Run Flat Indicator (Canada only)
While the vehicle is being driven, the Run
Flat Indicator monitors the set tire inflation
pressures by evaluating each wheel’s rotational speed. This allows the system to detect a significant loss of pressure in a tire.
If a wheel’s rotational speed changes due
to falling tire inflation pressure, you will
see a corresponding warning message in
the multifunction display.
The Run Flat Indicator may function in a restricted manner or with a delay
앫
if snow chains are mounted to the
vehicle
앫
in presence of ice and snow
i If you have overfilled the tire, release tire in-
앫
flation pressure by pushing the metal stem of the
valve with e.g. a tip of a pen. Then recheck the
tire inflation pressure with the tire gauge.
if you are driving on a loose surface
(e.g. sand or gravel)
앫
if you are driving in a very sporty manner (involving rapid acceleration or high
speeds in curves)
왘
Install the valve cap.
왘
Repeat this procedure for each tire.
293
Operation
Tires and wheels
Warning!
G
When the multifunction display shows the
message Tire pressure Check tires,
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. You should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper tire inflation pressure as
indicated on the vehicle’s tire information
placard. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability. Each tire, including the
spare, should be checked monthly when
cold and set to the recommended tire inflation pressure as specified on the Tire And
Loading Information placard (컄 page 287)
or on the tire inflation pressure label
(컄 page 291).
Warning!
G
The Run Flat Indicator does not provide a
warning for wrongly selected tire inflation
pressures. Always adjust tire inflation pressure according to the placard on the driver’s
door B-pillar or fuel filler flap.
The Run Flat Indicator does not replace regular checks of the tire inflation pressures
since a gradual pressure loss in all four tires
cannot be detected by the Run Flat
Indicator.
The Run Flat Indicator is not able to issue a
warning due to a sudden dramatic loss of
tire inflation pressure (e.g. tire blowout
caused by a foreign object). In this case
bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully applying the brakes and avoiding abrupt steering
maneuvers.
Reactivating the Run Flat Indicator
The tire inflation pressure monitor must be
reactivated in the following situations:
앫
if you have changed the tire inflation
pressure
앫
if you have replaced the wheels or tires
앫
if you have installed new wheels or
tires
왘
Using the tire placard on the driver’s
door B-pillar or, if available, the inside
of the fuel filler flap, make sure the tire
inflation pressure of all four tires is correct.
Warning!
G
The Run Flat Indicator can only warn you in
a reliable manner if you have set the correct
tire inflation pressures for each tire.
If an incorrect tire inflation pressure was
set, the system will monitor the pressure according to the incorrect value.
294
Operation
Tires and wheels
왘
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
If you wish to confirm activation:
Make sure the standard display menu
appears in the multifunction display
(컄 page 145).
왘
Press button k or j repeatedly
until the following message appears in
the multifunction display:
Run Flat Indicator
active
Menu: R-Button
왘
Press the reset button (컄 page 27).
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display:
Restart
Run Flat Indicator?
Press button æ.
Checking tire pressure electronically
with the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS), (USA only)
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display:
i The Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Run Flat Indicator
restarted
After a certain “learning phase”, the Run
Flat Indicator checks the set pressure values for all four tires.
If you wish to cancel activation:
왘
(TPMS) is equipped with a combination low tire
pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale in the instrument cluster (컄 page 29). Depending on
how the telltale illuminates, it indicates a low tire
pressure condition or a malfunction in the TPMS
system itself:
앫
If the telltale illuminates continuously, one
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. There is no malfunction in the TPMS.
앫
If the telltale flashes for 60 seconds and
then stays illuminated, the TPMS system itself is not operating properly.
Press button ç.
295
Operation
Tires and wheels
The TPMS only functions on wheels that
are equipped with the proper electronic
sensors. It monitors the tire inflation pressure, as selected by the driver, in all four
tires. A warning is issued to alert you to a
decrease in pressure in one or more of the
tires.
Warning!
G
The TPMS does not indicate a warning for
wrongly selected inflation pressures. Always
adjust tire inflation pressure according to
the placard on the driver’s door B-pillar or, if
available, the supplemental tire pressure information on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
The TPMS is not able to issue a warning due
to a sudden dramatic loss of pressure (e.g.
tire blowout caused by a foreign object). In
this case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully applying the brakes and avoiding
abrupt steering maneuvers.
296
Warning!
G
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or the tire inflation pressure
label. If your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or the tire inflation pressure label,
you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Please
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the
telltale will flash for approximately
one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long
as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended.
Operation
Tires and wheels
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of incompatible replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing
one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle
to ensure that the replacement or alternate
tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue
to function properly.
i If a condition causing the TPMS to malfunction develops, it may take up to 10 minutes for
the system to signal a malfunction using the
TPMS telltale flashing and illumination sequence.
The telltale extinguishes after a few minutes driving if the malfunction has been corrected.
i Operating radio transmission equipment
(e.g. wireless headsets, two-way radios) in or
near the vehicle could cause the TPMS to malfunction.
Reactivating the TPMS
Warning!
i Reactivate the TPMS after adjusting the tire
G
It is the driver’s responsibility to calibrate
the TPMS on the recommended cold inflation pressure. Underinflated tires affect the
ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
might loose control over the vehicle.
The TPMS must be reactivated when you
have adjusted the tire inflation pressure to
a new level (e.g. because of different load
or driving conditions). The TPMS is then
recalibrated to the current tire inflation
pressures.
왘
Using the tire placard on the driver’s
door B-pillar (컄 page 286) or, if available, the supplemental tire pressure
information on the inside of the fuel filler flap (컄 page 271), make sure the tire
inflation pressure of all four tires is correct.
inflation pressure to the inflation pressure recommended for the vehicle operating condition.
Tire pressure should only be adjusted on cold
tires. Observe the recommended tire inflation
pressure on the placard on the driver’s door
B-pillar (컄 page 286). Some vehicles may have
supplemental tire pressure information for driving at high speeds (컄 page 292) or for vehicle
loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition (컄 page 292). If such information is provided, it can be found on the inside of the fuel
filler flap.
왘
Press button è or ÿ on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly
until the standard display menu appears in the multifunction display
(컄 page 145).
왘
Press the j or k button repeatedly until you see the following message:
Tire pressure monitor
active
Menu: R-button
컄컄
297
Operation
Tires and wheels
컄컄 왘
Press the reset button (컄 page 27).
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display:
Restart tire
pressure monitor?
왘
Press the æ button.
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display:
Tire pressure monitor restarted
After driving a few minutes the system
verifies that the current tire inflation
pressures are within the system’s
specified range. Afterwards the current
tire inflation pressures are accepted as
reference pressures and then monitored.
If you wish to cancel activation:
왘
Press the ç button.
298
Checking tire pressure electronically
with the Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring System (Advanced TPMS)*,
(Canada only)
The TPMS only functions on wheels that
are equipped with the proper electronic
sensors. It monitors the tire inflation pressure, as selected by the driver, in all four
tires. A warning is issued to alert you to a
decrease in pressure in one or more of the
tires.
Tire pressure inquiries are made using the
multifunction display. The present inflation
pressures are displayed only after a few
minutes’ travel time.
i Possible differences between the readings
of a tire pressure gauge of an air hose, e.g. gas
station equipment, and the vehicle’s control
system can occur. Usually the readings issued by
the control system are more precise.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
왘
Press the j or k button until
the current inflation pressures for each
tire appear in the multifunction display.
i When the message Tire pressure
displayed after driving for a few
minutes appears in the multifunction display,
the individual inflation pressure values are
matched with the tires. The individual values are
displayed after a few minutes driving.
Warning!
G
It is the driver’s responsibility to calibrate
the TPMS on the recommended cold inflation pressure. Underinflated tires affect the
ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
might lose control over the vehicle.
Operation
Tires and wheels
i With a spare wheel mounted, the system
may still indicate the tire inflation pressure of the
removed road wheel for some minutes. If this
happens, keep in mind that the indicated value
where the spare wheel is mounted does not reflect the actual spare tire inflation pressure.
Warning!
G
The TPMS does not indicate a warning for
wrongly selected inflation pressures. Always
adjust tire inflation pressure according to
the placard on the driver’s door B-pillar or, if
available, the supplemental tire pressure information on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
The TPMS is not able to issue a warning due
to a sudden dramatic loss of pressure (e.g.
tire blowout caused by a foreign object). In
this case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully applying the brakes and avoiding
abrupt steering maneuvers.
Warning!
G
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or the tire inflation pressure
label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or the tire inflation pressure label,
you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires).
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your
tires are significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may effect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Please
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
i Operating radio transmission equipment
(e.g. wireless headsets, two-way radios) in or
near the vehicle could cause the TPMS to malfunction.
299
Operation
Tires and wheels
Reactivating Advanced TPMS*
i Reactivate the TPMS after adjusting the tire
The TPMS must be reactivated when you
have adjusted the tire inflation pressure to
a new level (e.g. because of different load
or driving conditions). The TPMS is then
recalibrated to the current tire inflation
pressures.
inflation pressure to the inflation pressure recommended for the vehicle operating condition.
Tire pressure should only be adjusted on cold
tires. Observe the recommended tire inflation
pressure on the placard on the driver’s door
B-pillar (컄 page 286). Some vehicles may have
supplemental tire pressure information for driving at high speeds (컄 page 292) or for vehicle
loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition (컄 page 292). If such information is provided, it can be found on the inside of the fuel
filler flap.
Warning!
G
It is the driver’s responsibility to calibrate
the TPMS on the recommended cold inflation pressure. Underinflated tires affect the
ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
might lose control over the vehicle.
왘
Using the tire placard on the driver’s
door B-pillar (컄 page 286) or, if available, the supplemental tire pressure
information on the inside of the fuel
filler flap (컄 page 292), make sure the
tire inflation pressure of all four tires is
correct.
300
왘
왘
Press button è or ÿ on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly
until the standard display menu
appears in the multifunction display
(컄 page 139).
Press the j or k button repeatedly until you see the current inflation
pressures for each tire appear in the
display or the following message appears in the display
Tire pressure
displayed after
driving for
a few minutes
왘
Press the reset button (컄 page 27).
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display:
Restart tire
pressure monitor?
왘
Press the æ button.
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display:
Tire pressure monitor restarted
After a few minutes driving, the current
tire inflation pressure values are accepted as reference values and then
monitored.
If you wish to cancel activation:
왘
Press the ç button.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Potential problems associated with
underinflated and overinflated tires
Overinflated tire inflation pressure
Underinflated tire inflation pressure
앫
adversely affect handling
characteristics
앫
cause uneven tire wear
앫
be more prone to damage from road
hazards
앫
adversely affect ride comfort
앫
increase stopping distance
Overinflated tires can:
Underinflated tires can:
앫
cause excessive and uneven tire wear
앫
adversely affect fuel economy
앫
lead to tire failure from being
overheated
앫
adversely affect handling
characteristics
Warning!
Warning!
G
Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel economy,
and are more likely to fail from being
overheated.
MOExtended system*
The MOExtended system allows you to
continue driving your vehicle even if there
is a total loss of pressure in one or more
tires.
G
You may only use the MOExtended system
in conjunction with the Run Flat Indicator*
(Canada vehicles) (컄 page 293) or TPMS
(U.S. vehicles) (컄 page 295).
For information on driving in case of pressure loss in one or more tires (emergency
mode), see the “Operation” section
(컄 page 413).
Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
301
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire labeling
Besides tire name (sales designation) and
manufacturer name, a number of markings
can be found on a tire.
Following are some explanations for the
markings on your vehicle’s tires:
1 Uniform Quality Grading Standards
(컄 page 309)
2 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
(컄 page 307)
3 Maximum tire load (컄 page 308)
4 Maximum tire inflation pressure
(컄 page 309)
5 Manufacturer
6 Tire ply material (컄 page 311)
7 Tire size designation, load and speed
rating (컄 page 302)
8 Load identification (컄 page 306)
9 Tire name
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
For more information, see “Rims and tires”
(컄 page 435).
Tire size designation, load and speed
rating
1 Tire width
2 Aspect ratio in %
3 Radial tire code
4 Rim diameter
5 Tire load rating
6 Tire speed rating
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
302
Operation
Tires and wheels
General:
Tire width
Rim diameter
Depending on the design standards used,
the tire size molded into the sidewall may
have no letter or a letter preceding the tire
size designation.
The tire width 1 (컄 page 302) indicates
the nominal tire width in mm.
The rim diameter 4 (컄 page 302) is the
diameter of the bead seat, not the
diameter of the rim edge. Rim diameter is
indicated in inches (in).
No letter preceding the size designation
(as illustrated above): Passenger car tire
based on European design standards.
The aspect ratio 2 (컄 page 302) is the
dimensional relationship between tire
section height and section width and is
expressed in percentage. The aspect ratio
is arrived at by dividing section height by
section width.
Letter “P” preceding the size designation:
Passenger car tire based on U.S. design
standards.
Letter “LT” preceding the size designation:
Light Truck tire based on U.S. design
standards.
Letter “T” preceding the size designation:
Temporary spare tires which are high
pressure compact spares designed for
temporary emergency use only.
Aspect ratio
Tire code
The tire code 3 (컄 page 302) indicates
the tire construction type. The “R” stands
for radial tire type. Letter “D” means diagonal or bias ply construction; letter “B”
means belted-bias ply construction.
Tire load rating
The tire load rating 5 (컄 page 302) is a
numerical code associated with the
maximum load a tire can support.
For example, a load rating of 91 corresponds to a maximum load of 1356 lbs
(615 kg) the tire is designed to support.
See also “Maximum tire load”
(컄 page 308) where the maximum load associated with the load index is indicated in
kilograms and lbs.
At the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire
with a speed capability above 149 mph
(240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size
designation (for example: 245/40 ZR 18).
For additional information, see “Tire speed
rating” (컄 page 304).
303
Operation
Tires and wheels
Warning!
G
The tire load rating must always be at least
half of the GAWR (컄 page 312) of your vehicle. Otherwise, tire failure may be the result
which may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury to you or others.
Always replace rims and tires with the same
designation, manufacturer and type as
shown on the original part.
Warning!
G
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit or vehicle capacity
weight as indicated on the placard located
on the driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the
tires can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or
brake failure.
304
For additional information on tire load
rating, see “Load identification”
(컄 page 306).
i Tire load rating 5 (컄 page 302) and tire
speed rating 6 (컄 page 302) are also referred
to as “service description”.
Tire speed rating
The tire speed rating 6 (컄 page 302)
indicates the approved maximum speed
for the tire.
Warning!
G
Even when permitted by law, never operate
a vehicle at speeds greater than the
maximum speed rating of the tires.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire
failure, causing loss of vehicle control and
possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury and possible death, for you
and for others.
i Tire load rating 5 (컄 page 302) and tire
speed rating 6 (컄 page 302) are also referred
to as “service description”.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Summer tires
Index
Speed rating
Q
up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
R
up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
S
up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
T
up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H
up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V
up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
W
up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y
up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
(Y)
above 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR
above 149 mph (240 km/h)
앫
At the tire manufacturer’s option, any
tire with a speed capability above
149 mph (240 km/h) can include a
“ZR” in the size designation (for example: 245/40 ZR18). To determine the
maximum speed capability of the tire,
the service description for the tire must
be referred to. The service description
is comprised of the tire load rating 5
(컄 page 302) and the tire speed
rating 6 (컄 page 302).
If your tire includes “ZR” in the size
designation and no service
description 5 and 6 (컄 page 302) is
given, the tire manufacturer must be
consulted for the maximum speed capability.
If a service description 5 and 6
(컄 page 302) is given, the speed capability is limited by the speed symbol in
the service description.
Example: 245/40 ZR18 97Y.
In this example, “97Y” is the service
description. The letter “Y” designates
the speed rating and the speed capability of the tire is limited to 186 mph
(300 km/h).
앫
Any tire with a speed capability above
186 mph (300 km/h) must include a
“ZR” in the size designation AND the
service description must be placed in
parenthesis. Example: 275/40 ZR 18
(99Y). The “(Y)” speed rating in parenthesis designates the maximum speed
capability of the tire as being above
186 mph (300 km/h). Consult the tire
manufacturer for the actual maximum
permissible speed of the tire.
305
Operation
Tires and wheels
All-season and winter tires
Index
Speed rating
1
up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
M+S1
up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H M+S
1
up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V M+S
1
up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
Q M+S
T
1
Load identification
No specification given: absence of any text
(like in above example) indicates a
standard load (SL) tire.
XL or Extra Load: designates an extra load
(or reinforced) tire.
or M+S.for winter tires
Light Load: designates a light load tire.
i Not all M+S rated tires provide special winter performance. Make sure the tires you use
show M+S and the mountain/snowflake symbol.marking on the tire sidewall. These tires
meet specific snow traction performance requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of
Canada (RAC) and have been designed specifically for use in snow conditions.
306
In addition to tire load rating, special load
information may be molded into the tire
sidewall following the letter designating
the tire speed rating 1 (컄 page 306).
1 Load identification
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
C, D, E: designates load range associated
with the maximum load a tire can carry at
a specified pressure.
Operation
Tires and wheels
DOT (Department of Transportation)
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
A tire branding symbol 1 (컄 page 307)
which denotes the tire meets requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation.
U.S. tire regulations require each new tire
manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a
TIN into or onto a sidewall of each tire
produced.
The TIN is a unique identifier which facilitates efforts by tire manufactures to notify
purchasers in recall situations or other
safety matters concerning tires and gives
purchasers the means to easily identify
such tires.
The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s
identification mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type
code” and “Date of manufacture”.
Manufacturer’s identification mark
1 DOT
2 Manufacturer’s identification mark
3 Tire size
4 Tire type code (at the option of the tire
manufacturer)
5 Date of manufacture
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
The manufacturer’s identification mark 2
(컄 page 307) denotes the tire
manufacturer.
New tires have a mark with two symbols.
Retreaded tires have a mark with four symbols. For more information on retreaded
tires, see (컄 page 283).
Tire size
The code 3 (컄 page 307) indicates the
tire size.
307
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire type code
Maximum tire load
Warning!
The code 4 (컄 page 307) may, at the
option of the manufacturer, be used as a
descriptive code for identifying significant
characteristics of the tire.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit or vehicle capacity
weight as indicated on the placard located
on the driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the
tires can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or
brake failure.
Date of manufacture
The date of manufacture 5 (컄 page 307)
identifies the week and year of manufacture.
The first two figures identify the week,
starting with “01” to represent the first full
week of the calendar year. The second two
figures represent the year.
For example, “3202” represents the 32nd
week of 2002.
308
G
1 Maximum tire load rating
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
The maximum tire load is the maximum
weight the tires are designed to support.
For more information on tire load rating
(컄 page 303).
For information on calculating total and
cargo load capacities (컄 page 288).
Operation
Tires and wheels
Maximum tire inflation pressure
Always follow the recommended tire
inflation pressure (컄 page 291) for proper
tire inflation.
Warning!
G
Never exceed the max. tire inflation
pressure. Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
1 Maximum permissible tire inflation
pressure
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
This is the maximum permissible tire
inflation pressure for the tire.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
(U.S. vehicles)
Tire manufacturers are required to grade
tires based on three performance
factors: treadwear, traction and
temperature resistance.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are
more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.
1 Treadwear
2 Traction
3 Temperature resistance
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
309
Operation
Tires and wheels
Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear Traction Temperature
200
AA
A
All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
310
Treadwear
Traction
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly
from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning!
G
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
Warning!
G
Tire ply material
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
excessive heat build-up and possible tire
failure.
1 Plies in sidewall
2 Plies under tread
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
This marking tells you about the type of
cord and number of plies in the sidewall
and under the tread.
311
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire and loading terminology
Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those
standard items which may be replaced) of
automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power
seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that
these items are available as
factory-installed equipment (whether
installed or not).
Bar
DOT (Department of Transportation)
Another metric unit for air pressure. There
are 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi)
to 1 bar; there are 100 kilopascals (kPa)
to 1 bar.
A tire branding symbol which denotes the
tire meets requirements of the
U.S. Department of Transportation.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
Bead
The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the
rim.
Cold tire inflation pressure
Air pressure
The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire.
Air pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi), or kilopascal (kPa) or
bars.
Aspect ratio
Dimensional relationship between tire
section height and section width
expressed in percentage.
312
Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle
has been sitting for at least 3 hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum
capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so
equipped, air conditioning and additional
optional equipment, but without passengers and cargo.
The GAWR is the maximum permissible
axle weight. The gross vehicle weight on
each axle must never exceed the GAWR for
the front and rear axle indicated on the
certification label located on the driver’s
door B-pillar.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
The GVW comprises the weight of the
vehicle including fuel, tools, spare wheel,
installed accessories, passengers and
cargo and, if applicable, trailer tongue
load. The GVW must never exceed the
GVWR indicated on the certification label
located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
Operation
Tires and wheels
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
Maximum tire inflation pressure
PSI (Pounds per square inch)
This is the maximum permissible vehicle
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (weight of
the vehicle including all options, passengers, fuel, and cargo and, if applicable,
trailer tongue load). It is indicated on
certification label located on the driver’s
door B-pillar.
This number is the greatest amount of air
pressure that should ever be put in the tire
under normal driving conditions.
A standard unit of measure for air pressure
-> bar, kilopascal (kPa).
Kilopascal (kPa)
The metric unit for air pressure. There are
6.9 kPa to 1 psi; another metric unit for air
pressure is bars. There are 100 kilopascals
(kPa) to 1 bar.
Maximum load rating
The maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire.
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The sum of curb weight, accessory weight,
vehicle capacity weight and production
options weight.
Recommended tire inflation pressure
Normal occupant weight
The number of occupants the vehicle is
designed to seat, multiplied by
68 kilograms (150 lbs).
Recommended tire inflation pressure
listed on placard located on driver’s door
B-pillar for normal driving conditions.
Provides best handling, tread life and
riding comfort.
Occupant distribution
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle
at their designated seating positions.
Production options weight
The combined weight of those installed
regular production options weighing over
5 lbs (2.3 kilograms) in excess of those
standard items which they replace, not
previously considered in curb weight or
accessory weight, including heavy duty
brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
battery, and special trim.
Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire beads are
seated.
Sidewall
The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
313
Operation
Tires and wheels
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
Tire speed rating
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
Unique identifier which facilitates efforts
by tire manufacturers to notify purchasers
in recall situations or other safety matters
concerning tires and gives purchases the
means to easily identify such tires. The TIN
is comprised of “Manufacturer’s identification mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code”
and “Date of manufacture”.
Part of tire designation; indicates the
speed range for which a tire is approved.
A tire information system that provides
consumers with ratings for a tire’s traction,
temperature and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The
ratings are molded into the sidewall of the
tire.
Tire load rating
The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Numerical code associated with the
maximum load a tire can support.
Tire ply composition and material used
This indicates the number of plies or the
number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials
in the tire and sidewall, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
314
Traction
Force exerted by the vehicle on the road
via the tires. The amount of grip provided.
Tread
Treadwear indicators
Narrow bands, sometimes called
“wear bars” that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 in (1.6 mm) of tread
remains.
Vehicle capacity weight
Rated cargo and luggage load plus
68 kilograms (150 lbs) times the vehicle’s
designated seating capacity.
Vehicle maximum load on the tire
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each axle its
share of the maximum loaded vehicle
weight and dividing it by two.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Rotating tires
Warning!
G
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tires
are of the same dimension.
If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size
tires (different tire dimensions front vs.
rear), tire rotation is not possible.
Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles
with tires of the same dimension all
around. If your vehicle is equipped with
tires of the same dimension all around,
tires can be rotated, observing a
front-to-rear rotation pattern that will
maintain the intended rotation (spinning)
direction of the tire (컄 page 286).
In some cases, such as when your vehicle
is equipped with mixed-size tires (different
tire dimension front vs. rear), tire rotation
is not possible.
If applicable to your vehicle’s tire configuration, tires can be rotated according to
the tire manufacturer’s recommended intervals in the tire manufacturer’s warranty
pamphlet located in your vehicle literature
portfolio. If none is available, tires should
be rotated every 3000 to 6000 miles
(5000 to 10000 km), or sooner if necessary, according to the degree of tire wear.
The same rotation (spinning) direction
must be maintained (컄 page 286).
Rotate tires before the characteristic tire
wear pattern becomes visible (shoulder
wear on front tires and tread center wear
on rear tires).
Warning!
G
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. Wheels could become
loose if not tightened with a torque of
96 lb-ft (130 Nm).
Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel
bolts specified for your vehicle’s rims.
For information on wheel change, see the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 388) and
(컄 page 405).
Thoroughly clean the mounting face of
wheels and brake disks, i.e. the inner side
of the wheels/tires, during each rotation.
Check for and ensure proper tire inflation
pressure.
315
Operation
Winter driving
Before the onset of winter, have your vehicle winterized at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. This service includes:
앫
Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze
concentration.
앫
Addition of cleaning concentrate to the
water of the windshield and headlamp
cleaning system. Add MB Concentrate
“S” to a pre-mixed windshield washer
solvent/antifreeze which is formulated
for temperatures below freezing point
(컄 page 451).
앫
앫
Battery test. Battery capacity drops
with decreasing ambient temperature.
A well charged battery helps to ensure
that the engine can be started and the
electro-hydraulic brake system will be
fully operational even at low ambient
temperatures.
Tire change.
! When scraping ice or snow from the rear
window, be careful not to damage the sealing
strip or apertures along the side of the window.
Winter tires
Always use winter tires at temperatures
below 45°F (7°C) and whenever wintry
road conditions prevail. Not all M+S rated
tires provide special winter performance.
Make sure the tires you use show M+S and
the mountain/snowflake symbol.marking on the tire sidewall.
These tires meet specific snow traction
performance requirements of the Rubber
Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the
Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) and
have been designed specifically for use in
snow conditions. Use of winter tires is the
only way to achieve the maximum effectiveness of the ABS and ESP® in winter operation.
For safe handling, make sure all winter
tires mounted are of the same make and
have the same tread design.
316
Operation
Winter driving
Warning!
G
Winter tires with a tread depth of less than
1/ in (4 mm) must be replaced. They are no
6
longer suitable for winter operation.
Always observe the speed rating of the
winter tires installed on your vehicle. If the
maximum speed for which your tires are
rated is below the speed rating of your vehicle, you must place a notice to this effect
where it will be seen by the driver. Such notices are available at your tire dealer or any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!
G
If you use your spare tire when winter tires
are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that
the difference in tire characteristics may
very well impair turning stability and that
overall driving stability may be reduced.
Adapt your driving style accordingly.
Block heater (Canada only)
The engine is equipped with a block heater.
The electrical cable may be installed at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i Block heater not available for SL 55 AMG
and SL 65 AMG.
Have the spare tire replaced with a winter
tire at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
317
Operation
Winter driving
Snow chains
! When driving with snow chains, always select setting 1 of the level control system
(컄 page 225). Other settings may result in damage to your vehicle.
! Some tire sizes do not leave adequate clearance for snow chains. To help avoid serious damage to your vehicle or tires, use of snow chains is
not permissible with
앫
285/35 R18 97W
앫
285/35 R18 97Y
앫
285/35 ZR18 97Y
앫
285/30 ZR19 98Y XL (Extra Load)
Snow chains should only be driven on
snow-covered roads at speeds not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains
as soon as possible when driving on roads
without snow.
Please observe the following guidelines
when using snow chains:
앫
앫
Use of snow chains is not permissible
with all wheel/tire combinations
(컄 page 435).
Use snow chains in pairs and on rear
wheels only. Follow the manufacturer’s
mounting instructions.
! If snow chains are mounted to the front
wheels, they may scrape against the body or axle
components. The tires or the vehicle could be
damaged as a result.
앫
318
Only use snow chains that are approved by Mercedes-Benz. Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
glad to advise you on this subject.
앫
Use of snow chains may be prohibited
depending on location. Always check
local and state laws before installing
snow chains.
앫
Do not use snow chains on the spare
wheel (컄 page 440).
앫
Do not use snow chains on wheels with
MOExtended tires* (컄 page 439).
i When driving with snow chains, you may
wish to deactivate the ESP® (컄 page 91) before
setting the vehicle in motion. This will improve
the vehicle’s traction.
Operation
Maintenance
왔 Maintenance
We strongly recommend that you have
your vehicle serviced by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, in accordance with
the Maintenance Booklet at the times
called for by the maintenance service indicator.
Maintenance service indicator
message
Failure to have the vehicle maintained in
accordance with the Maintenance Booklet
and the maintenance service indicator at
the designated times/mileage may result
in vehicle damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Starting approximately 1 month before
your next maintenance service is due, one
of the following messages will appear in
the right multifunction display while you
are driving or when you switch on the ignition (example service A):
The maintenance service indicator message will notify you when your next maintenance service is due.
Service A in XXXXX miles (km)
Service A in XXX days
Service A Due now
The type of maintenance service due is indicated in the left multifunction display:
i Vehicles equipped with Maintenance
System (U.S. vehicles) only:
The Maintenance System tracks distance driven
and the time elapsed since the last maintenance
service, calculates other maintenance service
work required, and calls for the next maintenance service accordingly.
i Vehicles equipped with FSS (Flexible Service System) only (Canada vehicles):
The interval between maintenance services depends on your driving habits. A gentle driving
style, moderate engine speeds and the avoidance of short-distance trips will lengthen the interval between services.
Clearing the maintenance service indicator message
9
Basic service (A)
The maintenance service indicator message is automatically cleared after approximately 30 seconds
½
Extended service (B)
앫
after you have switched on the ignition
앫
after you have reached the maintenance service threshold while driving
You can also clear the maintenance service indicator message yourself.
319
Operation
Maintenance
Maintenance service term exceeded
If you have exceeded the suggested maintenance service term, you will see the following message in the right multifunction
display:
1 Reset button
왘
Press reset button 1 on the instrument cluster.
The maintenance service indicator
message is cleared and the standard
display appears in the multifunction
display (컄 page 145).
320
Calling up the maintenance service
indicator display
i The menu overview can be found on
(컄 page 142).
Service A exceeded by XXXX miles (km)
Service A exceeded by XXX days
You can call up the maintenance service indicator display at any time to check when
the next maintenance service is due.
In addition, a signal sounds when the message appears.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
왘
Press button è or ÿ on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly
until the standard display appears in
the multifunction display (컄 page 145).
왘
Press button k or j on the
multifunction steering wheel until the
maintenance service indicator display
with the maintenance service symbol
9 or ½ appears in the left multifunction display and the maintenance
service deadline appears in the right
multifunction display.
Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
reset the maintenance service indicator
following a completed maintenance service.
Operation
Maintenance
i If the battery supplying the vehicle’s electrical consumers is disconnected, the days of disconnection will not be included in the count
shown by the maintenance service indicator. To
arrive at the true maintenance service deadline,
you will need to subtract these days from the
days shown in the maintenance service indicator
message or maintenance service indicator display.
Do not confuse the maintenance service indicator with the engine oil level indicator N.
Resetting the maintenance service
indicator
In the event that the maintenance service
on your vehicle is not carried out by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, you can
have the maintenance service indicator
reset. The automotive maintenance facility
carrying out the maintenance service will
find the information for resetting the
maintenance service indicator in the maintenance-relevant information for your vehicle. Such information is available either
from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or directly from Mercedes-Benz.
! If the maintenance service indicator was inadvertently reset, have an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center correct it.
Only reset if the proper maintenance service has
been performed. Resetting the system without
performing proper maintenance service as
called for by the maintenance service indicator
will result in engine damage and/or other vehicle
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
321
Operation
Vehicle care
Cleaning and care of the vehicle
Regular and proper care will help to maintain the value of your vehicle. The best way
to protect your vehicle from harmful environmental influences is to wash it and use
protective treatments regularly.
Warning!
G
Many cleaning products can be hazardous.
Some are poisonous, others are flammable.
Always follow the instructions on the particular container. Always open your vehicle’s
doors or windows when cleaning the inside.
Never use fluids or solvents that are not designed for cleaning your vehicle.
Always lock away cleaning products and
keep them out of reach of children.
While in operation, even while parked, your
vehicle is subjected to varying external
influences which, if gone unchecked, can
attack the paintwork as well as the vehicle
underbody and cause lasting damage.
322
Such damage is caused not only by
extreme and varying climatic conditions,
but also by:
More frequent washings are necessary to
deal with unfavorable conditions:
앫
near the ocean
앫
in industrial areas (smoke, exhaust
emissions)
Tar
앫
during winter operation
Gravel and stone chipping
You should check your vehicle from time to
time for stone chipping or other damage.
Any damage should be repaired as soon as
possible to prevent corrosion.
앫
Air pollution
앫
Road salt
앫
앫
To avoid paint damage, you should immediately remove:
앫
Grease and oil
앫
Fuel
앫
Coolant
앫
Brake fluid
앫
Bird droppings
앫
Insects
앫
Tree resins, etc.
Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminates the aggressiveness and potency of
the above adverse influences.
In doing so, do not neglect the underbody
of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thorough check is a washing of the underbody
followed by a thorough inspection. Damaged areas need to be re-undercoated.
Your vehicle has been treated at the
factory with a wax-base rustproofing in the
body cavities which will last for the lifetime
of the vehicle. Post-production treatment
is neither necessary nor recommended by
Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility
of incompatibility between materials used
in the production process and others
applied later.
Operation
Vehicle care
We have selected car-care products and
compiled recommendations which are
specially matched to our vehicles and
which always reflect the latest technology.
You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved
car-care products at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or
damage due to negligent or incorrect care
cannot always be removed or repaired with
the car-care products recommended here.
In such cases it is best to seek aid at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The following topics deal with the cleaning
and care of your vehicle and give important
“how-to” information as well as references
to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care
products.
Power washer
Paintwork, painted body components
! Follow the instructions provided by the power washer manufacturer on maintaining a distance between the vehicle and the nozzle of the
power washer.
! Affixing stickers, magnets, adhesive tape or
similar materials to painted body components
may damage the paintwork.
Never use a round nozzle to power-wash tires.
The intense jet of water can result in damage to
the tire.
Always replace a damaged tire.
Always keep the jet of water moving across the
surface. Do not aim directly at electrical parts,
electrical connectors, seals, or other rubber
parts.
i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of water, and
a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is in close
proximity, i.e. within approximately 3 ft (1 m),
the vehicle could be inadvertently locked or unlocked.
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care
should be applied when water drops on the
paint surface do not “bead up”. This should
normally be done every 3 to 5 months,
depending on climate and washing detergent used.
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner
should be applied if the paint surface
shows signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of
gloss).
Do not apply any of these products or wax
if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the
hood is still hot.
왘
Tar stains
Quickly remove tar stains before they dry
and become more difficult to remove. A tar
remover is recommended.
Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up
Stick for quick and provisional repairs
of minor paint damage (i.e. chips from
stones, vehicle doors, etc.).
323
Operation
Vehicle care
Engine cleaning
Hand-wash
Automatic car wash
Prior to cleaning the engine compartment,
make sure to protect electrical components and connectors from contact with
water and cleaning agents.
Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle
in direct sunlight.
You can have your car washed in an automatic car wash from the start. Automatic
car washes without brushes are preferable.
Corrosion protection, such as MB Anticorrosion Wax, should be applied to the engine compartment after every engine
cleaning. Before applying, all control linkage bushings and joints should be lubricated. The poly-V-belt and all pulleys should
be protected from any wax.
Vehicle washing
In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces
of road salt as soon as possible.
When washing the underbody, do not forget to clean the inner sides of the wheels.
i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of water, and
a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is in close proximity, i.e. within approximately 3 ft (1 m), the vehicle could be inadvertently locked or unlocked.
왘
왘
Only use a mild car wash detergent,
such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car
Shampoo.
Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a diffused jet of water.
Direct only a very weak spray towards
the ventilation intake.
왘
왘
Use plenty of water and rinse the
sponge and chamois frequently.
Rinse with clean water and thoroughly
dry with a chamois.
Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on
the finish.
! Do not use
scouring agents on these parts.
Never apply strong force and only use a soft,
non-scratching cloth when cleaning the vehicle.
Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry
cloth or sponge.
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the paint.
324
왘
To protect the filter system, switch the
automatic climate control to air
recirculation mode (컄 page 191).
! Do not clean your vehicle in an automatic
touchless car wash which uses caustic spray.
Otherwise, the caustic spray will damage the
paint or ornamental moldings.
If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it before running it through the automatic car
wash.
! Make sure that the windshield wiper switch
is set to 0 (컄 page 57). Otherwise, the rain sensor could activate and cause the wipers to move
unintentionally. This may lead to vehicle damage.
Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in exterior
rear view mirrors prior to running the vehicle
through an automatic car wash to prevent damage to the mirrors.
Operation
Vehicle care
i After running the vehicle through an automatic car wash, wipe any wax off of the windshield (컄 page 326). This will prevent smears
and reduce wiping noise which can be caused by
residual wax on the windshield.
When leaving the car wash, make sure that the
mirrors are folded out. Otherwise they may vibrate.
Ornamental moldings
For regular cleaning and care of ornamental moldings, use a use damp cloth.
! Do not use chrome cleaner on ornamental
moldings. Although ornamental moldings may
have chrome appearance, they could be made of
anodized aluminum that will be damaged when
cleaned with chrome cleaner. Instead, use damp
cloth to clean those ornamental moldings.
Very dirty ornamental moldings of which you are
sure are chrome-plated, use a chrome cleaner. If
in doubt whether an ornamental molding is
chrome-plated, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Headlamps, tail lamps, side markers,
turn signal lenses
왘
Cleaning the Distronic* system sensor
cover
Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo, with plenty of water.
! Only use window cleaning solutions that are
suitable for plastic lamp lenses. Window cleaning solutions which are not suitable may damage
the plastic lamp lenses of the headlamps. Therefore, do not use abrasives, solvents or cleaners
that contain solvents.
Never apply strong force and only use a soft,
non-scratching cloth when cleaning the lenses.
Do not attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry
cloth or sponge.
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the lens
surface.
1 Distronic* system sensor cover
왘
Switch off the ignition (컄 page 39).
왘
Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car
Shampoo, with plenty of water and a
non-scratching cloth to clean sensor
cover 1.
컄컄
325
Operation
Vehicle care
컄컄 ! To prevent scratches or damage, never ap-
ply strong force and only use a soft, non-scratching cloth when cleaning Distronic system sensor
cover 1. Do not attempt to wipe dirty sensor
with a dry cloth or sponge.
왘
Restart the engine after cleaning
sensor cover 1.
Cleaning the Parktronic system*
sensors
왘
Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car
Shampoo, with plenty of water and a
soft, non-scratching cloth to clean
sensors 1 on the bumpers.
! Do not apply strong pressure to the sensor
covers. Applying strong pressure may damage
the sensor covers.
Follow the instructions provided by the power
washer manufacturer on maintaining a distance
between the vehicle and the nozzle of the power
washer.
! To prevent scratches, never apply strong
force and only use a soft, non-scratching cloth
when cleaning the sensors. Do not attempt to
wipe dirty sensors with a dry cloth or sponge.
1 Parktronic system* sensors in front
bumper
326
Cleaning the windows and the wiper
blades
! The windshield wipers must be in a vertical
position before folding them away from the windshield. They could otherwise damage the hood.
Never open the hood when the wiper arms are
folded forward.
왘
Make sure the hood is fully closed.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
왘
Turn combination switch to wiper
setting II (컄 page 57).
왘
With wiper arms in vertical position,
switch off the ignition (컄 page 39).
Operation
Vehicle care
Warning!
G
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and remove SmartKey from starter switch (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: Make sure the
vehicle’s on-board electronics have
status 0.) before cleaning the windshield
and/or the wiper blades. Otherwise, the
wiper motor could suddenly turn on and
cause injury.
왘
Fold the wiper arms forward until they
snap into place.
! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts. They
could tear.
왘
Clean the wiper blade inserts with a
clean cloth and detergent solution.
왘
Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild window cleaning solution on all outside
and inside glass surfaces.
! Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto
the windshield before turning the SmartKey in
the starter switch or pressing the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*).
Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm
back. If released, the force of the impact from
the tensioning spring could crack the windshield.
! To clean the window interior, do not use a
dry cloth, abrasives, solvents or cleaners containing solvents. Do not touch the inside of the
front, rear or side windows with hard objects
such as an ice scraper or ring. Doing so may
damage the windows.
Rear window cleaning
Clean the rear window with the hardtop
fully raised and closed.
Warning!
G
Do not clean the rear window with the hardtop in a position other than the fully raised
and closed position. Otherwise, the hardtop
may move unexpectedly which may result in
personal injury to you or others.
왘
Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild window cleaning solution on all outside
and inside glass surfaces.
An automotive glass cleaner is recommended.
An automotive glass cleaner is recommended.
327
Operation
Vehicle care
Light alloy wheels
Plastic and rubber parts
! Do not use oil, wax or
If possible, clean wheels once a week.
왘
these parts.
왘
Use Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel
Care, a soft bristle brush and a strong
spray of water for cleaning the light alloy wheels.
! Only use acid-free cleaning materials. Acid
may cause corrosion or damage the clear coat.
! The vehicle should not be parked for an extended period of time immediately after it has
been cleaned, especially not after the wheel rims
have been cleaned with wheel rim cleaner.
Wheel rim cleaners can lead to increased corrosion of the brake disks and brake pads. Therefore, the vehicle’s brake system should always
be warmed-up before it is parked after cleaning.
To do so, please drive your vehicle for several
minutes to allow the brakes to dry.
When applying Mercedes-Benz approved Tire
Care and Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care
products, take care not to spray them on the
brake disks.
328
왘
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a
washing solution.
Wipe with a cloth moistened in a lukewarm solution.
The surface may temporarily change
color. If this is the case, wait for it to
dry.
Never apply strong force and only use a soft,
non-scratching cloth when cleaning the surface.
Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry
cloth or sponge.
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the surface.
Hard plastic trim items
왘
Warning!
G
Do not use cleaners containg solvents or
cockpit care sprays to clean the cockpit or
the steering wheel boss. Cleaners containing solvents will make the surface porous
and vehicle occupants could suffer serious
injuries from plastic parts coming loose in
the event of air bag deployment.
scouring agents on
Use Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
Care, a soft, lint-free cloth and apply
with light pressure.
! Never apply strong force and only use a soft,
non-scratching cloth when cleaning the surface.
Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry
cloth or sponge.
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the surface.
Steering wheel and gear selector lever
왘
Wipe with a damp cloth and dry
thoroughly or clean with
Mercedes-Benz approved Leather
Care.
Operation
Vehicle care
Carpets
Upholstery
Leather upholstery
왘
Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing
clothing that have the tendency to give off
coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause
the upholstery to become permanently discolored. By lining the seats with a proper
intermediate cover, contact-discoloration
will be prevented.
왘
Use Mercedes-Benz approved Carpet
and Fabric Care for cleaning the carpets.
Headliner
왘
Use a soft bristle brush or a dry-shampoo cleaner in case of excessive dirt.
Seat belts
왘
Warning!
Only use clear, lukewarm water and
soap.
! The seat belts must not be treated with
chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat
belts at temperatures above 176°F (80°C) or in
direct sunlight.
Warning!
G
G
Only use seat or head restraint covers which
have been tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model.
Using other seat or head restraint covers
may interfere with or prevent the activation
of the active head restraints. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
availability.
Wipe leather upholstery with a damp
cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with
Mercedes-Benz approved Leather
Care.
Exercise particular care when cleaning perforated leather as its underside should not
become wet.
Wood trims
왘
Dampen cloth using water and use
damp cloth to clean wood trims in your
vehicle.
! Do not use solvents like tar remover or
wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as these
may be abrasive.
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
329
330
Practical hints
What to do if …
Where will I find ...?
Locking/unlocking in an
emergency
Replacing SmartKey batteries
Replacing bulbs
Replacing wiper blades
Flat tire
Batteries
Jump starting
Towing the vehicle
Fuses
331
Practical hints
What to do if …
Lamps in the instrument cluster
General information:
If any of the following lamps in the instrument cluster fails to come on during the
bulb self-check when switching on the ignition, have the respective bulb checked and
replaced if necessary.
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solution
The ESP® has been switched off.
왘
v
The yellow ABS/ESP® warning
lamp comes on while driving.
Risk of accident!
Switch the ESP® back on (컄 page 92).
Exceptions: (컄 page 91).
®
When the ESP® is switched off it will not sta- 왘 If leaving the ESP switched off, adapt
your speed and driving to the prevailbilize the vehicle if the system recognizes
ing road and weather conditions.
that the vehicle starts to skid or that a wheel
is spinning.
If the ESP® cannot be switched on:
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.
The ESP® is not operational due to a malfunc- 왘 Observe additional messages in the
tion.
multifunction display.
Risk of accident!
332
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
왘
Adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road and weather conditions.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
v
Possible cause/consequence
ABS/ESP®
The yellow
warning
lamp flashes while driving.
Suggested solution
The
ABS, or traction control has come 왘 When driving off, apply as little throtinto operation because of detected traction
tle as possible.
loss in at least one tire.
왘 While driving, ease up on the accelerThe cruise control and the Distronic* system
ator.
are deactivated.
왘 Adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road and weather conditions.
ESP®,
왘
Do not deactivate the ESP®.
Exceptions: (컄 page 91).
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
333
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
-
Possible cause/consequence
The yellow ABS indicator lamp
comes on while driving.
Suggested solution
The ABS has detected a malfunction and has 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
switched off. The BAS and the ESP® are also
Wheels may lock during hard braking,
reducing steering capability.
switched off (see messages in display).
The electro-hydraulic brake system is still
functioning normally but without ABS available.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.
If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning, oth- Failure to follow these instructions iner systems such as Parktronic*, Distronic*, creases the risk of an accident.
or the automatic transmission may also be
왘 Read and observe messages in the
malfunctioning.
display (컄 page 347).
The charging voltage has fallen below
10 volts and the ABS was switched off.
왘
Switch off electrical consumers that
are currently not needed, e.g. seat
heating.
왘
If necessary, have the generator and
battery checked.
The battery may not be sufficiently charged.
When the voltage is above this value
again, the ABS is operational again.
334
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
;
3
(USA only)
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solution
You are driving with the parking brake set.
왘
Release the parking brake
(컄 page 54).
앫
There is a malfunction in the
electro-hydraulic brake system.
왘
Read and observe messages in the
display (컄 page 347).
앫
There is insufficient brake fluid in the reser- 왘 Risk of accident! Carefully stop the
voir.
vehicle in a safe location or as soon as
it is safe to do so and notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not
add brake fluid! This will not solve the
problem.
(Canada only)
The red brake warning lamp
comes on while driving and
you hear a warning sound.
;
3
(USA only)
(Canada only)
The red brake warning lamp
comes on when the engine is
running and you hear a warning sound.
Warning!
G
Driving with the brake warning lamp illuminated can result in an accident. Have your
brake system checked immediately if the
brake warning lamp stays on. Do not add
brake fluid before checking the brake system.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You
can be seriously burned.
! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake
fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or
below, have the brake system checked for brake
pad thickness and leaks.
335
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
ú
±
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solution
(USA only)
There is a malfunction in:
왘
(Canada only)
앫
The fuel injection system
The yellow engine malfunction
indicator lamp comes on while
driving.
앫
The ignition system
앫
The emission control system
앫
Systems which effect emissions
Have the vehicle checked as soon as
possible by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
An on-board diagnostic connector is
used by the service station to link the
vehicle to the shop diagnostics system. It allows the accurate identification of system malfunctions through
the readout of diagnostic trouble
codes. It is located in the front left
area of the footwell next to the parking brake pedal.
왘
Check the fuel cap (컄 page 271).
Such malfunctions may result in excessive
emissions values and may switch the engine
to its limp-home (emergency operation)
mode.
The fuel cap is not closed tightly.
If it is not closed properly:
왘
Close the fuel cap.
If it is closed properly:
왘
336
Have the fuel system checked by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
ú
±
(USA only)
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solution
Your fuel tank is empty.
왘
(Canada only)
The yellow engine malfunction
indicator lamp comes on while
driving.
D
The red coolant warning lamp
comes on when the engine is
running.
After refueling, start, turn off, and restart the engine three or four times in
succession.
The limp-home mode is canceled. You
do not need to have your vehicle
checked.
There is insufficient coolant in the reservoir. 왘 Immediately add coolant to prevent
engine from overheating
(컄 page 280).
If this warning lamp comes on frequently,
there is a leak in the cooling system.
왘
Have the cooling system checked.
If the coolant level is correct, the electric ra- 왘 If the coolant temperature is below
248°F (120°C), you can continue
diator fan may be broken.
driving to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
D
The red coolant warning lamp
The coolant temperature has exceeded
comes on while driving and you 248°F (120°C).
hear a warning sound.
왘
Avoid high engine loads (e.g. driving
uphill) and stop-and-go driving.
왘
Stop in a safe location as soon as possible and allow the engine and coolant
to cool down.
337
Practical hints
What to do if …
Warning!
G
Driving when your engine is overheated can
cause some fluids which may have leaked
into the engine compartment to catch fire.
You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause
serious burns and can occur just by opening
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine
if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
338
During severe operating conditions, e.g.
stop-and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248°F (120°C).
! The engine should not be operated with the
coolant temperature above 248°F (120°C). Doing so may cause serious engine damage which
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solution
E
The white Distronic* indicator
lamp comes on while driving.
E
The red distance warning lamp 앫 You are gaining too rapidly on the vehicle 왘 Apply the brakes immediately.
comes on while driving and you
ahead of you.
왘 Carefully observe the traffic situation.
hear a warning sound.
You may need to brake or maneuver
앫 The distance warning system has recogto avoid hitting an obstacle.
nized a stationary obstacle on your probable line of travel.
A
The yellow fuel tank reserve
warning lamp lights while driving.
The Distronic* distance sensor has recognized a preceding vehicle.
The fuel level has dropped below the reserve 왘 Refuel at the next gas station
mark.
(컄 page 271).
The fuel cap is not closed tightly.
왘
Check the fuel cap (컄 page 271).
339
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
C
Possible cause/consequence
The yellow roll bar warning lamp The roll bar system is malfunctioning.
comes on or flickers when the
engine is running.
Warning!
G
If the roll bar warning lamp does not come
on, does not go out after a long time, flickers
or comes on while driving as described
above, then the roll bar system is not operating properly and may not activate in an
accident. In this case, raise the roll bar manually (컄 page 81) before continuing to drive.
340
Suggested solution
For safety reasons, always have the roll
bar raised when driving with the retractable hardtop open.
왘
Attempt to raise the roll bar manually
(컄 page 81).
왘
Have the roll bar checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solution
<
The red seat belt telltale comes The seat belt telltale reminds you and your 왘 Fasten your seat belts.
on and a warning chime sounds passengers to fasten your seat belts before
The seat belt telltale goes out.
for approximately 6 seconds
driving off.
after starting the engine with all
doors closed.
<
The red seat belt telltale remains
illuminated after driving off. The
vehicle’s speed does not exceed
15 mph (25 km/h).
You and/or your front passenger have
forgotten to fasten your seat belts.
The red seat belt telltale flashes
and you additionally hear an intermittent warning chime with increasing intensity for a maximum
of 60 seconds from the time the
vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph
(25 km/h).
You and/or your front passenger have
forgotten to fasten your seat belts.
<
i After 60 seconds with an unfastened seat
belt, the warning chime stops sounding and the
seat belt telltale illuminates continuously. The
seat belt telltale will only go out if both, the driver
and front passenger’s seat belt are fastened, or
왘
Fasten your seat belts.
There are items placed on the front passen- 왘 Remove the items from the front
ger seat and therefore the system senses the
passenger seat and put them in a safe
front passenger seat as being occupied.
place.
왘
Fasten your seat belts.
There are items placed on the front passen- 왘 Remove the items from the front
ger seat and therefore the system senses the
passenger seat and put them in a safe
front passenger seat as being occupied.
place.
the vehicle is standing still and a front door is
opened.
341
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
1
Possible cause/consequence
The red SRS indicator lamp
comes on while driving.
Warning!
G
In the event that a malfunction of the SRS is
indicated as outlined above, the SRS may
not be operational. For your safety, we
strongly recommend that you visit an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the system checked; otherwise
the SRS may not be activated when needed
in an accident, which could result in serious
or fatal injury, or it might deploy
unexpectedly and unnecessarily which
could also result in an accident and/or
injury to you or to others.
342
Suggested solution
There is a malfunction in the restraint sys왘 Drive with added caution to the neartems. The air bags or Emergency Tensioning
est authorized
Devices (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly or
Mercedes-Benz Center.
fail to activate in an accident.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solution
H
USA only:
The TPMS (USA only) or Advanced TPMS* 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
Combination low tire pressure/ (Canada only) detects a loss of pressure in
avoiding abrupt steering and braking
TPMS malfunction telltale for
at least one tire.
maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation
the TPMS illuminates continuaround you.
ously.
왘 Read and observe messages in the mulCanada only:
tifunction display.
Low tire pressure telltale for the
If the tire inflation pressure in the respecAdvanced TPMS* illuminates
tive tire(s) has (have) been corrected, the
continuously.
combination low tire pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale goes out after few minutes
driving.
H
USA only:
There is a malfunction in the TPMS.
Combination low tire pressure/
TPMS malfunction telltale for
the TPMS flashes for
60 seconds and then stays illuminated.
왘
Read and observe messages in the multifunction display.
왘
Have the TPMS checked by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
After the malfunction has been remedied
the combination low tire pressure/TPMS
malfunction telltale goes out after few
minutes driving.
343
Practical hints
What to do if …
Warning!
G
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or the tire inflation pressure
label. If your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or the tire inflation pressure label,
you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
344
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Please
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if underinflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
USA only:
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the
telltale will flash for approximately
one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long
as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of incompatible replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing
one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle
to ensure that the replacement or alternate
tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue
to function properly.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Air bag off indicator lamp
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
5/ The front passenger front air bag The system is malfunctioning.
off indicator lamp illuminates and
remains illuminated with the
weight of a typical adult or someone larger than a small individual
on the passenger seat.
Warning!
Suggested solution
왘
Have the system checked as soon as
possible by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Also read and observe any messages in
the multifunction display and follow corrective steps (컄 page 356).
G
If the 5/ indicator lamp illuminates
and remains illuminated with the weight of a
typical adult or someone larger than a small
individual on the passenger seat, do not
have any passenger use the passenger seat
until the system has been repaired.
345
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
5/ The front passenger front air bag The system is malfunctioning.
off indicator lamp does not illuminate and/or does not remain illuminated with the weight of a
typical 12-month-old child in a
standard child restraint or less on
the passenger seat.
Warning!
G
If the 5/ indicator lamp does not illuminate or remains out with the
346
weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a
standard child restraint or less on the front
passenger seat, do not transport a child on
the passenger seat until the system has
been repaired.
Suggested solution
왘
Make sure there is nothing between
seat cushion and child seat and check
installation of the child seat.
왘
Make sure that no objects applying supplemental weight onto the seat are
present.
왘
If the front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp remains out, have the system checked as soon as possible by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Do
not transport a child on the passenger
seat until the system has been repaired.
왘
Also read and observe any messages in
the multifunction display and follow corrective steps (컄 page 356).
Practical hints
What to do if …
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Warning and malfunction messages appear in the in the multifunction display located in the instrument cluster.
Certain warning and malfunction messages are accompanied by an audible signal.
Address these messages accordingly and
follow the additional instructions given in
this Operator’s Manual.
Selecting the vehicle status message
memory menu in the control system
(컄 page 152) displays both cleared and
uncleared messages.
Certain messages of high priority cannot
be cleared from the multifunction display
using the reset button (컄 page 26) or button j, k, ÿ, or è on the
multifunction steering wheel.
Other messages of high priority and messages of less immediate priority can be
cleared from the multifunction display using the reset button or button j, k,
ÿ, or è on the multifunction steering wheel. They are then stored in the vehicle status message memory (컄 page 152).
Remember that clearing a message will not
correct the condition that caused the message to appear.
Warning!
G
All categories of messages contain important information which should be taken note
of and, where a malfunction is indicated, addressed as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Failure to repair condition noted may cause
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty, or result in property damage or personal injury.
High-priority messages appear in the multifunction display in red color.
347
Practical hints
What to do if …
Warning!
G
No messages will be displayed if either the
instrument cluster or the multifunction display is inoperative. Contact your nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
As a result, you will not be able to see information about your driving conditions, such
as speed or outside temperature, warning/indicator lamps, malfunction/warning
messages or the failure of any systems.
Driving characteristics may be impaired.
If you must continue to drive, do so with
added caution. Visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
348
i Switching on the ignition causes all instrument cluster lamps (except high beam headlamp
indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps
unless activated) as well as the multifunction display to come on. Make sure the lamps and the
multifunction display are in working order before
starting your journey.
On the pages that follow, you will find a
compilation of the most important warning
and malfunction messages that may appear in the multifunction display.
For your convenience the messages are divided into two sections:
앫
Text messages (컄 page 349)
앫
Symbol messages (컄 page 365)
Practical hints
What to do if …
Text messages
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
ABC
Malfunction
Stop car
You have started driving although the 왘 Stop your vehicle in a safe location or as
vehicle level is still too low.
soon as it is safe to do so.
The vehicle is being raised. The ABC 왘 Wait until the message disappears from
message goes out after a few seconds.
the multifunction display.
You may then drive off.
The vehicle is losing oil.
왘
The ABC message is continuously
shown.
Stop your vehicle in a safe location or as
soon as it is safe to do so.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
349
Practical hints
What to do if …
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
ABC
Malfunction
Stop car
ABC is malfunctioning.
왘
Stop the vehicle in a safe location and
press the vehicle level control button to
select a higher vehicle level (컄 page 226).
If the vehicle does not raise, observe the
following when you continue to drive:
왘
ABC
Malfunction
Do not turn steering wheel too far to
avoid damaging the front fenders.
왘
Listen for scraping noises.
왘
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h).
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
The capability of the ABC system is re- 왘 Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph
stricted. This can impair handling.
(80 km/h).
왘
Vehicle rising
Please wait
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
The vehicle’s level is too low while at a 왘 Do not drive off.
standstill. The vehicle will be raised.
왘 Wait until the message disappears from
the multifunction display.
You may then drive off.
350
Practical hints
What to do if …
Left display
ABS
Right display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
ABS, ESP
unavailable
See
Oper. Manual
The ABS and ESP are not available
왘 Drive a short distance with added caution
due to a malfunction. The BAS is also
at a vehicle speed of above 12 mph
deactivated.
(20 km/h).
When the message disappears, the ABS,
The system’s self-diagnosis may not
the ESP®, and the BAS are available again.
be completed yet.
®
The electro-hydraulic brake system is If the message does not disappear:
still functioning normally but without 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
the ABS, the ESP®, and the BAS availWheels may lock during hard braking,
reducing steering capability.
able.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases
the risk of an accident.
351
Practical hints
What to do if …
Left display
ABS
––– mph
Right display
ABS, ESP
inoperative
See
Oper. Manual
Cruise control
Possible cause/consequence
®
The ABS and ESP have switched off
due to a malfunction.
Possible solution
왘
The BAS is also deactivated.
Continue driving with added caution.
Wheels may lock during hard braking,
reducing steering capability.
The electro-hydraulic brake system is 왘 Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
still functioning normally but without
possible.
the ABS, the ESP®, and the BAS availFailure to follow these instructions increases
able.
the risk of an accident.
You have attempted to set a speed be- 왘 Accelerate to a speed exceeding
low 20 mph (30 km/h).
20 mph (30 km/h) and set the speed
(컄 page 210).
The ESP® is switched off.
왘
Switch on the ESP® (컄 page 92).
The gear selector lever is set to position P, R, or N.
왘
Move the gear selector lever or position D.
The vehicle is secured with the parking 왘 Release the parking brake (컄 page 54).
brake.
352
Practical hints
What to do if …
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
––– mph
Distronic
You have attempted to set a speed be- 왘 Accelerate to a speed exceeding
low 20 mph (30 km/h).
20 mph (30 km/h) and set the speed
(컄 page 210).
The ESP® is switched off.
왘
Switch on the ESP® (컄 page 92).
The gear selector lever is set to position P, R, or N.
왘
Move the gear selector lever or position D.
The vehicle is secured with the parking 왘 Release the parking brake (컄 page 54).
brake.
DISTRONIC
Inoperative
Distronic* is malfunctioning or the dis- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
play is malfunctioning.
as soon as possible.
Currently
unavailable.
See
Oper. Manual
Distronic* is deactivated because the 왘 Leave the area of the external interferfunctionality is impaired by external inence.
terferences, e.g. high-frequency sourc왘 Activate Distronic* again (컄 page 218)
es such as too stations, speed
when the message DISTRONIC available
measuring systems etc.
again appears.
Distronic* is deactivated because the 왘 Try to activate Distronic* again
Distronic* sensor has not sensed any
(컄 page 218) when the message
other vehicles or objects, e.g. road
DISTRONIC available again appears.
sign or such, for a long time.
353
Practical hints
What to do if …
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
DISTRONIC
Currently
unavailable.
See
Oper. Manual
Distronic* is deactivated because
왘
Clean the Distronic* cover in the radiator
grille (컄 page 325).
앫
the Distronic* cover in the radiator
grille is dirty
왘 Restart the vehicle.
앫
the functionality is impaired by
heavy precipitation or fog
Distronic* becomes operational again without the engine being restarted when
앫
dirt on the radiator grille has fallen off
while driving (e.g. slush or snow)
앫
the system recognizes full sensor availability due to lessening rain or because
the road is drying, for example
앫
the message in the multifunction display
disappears
You can then operate Distronic* as usual
again.
available again
354
Distronic* had been deactivated and is 왘 Activate Distronic* (컄 page 218).
available again.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Left display
ESP
Right display
Possible cause/consequence
ESP
inoperative
See
Oper. Manual
The ESP has detected a malfunction 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
and switched off.
왘 Have the system checked at an authorized
The ABS may not be operational.
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
The electro-hydraulic brake system is
ESP unavailable
See
Oper. Manual
Possible solution
®
still functioning normally but without
the ESP® available.
Failure to follow these instructions increases
the risk of an accident.
The ESP® is deactivated because the
power supply has been interrupted.
왘
Synchronize the ESP®. With the vehicle
stationary, turn the steering wheel completely to the left and then to the right.
The electro-hydraulic brake system is
still functioning normally but without If the ESP® message does not go out:
the ESP® available.
왘 Continue driving with added caution.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases
the risk of an accident.
! When sychronizing the ESP®, make sure you
can turn the steering wheel in both directions as
far as it will go without the wheels hitting any objects, e.g. a road curb.
355
Practical hints
What to do if …
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
Front passenger
airbag
enabled
The passenger front air bag is
See Oper. Manual activated while driving even
though a child, small individual,
or object below the system’s
weight threshold is on the front
passenger seat, or the front passenger seat is empty. Objects
on the seat or forces acting on
the seat may make the system
sense supplemental weight.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and
check the passenger seat for the following:
왘
Switch off the ignition (컄 page 39).
왘
Remove child and child restraint from passenger seat and
properly secure the child in rear seat employing the child
restraint if necessary.
왘
Make sure that no objects which applying supplemental
weight onto the seat are present. The system may recognize such supplemental weight and sense that an occupant on the passenger seat is of a greater weight than
actually present.
왘
Keep the seat unoccupied, close the passenger door and
switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
Monitor the 5/ indicator lamp between the center air
vents and the multifunction display in the instrument cluster
(컄 page 139) for the following:
(Continued on next page)
356
Practical hints
What to do if …
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
Front passenger
airbag
enabled
See Oper. Manual
With the seat unoccupied and the ignition switched on,
앫
the 5/ indicator lamp between the center air
vents should illuminate and remain illuminated, indicating
that the OCS (컄 page 72) has deactivated the air bag.
앫
the message Front passenger airbag enabled See Oper.
Manual or the message Front passenger airbag disabled
See Oper. Manual should not appear in the multifunction
display at any time the seat is unoccupied. Wait at last
60 seconds for the system to complete the necessary
check cycles and to make sure neither message appears
in the multifunction display.
If above conditions are met, you can occupy the passenger
seat again. Depending on the passenger classification
sensed by the OCS (컄 page 72), the 5/ indicator
lamp will remain illuminated or go out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not working
properly. Have the system checked as soon as possible by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!
G
If the 5/ indicator lamp remains
out even after performing the above corrective steps, do not have any children 12 years
old and under and other small individuals
use the passenger seat until the system has
been repaired.
357
Practical hints
What to do if …
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
Front passenger
airbag
disabled
The passenger front air bag is
See Oper. Manual deactivated while driving even
though an adult or someone
larger than a small individual is
occupying the front passenger
seat. Forces acting on the seat
may make the system sense a
decrease in weight.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and
check the front passenger seat for the following:
왘
Switch off the ignition (컄 page 39).
왘
Have the passenger vacate the seat and exit the vehicle.
왘
Keep the seat unoccupied, close the passenger door and
switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
Monitor the 5/ indicator lamp between the center air
vents (컄 page 76) and the multifunction display in the instrument cluster (컄 page 139) for the following:
(Continued on next page)
358
Practical hints
What to do if …
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
Front passenger
airbag
disabled
See Oper. Manual
With the seat unoccupied and the ignition switched on,
앫
the 5/ indicator lamp between the center air
vents should illuminate and remain illuminated, indicating
that the OCS (컄 page 72) has deactivated the air bag.
앫
the message Front passenger airbag enabled See Oper.
Manual or the message Front passenger airbag disabled
See Oper. Manual should not appear in the multifunction
display at any time the seat is unoccupied. Wait at last
60 seconds for the system to complete the necessary
check cycles and to make sure neither message appears
in the multifunction display.
If above conditions are met, you can occupy the passenger
seat again. Depending on the passenger classification
sensed by the OCS (컄 page 72), the 5/ indicator
lamp will remain illuminated or go out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not working
properly. Have the system checked as soon as possible by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!
G
If the 5/ indicator lamp remains
illuminated with an adult occupant on the
passenger seat even after performing the
above corrective steps, do not have any
passenger use the passenger seat until the
system has been repaired.
359
Practical hints
What to do if …
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
P
Gear selector
lever to P
You have tried to start the engine with 왘 Place the gear selector lever in position P.
the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button
with the gear selector lever not in position P.
You have tried to turn off the engine
with the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button with the gear selector lever not in
position P.
Retractable roof
360
open/close
completely
The retractable hardtop is not locked 왘 Push or pull on the retractable hardtop
properly.
switch until the indicator lamp in the
switch goes out and the retractable hardtop is completely open or closed
(컄 page 199).
Practical hints
What to do if …
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/consequence
SRS
Restraint system
malfunction
Visit
workshop
There is a malfunction in the supple- 왘 Drive with added caution and have the
mental restraint systems. The air bags
system checked at an authorized
or emergency tensioning devices
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
(ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly or
fail to activate in an accident.
Warning!
Possible solution
G
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be
operational. For your safety, we strongly
recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have
the system checked; otherwise the SRS may
not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal
injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and
unnecessarily which could result in an accident and/or injury to you or to others.
361
Practical hints
What to do if …
Left display
Run Flat Indicator
Right display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Check tires
Then restart
Run Flat Indicator
There was a warning message
왘 Make sure that the correct tire inflation
about a loss in the tire inflation
pressure is set for each tire.
pressure and the Run Flat Indica왘 Then reactivate the Run Flat Indicator.
tor has not been reactivated yet.
inoperative
The Run Flat Indicator is
malfunctioning.
왘
Have the Run Flat Indicator checked by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The Run Flat Indicator has been
switched off due to an error.
Tire pressure
Check tires
362
The Run Flat Indicator indicates 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
that the pressure is too low in one
abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Obor more tires.
serve the traffic situation around you.
왘
Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as
required (컄 page 292).
왘
If necessary, change the wheel
(컄 page 405).
왘
Reactivate the Run Flat Indicator after adjusting the tire inflation pressure values
(컄 page 294).
Practical hints
What to do if …
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Tire pressure
displayed after
driving for
a few minutes
Vehicles with Advanced TPMS*:
The tire inflation pressure is being
checked.
왘
Drive the vehicle for a few minutes.
Tire pressure monitor inoperative
The TPMS or Advanced TPMS* is
malfunctioning.
왘
Have the TPMS or Advanced TPMS*
checked by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Tire pressure monitor inoperative
No wheel sensors
There are wheels without appropriate 왘 Have the TPMS or Advanced TPMS*
wheel sensors mounted (e.g. winter
checked by an authorized
tires).
Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Tire pressure monitor
Wheel sensor missing
Have appropriate wheel sensors installed by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
One or more sensors defect (e.g. emp- 왘 Have the TPMS or Advanced TPMS*
ty sensor battery).
checked by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
One or more wheels without appropriate wheel sensors mounted (e.g. spare 왘 Have appropriate wheel sensors inwheel).
stalled by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Vehicles with Advanced TPMS*:
The tire pressure for the respective tire
is indicated in the multifunction display.
363
Practical hints
What to do if …
Left display
Right display
Tire pressure monitor currently
unavailable
Possible cause/consequence
The TPMS or Advanced TPMS* is As soon as the causes for the malfunction are
unable to monitor the tire presno longer present, the TPMS or Advanced
sure due to
TPMS* automatically becomes active again
after a few minutes driving.
앫 a nearby radio interference
source.
앫
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
364
Possible solution
excessive wheel sensor temperatures.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Symbol messages
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
#
The battery is no longer charging.
Possible causes:
왘
앫
alternator malfunctioning
If it is broken:
앫
broken poly-V-belt
왘
Do not forget that the brake system
requires electrical energy and may
be operating with restricted capability. Considerably greater brake
pedal force is required and the stopping distance is increased.
#
Stop the vehicle immediately in a safe location and check the poly-V-belt.
There is a malfunction in the electronic system.
Do not continue to drive. Otherwise, the
engine will overheat due to an inoperative
water pump which may result in damage
to the engine. Notify an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
If it is in order:
왘
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center immediately. Adjust driving to be
consistent with reduced braking responsiveness.
Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
365
Practical hints
What to do if …
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
#
Battery/Alternator
Stop car
The battery is malfunctioning.
왘
2
Brake wear
The brake pads have reached their 왘 Have the brake pads replaced as soon as poswear limit.
sible.
USA only:
Reduced
brake effect
Start engine
The battery has insufficient voltage 왘 Start the engine.
and cannot supply sufficient power
The message disappears when sufficient
to the electro-hydraulic brake sysvoltage is available.
tem.
;
Canada only:
3
! Brake pad thickness must be visually
checked by a qualified technician at the intervals
specified in the Maintenance Booklet.
The electro-hydraulic brake system
requires electrical energy and
therefore has only limited opera왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cention. Considerably greater brake
ter.
pedal force is required and the stopping distance is increased.
Warning!
G
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and lead to death.
366
Stop the vehicle in a safe location. Adjust driving to be consistent with reduced braking responsiveness.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/consequence
T
Reduced
brake effect
Depress brake
pedal fully!
The electro-hydraulic brake system 왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon
is in emergency operation mode.
as it is safe to do so.
Considerably greater brake pedal
왘 Apply the parking brake (컄 page 61).
force is required and the stopping
왘 Do not drive any further.
distance is increased.
The maximum speed is limited to
55 mph (90 km/h).
Warning!
G
Driving while this message is displayed can
result in an accident. Have your brake system checked immediately.
If the electro-hydraulic brake system enters
its emergency operation mode, the driver
must apply significantly greater brake pedal
pressure and depress the pedal much further than normal to obtain braking effect.
Possible solution
왘
Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by
blocking the wheels with wheel chocks or other sizable objects.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or call for Roadside Assistance (컄 page 247).
If necessary, apply full pressure to the brake
pedal. Brakes are only applied to the front
wheels. Stopping distance is increased!
If there is a malfunction in the
electro-hydraulic brake system, we recommend that the vehicle be transported with
all wheels off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly equipment.
A tow bar must be used if circumstances do
not permit the use of the recommended
towing methods and the vehicle requires
towing with all four wheels on the ground.
Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on
the ground is only permissible for distances
up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to
exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). For more information, see “Towing the vehicle”
(컄 page 421).
367
Practical hints
What to do if …
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/consequence
USA only:
Reduced
brake effect
Visit
workshop
The electro-hydraulic brake system 왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon
is in emergency operation mode.
as it is safe to do so.
Considerably greater brake pedal
왘 Apply the parking brake (컄 page 61).
force is required and the stopping
왘 Do not drive any further.
distance is increased.
;
Canada only:
3
Warning!
G
Driving while this message is displayed can
result in an accident. Have your brake system checked immediately.
If the electro-hydraulic brake system enters
its emergency operation mode, the driver
must apply significantly greater brake pedal
pressure and depress the pedal much further than normal to obtain braking effect.
368
Possible solution
왘
Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by
blocking the wheels with wheel chocks or other sizable objects.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or call for Roadside Assistance (컄 page 247).
If necessary, apply full pressure to the brake
pedal. Brakes are only applied to the front
wheels. Stopping distance is increased!
If there is a malfunction in the
electro-hydraulic brake system, we recommend that the vehicle be transported with
all wheels off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly equipment.
A tow bar must be used if circumstances do
not permit the use of the recommended
towing methods and the vehicle requires
towing with all four wheels on the ground.
Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on
the ground is only permissible for distances
up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to
exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). For more information, see “Towing the vehicle”
(컄 page 421).
Practical hints
What to do if …
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
USA only:
Check
brake fluid level
There is insufficient brake fluid in
the reservoir.
Risk of accident!
;
Canada only:
3
왘
Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon
as it is safe to do so.
왘
Do not drive any further.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the
problem.
Warning!
G
Driving with the message Check brake
fluid level displayed can result in an accident. Have your brake system checked immediately. Do not add brake fluid before
checking the brake system. Overfilling the
brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling
brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching fire. You can be seriously burned.
! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake
fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or
below, have the brake system checked for brake
pad thickness and leaks.
369
Practical hints
What to do if …
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
USA only:
Service brake
Visit
workshop
There are malfunctions, but the
electro-hydraulic brake system is
operating normally.
왘
Brakes overheated
Drive on, but with
even greater care
The brake system is overheated due 왘 Relieve the load on the brake system:
to an excessive load on the brakes.
왘 Drive more smoothly and think ahead to
avoid unnecessary braking.
;
Canada only:
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
3
왘
USA only:
;
Canada only:
!
370
Release
parking brake
You are driving with the parking
brake set.
When driving down steep grades, shift into
a lower gear to use the engine’s braking
power (컄 page 174).
왘
Cautiously continue driving so that the air
stream will cool down the brakes.
왘
Release the parking brake (컄 page 61).
Practical hints
What to do if …
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
•
Coolant
Stop car –
Turn engine off
The coolant is too hot.
왘
Among other possible causes, the
poly-V-belt could be broken.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon
as it is safe to do so.
왘
Turn off the engine.
왘
Check the poly-V-belt.
If it is broken:
왘
Do not continue to drive. Otherwise, the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water
pump which may result in damage to the engine. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
If it is intact:
왘
Wait for the message to disappear before restarting the engine.
Doing otherwise could result in serious engine
damage that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
(Continued on next page)
371
Practical hints
What to do if …
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
왘
Observe the coolant temperature gauge in the
instrument cluster (컄 page 27).
If the temperature rises again:
왘
Warning!
G
Driving when your engine is overheated can
cause some fluids which may have leaked
into the engine compartment to catch fire.
You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause
serious burns and can occur just by opening
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine
if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
372
During severe operating conditions, e.g.
stop-and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248°F (120°C).
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center immediately.
! The engine should not be operated with the
coolant temperature above 248°F (120°C). Doing so may cause serious engine damage which
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
B
Top up
coolant
See Oper. Manual
The coolant level is too low.
왘
•
Add coolant (컄 page 280).
Comply with all warnings while doing so.
The cooling fan for the coolant is
malfunctioning.
왘
If you have to add coolant frequently, have the
cooling system checked by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Observe the coolant temperature gauge in the
instrument cluster (컄 page 27).
If the coolant temperature is under 120°C,
you may continue driving to the nearest specialist workshop.
Warning!
G
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
may burn if it comes into contact with hot
engine parts. You can be seriously burned.
왘
Avoid placing heavy loads on the engine
(e.g. by driving uphill) as well as stop-and-go
traffic.
왘
Have the fan replaced as soon as possible.
! Do not ignore the low engine coolant level
warning. Extended driving with this message and
symbol displayed may cause serious engine
damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Do not drive
without sufficient amount of coolant in the cooling system. The engine will overheat, causing
major engine damage.
373
Practical hints
What to do if …
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Check doors
2
You are attempting to drive with
one or more doors open.
왘
Close the doors.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
You are pressing the lock button on
the door handle and at least one
door is open.
±
Visit
workshop
Engine
Service
374
Certain electronic systems are un- 왘 Have the electronic systems checked by an
able to relay information to the conauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center
trol system. The following systems
(컄 page 336).
may have failed:
앫
Coolant temperature gauge
앫
Tachometer
There may be a malfunction in the
앫
fuel injection system
앫
ignition system
앫
exhaust system
앫
fuel system
왘
Have the engine checked as soon as possible
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
(컄 page 336).
Practical hints
What to do if …
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
_
Entry position
Do not drive
The steering wheel has not yet
moved into its stored driving position.
왘
N
USA only:
Add 1 qt. engine oil
at next refueling
Wait until the steering wheel has moved to its
driving position.
The message disappears.
Vehicles with engine oil measuring 왘 Add engine oil (컄 page 278) and check the
system only:
engine oil level (컄 page 276).
The engine oil level is too low.
Canada only:
Add 1 liter
engine oil
at next refueling
Engine oil level
Stop car –
turn engine off
Vehicles with engine oil measuring 왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon
system only:
as it is safe to do so.
There is no oil in the engine. There
왘 Turn off the engine.
is a danger of engine damage.
왘 Add engine oil (컄 page 278) and check the
engine oil level (컄 page 276).
Engine oil level
Reduce
oil level
Vehicles with engine oil measuring 왘 Have excess oil siphoned or drained off. Obsystem only:
serve all legal requirements with respect to its
You have added too much engine
disposal.
oil. There is a risk of damaging the
engine or the catalytic converter.
375
Practical hints
What to do if …
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/consequence
N
Engine oil level
Cannot
measure
engine oil level
Vehicles with engine oil measuring 왘 Have the measuring system checked by an
system only:
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The measuring system is malfunctioning.
Engine oil level
Check level
Vehicles with oil dipstick only:
왘 Check the engine oil level (컄 page 276) and
The engine oil has dropped to a critadd oil as required (컄 page 278).
ical level.
왘 If you must add engine oil frequently, have the
engine checked for possible leaks.
When the message Add 1 qt engine oil
at next refueling (Canada: 1 l) appears
while the engine is running and at
operating temperature, the engine oil level
has dropped to approximately the
minimum level.
376
Possible solution
When this occurs, the warning will first
come on intermittently and then stay on if
the oil level drops further.
If no oil leaks are noted, continue to drive
to the nearest service station where the
engine oil should be topped to the required
level with an approved oil specified in the
Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet.
! The engine oil level warnings should not be
ignored. Extended driving with the symbol displayed could result in serious engine damage
that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
A
Fuel cap
open
A loss of pressure has been detect- 왘 Check the fuel cap (컄 page 271).
ed in the fuel system. The fuel cap If it is not closed properly:
may not be closed properly or the
왘 Close the fuel cap.
fuel system may be leaky.
If it is closed properly:
왘
K
Have the fuel system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
being lowered
The retractable hardtop is not com- 왘 Make sure the retractable hardtop is completely opened or closed. The roof
pletely opened or closed (컄 page 199).
hydraulics will start to lose pressure.
locked
in driving mode
You have attempted to open the re- 왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location and try to
tractable hardtop while driving.
open the hardtop again.
O
You are driving with the hood open. Risk of accident!
왘
Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon
as it is safe to do so.
왘
Close the hood (컄 page 275).
377
Practical hints
What to do if …
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
I
Remove
key
You have forgotten to remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch.
왘
Replace
key
The SmartKey is no longer function- 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
al.
Center.
Change
key batteries
The batteries in the SmartKey with 왘 Replace the batteries (컄 page 395).
KEYLESS-GO* are discharged.
F
378
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/consequence
F
Key
not detected
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is 왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon
not recognized while the engine is
as it is safe to do so.
running because:
왘 Search for the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*.
앫 The SmartKey with
Otherwise the vehicle cannot be centrally
KEYLESS-GO* is not in the vehilocked nor can the engine be started again afcle.
ter the engine is stopped.
앫
Key
not detected
Possible solution
There is strong radio-frequency
왘 Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey with
interference.
KEYLESS-GO* in the starter switch
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is 왘 Change the position of the SmartKey with
not recognized when attempting to
KEYLESS-GO* in the vehicle.
start the engine with the
왘 Make sure the batteries in the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button* on
KEYLESS-GO* are properly inserted
the gear selector lever because:
(컄 page 395) and are not discharged
(컄 page 110).
앫 The SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* is not in the vehi왘 Start the engine with the SmartKey with
cle.
KEYLESS-GO* in the starter switch if
necessary.
앫 The battery in the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO* is not inserted properly or completely discharged.
379
Practical hints
What to do if …
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
F
Key
still
in vehicle
A SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* left 왘 Take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* out of
in the vehicle was recognized while
the vehicle.
locking the vehicle from the outside.
.
3rd brake lamp
The high mounted brake lamp is
malfunctioning.
AUTO light
inoperative
The light sensor is malfunctioning. 왘 In the control system, set lamp operation to
The headlamps switch on automatimanual mode (컄 page 159).
cally.
왘 Switch on headlamps using the exterior lamp
switch.
왘
왘
380
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
Brake lamp
left
Auxiliary bulb on
The left brake lamp is malfunction- 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
ing. An auxiliary bulb has been
as soon as possible.
brought into use.
Brake lamp
Right
Substitute
bulb on
The right brake lamp is malfunction- 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
ing. A substitute bulb has been
as soon as possible.
brought into use.
Front foglamp
left
The left front fog lamp or left corner-illuminating front fog lamp is
malfunctioning.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
.
Front foglamp
right
The right front fog lamp or right cor- 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
ner-illuminating front fog lamp is
as soon as possible.
malfunctioning.
High beam
left
The left high beam lamp is malfunc- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible
tioning.
(컄 page 397).
High beam
right
The right high beam lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 397).
License plate
lamp – left
The left license plate lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 397).
License plate
lamp – right
The right license plate lamp is mal- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible
functioning.
(컄 page 397).
Low beam
left
The left low beam lamp is malfunc- 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
tioning.
as soon as possible.
Low beam
right
The right low beam lamp is malfunc- 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
tioning.
as soon as possible.
Marker lamp
front left
The front left side marker lamp is
malfunctioning.
Marker lamp
front right
The front right side marker lamp is 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
malfunctioning.
as soon as possible.
Marker lamp
rear left
The rear left side marker lamp is
malfunctioning.
왘
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
381
Practical hints
What to do if …
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
.
Marker lamp
rear right
The rear right side marker lamp is
malfunctioning.
왘
Parking lamp
front left
Auxiliary bulb on
The front left parking or standing
왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible
lamp is malfunctioning. An auxiliary
(컄 page 397).
bulb has been brought into use.
Parking lamp
front right
Auxiliary bulb on
The front right parking or standing 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible
lamp is malfunctioning. An auxiliary
(컄 page 397).
bulb has been brought into use.
Rear foglamp
left
The left rear fog lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
Reverse lamp
left
The left backup lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 397).
Reverse lamp
right
The right backup lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 397).
Turn signal
left mirror
The turn signal in the driver’s side 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
exterior rear view mirror is malfuncas soon as possible.
tioning. This message will only appear if all light emitting diodes have
stopped working.
382
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
.
Turn signal
right mirror
The turn signal in the passenger
왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
side exterior rear view mirror is malas soon as possible.
functioning. This message will only
appear if all light emitting diodes
have stopped working.
Tail lamp
left
Auxiliary bulb on
The left tail lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
An auxiliary bulb has been brought
as soon as possible.
into use.
Tail lamp
right
Auxiliary bulb on
The right tail lamp is malfunctioning. An auxiliary bulb has been
brought into use.
Turn off
lights
You have removed the SmartKey
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to M
from the starter switch and opened
or U.
the driver’s door or removed the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* from
the vehicle and left the headlamps
on.
Turn signal
front left
Auxiliary bulb on
The left front turn signal lamp is
malfunctioning. An auxiliary bulb
has been brought into use.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 397).
Turn signal
front right
Auxiliary bulb on
The right front turn signal lamp is
malfunctioning. An auxiliary bulb
has been brought into use.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 397).
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
383
Practical hints
What to do if …
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/consequence
.
Turn signal
rear left
Auxiliary bulb on
The left rear turn signal lamp is mal- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible
functioning. An auxiliary bulb has
(컄 page 397).
been brought into use.
Turn signal
rear right
Auxiliary bulb on
The right rear turn signal lamp is
malfunctioning. An auxiliary bulb
has been brought into use.
왘
Raise
roll-over bar
The roll bar is malfunctioning.
For safety reason, always have the roll bar raised
when driving with the retractable hardtop open.
C
L
t
384
Possible solution
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 397).
왘
Attempt to raise the roll bar using the roll bar
button (컄 page 81).
왘
Have the roll bar checked by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
TeleAid
inoperative
One or more main functions of the 왘 Have the Tele Aid system checked by an auTele Aid system are malfunctioning.
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Function
unavailable
This display appears if button t
or s on the multifunction steering wheel is pressed and the vehicle
is not equipped with a telephone.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
H
Please correct
the tire pressure
The tire inflation pressure is too
low in one or more tires.
왘
Check and correct tire inflation pressure as required
(컄 page 292).
Tire pressure
Caution
Tire defect
One or more tires are deflating.
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
steering and braking maneuvers.
왘
If necessary, change the wheel (컄 page 405).
Caution
Tire defect
Vehicles with Advanced TPMS*:
One or more tires are deflating.
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
steering and braking maneuvers.
The respective tire is indicated in 왘 If necessary, change the wheel (컄 page 405).
the multifunction display.
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
385
Practical hints
What to do if …
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
H
Tire pressure
Check tires
The tire pressure in one or more
tires is already below the minimum value.
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
steering and braking maneuvers.
왘
Check and adjust tire pressure as required.
왘
If necessary, change the wheel.
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
steering and braking maneuvers.
왘
Check and adjust tire pressure as required.
왘
If necessary, change the wheel.
Check tires
Vehicles with Advanced TPMS*:
The tire pressure in one or more
tires is already below the minimum value.
The respective tire is indicated in
the multifunction display.
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
386
Practical hints
What to do if …
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/consequence
Ê
This message will appear when the 왘 Close the trunk lid.
trunk lid is open and you are trying
to open or close the retractable
hardtop.
M
Close
trunk partition
You are trying to open or close the 왘 Close the luggage cover and engage it into
retractable hardtop even though
side holders (컄 page 205).
the luggage cover in the trunk is not
closed and/or properly engaged.
W
Washer fluid
Please refill
The washer fluid in the washer fluid 왘 Add washer fluid (컄 page 282).
reservoir has fallen below the minimum level.
Warning!
Possible solution
G
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
may ignite when if it comes into contact with
hot engine parts. You could be seriously
burned.
387
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
First aid kit
Vehicle tool kit, jack, and spare wheel
The first aid kit is located in storage compartment under the passenger seat.
The vehicle tool kit, jack, and spare wheel
are stored in the space underneath the
trunk floor.
Warning!
1 Handle
2 Lid
왘
Pull handle 1 up.
왘
Fold lid 2 down.
You can now remove the first-aid kit.
i Check expiration dates and contents for
completeness at least once a year and replace
missing/expired items.
388
G
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
up the vehicle at the jack tubes built into
both sides of the vehicle. To help avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel change. Never get
beneath the vehicle while it is supported by
the jack. Keep hands and feet away from the
area under the lifted vehicle. Always firmly
set parking brake and block wheels before
raising vehicle with jack.
Do not disengage parking brake while the
vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
always vertical (plumb line) when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use the jack
on a hard level surface. Be sure that the jack
arm is fully inserted in the jack tube. Always
lower the vehicle onto sufficient capacity
jackstands before working under the vehicle.
왘
Lift up the trunk floor cover.
You can now remove the tools and accessories.
The vehicle tool kit includes
앫
One pair of universal pliers
앫
Two open-end wrenches
앫
One hex-socket wrench
앫
One interchangeable slot/Phillips
screwdriver
앫
One towing eye bolt
앫
One alignment bolt
앫
One fuse extractor
앫
One fuse chart
앫
Spare fuses
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
5 Jack
6 Wheel wrench
1 Spare wheel
2 Electric air pump
3 Vehicle tool kit
4 Storage well casing
Removing the spare wheel
왘
왘
Open the trunk (컄 page 111).
1 Spare wheel
2 Tensioning strap (vehicles with
19" spare wheel only)
3 Retaining screw
4 Storage well casing base
왘
Lift up the trunk floor cover.
왘
Remove storage well casing base 4.
왘
Remove storage well casing that contains the vehicle tool kit and the electric air pump.
왘
Remove retaining screw 3 by turning
it counterclockwise.
왘
Remove spare wheel 1.
Take spare wheel 1 out of the trunk,
see “Removing the spare wheel”
(컄 page 389), to access jack 5 and
wheel wrench 6.
389
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
Storing the spare wheel after use
i Vehicles with 19" spare wheel only: Before
If you wish to store the spare wheel after
use, carry out the following steps. Otherwise, the spare wheel may not fit the spare
wheel well.
storing the spare wheel in trunk fasten tensioning straps, see “Compressing the collapsible tire
(vehicles with 19" spare wheel only)”
(컄 page 390).
! Make sure the spare wheel is dry before
storing it.
왘
Unscrew the valve cap from the valve
of the collapsible tire.
왘
Take the valve extractor from the
vehicle tool kit (컄 page 388).
왘
Unscrew the valve insert from the valve
and allow the air to escape.
i It may take a few minutes for the collapsible
tire to deflate completely.
왘
Screw the valve insert back into the
valve.
왘
Screw the valve cap back onto the
valve.
390
왘
Store the spare wheel by carrying out
the steps described in “Removing the
spare wheel” (컄 page 389) in reverse
order.
Compressing the collapsible tire
(vehicles with 19" spare wheel only)
왘
Extend the tensioning strap by pulling
the slider.
The collapsible tire on a 19" spare wheel
must be compressed with two tensioning
straps before you can store it back in the
trunk.
왘
Place tensioning strap around spare
wheel rim and collapsible tire with the
buckle facing the inside of the rim.
왘
Close the buckle.
i The tensioning straps are shown in red for
왘
Pull the loose end of the tensioning
strap.
illustration purposes. The tensioning straps on
the spare wheel of your vehicle are black.
The tensioning strap must be pulled as
tight as possible.
Practical hints
Locking/unlocking in an emergency
왔 Locking/unlocking in an emergency
Unlocking the driver’s door
Unlocking the vehicle
If you cannot unlock the vehicle using the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, unlock the
driver’s door and the trunk using the mechanical key.
i Unlocking the vehicle with the mechanical
key and opening the driver’s door or the trunk
will trigger the anti-theft alarm system
(컄 page 96).
To cancel the alarm, insert the SmartKey or the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* in the starter
switch.
1 Mechanical key locking tab
2 Mechanical key
왘
Move locking tab 1 direction of arrow
and slide the mechanical key 2 out of
the housing.
1 Unlocking
2 Mechanical key
왘
Insert mechanical key 2 into the lock
until it stops.
왘
Turn mechanical key 2 counterclockwise to position 1.
The driver’s door is unlocked. You can
now open the driver’s door.
391
Practical hints
Locking/unlocking in an emergency
Unlocking the trunk
Unlocking the glove box
A minimum height clearance of 6.2 ft
(1.89 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
Lockable storage areas in the passenger
compartment include:
앫
the glove box
앫
the storage compartment under the
armrest
앫
the rear storage compartments
If these cannot be unlocked by means of
the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*, use the mechanical key to
unlock the glove box.
1 Unlocking in an emergency
2 Handle
왘
Insert the mechanical key into the
trunk lid lock until it stops.
왘
Turn the mechanical key counterclockwise to position 1.
The trunk is unlocked
왘
Pull handle 2 and lift lid.
왘
Turn the mechanical key back and remove it from the trunk lid lock.
392
i To unlock the remaining storage compartments, the cause for the malfunction of the
SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
must be determined and corrected, see
(컄 page 104) and (컄 page 109).
1 Separately unlocking the glove box
왘
Slide mechanical key out of SmartKey
housing (컄 page 391).
왘
Insert the mechanical key into the
glove box lock and turn it to
position 1.
You can now open the glove box.
Practical hints
Locking/unlocking in an emergency
i Unlocking the glove box with the mechanical
key will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. To
cancel the alarm, do one of the following:
Locking the vehicle
앫
Press button Œ or ‹ on the
SmartKey.
If you cannot lock the vehicle with the
SmartKey, lock it with the mechanical key
as follows:
앫
Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch.
왘
앫
Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button
(컄 page 40).
Close the passenger door and the
trunk.
앫
왘
Grasp an outside door handle (vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO* only).
Press the central locking switch in the
center console (컄 page 119).
왘
Check whether the locking knob on the
passenger door has moved down.
1 Locking
2 Mechanical key
왘
If necessary push it down manually.
왘
왘
Remove the mechanical key from of
the SmartKey (컄 page 391).
Insert mechanical key 2 (컄 page 391)
into the driver’s door lock until it stops.
왘
Turn mechanical key 2 clockwise to
position 1.
왘
Check whether the trunk is locked.
왘
If necessary, lock the trunk with the
mechanical key (컄 page 117).
Except for the driver’s door, the vehicle
should now be locked.
The driver’s door is locked.
i This procedure does not arm the anti-theft
alarm system, nor does it lock the fuel filler flap
and the storage compartments.
The storage compartments can be locked
separately (컄 page 235).
393
Practical hints
Locking/unlocking in an emergency
Lowering the load assist manually
If the load assist feature does not fully lower the retractable hardtop into the trunk
compartment and you are unable to close
the trunk lid, follow the instructions below.
왘
Using hex-socket 1 wrench provided
in the vehicle tool kit, carefully turn the
locking screw 2 approximately one
quarter of a turn.
왘
Hook luggage cover into holders
(컄 page 205).
왘
Let go of the hardtop.
It should gradually lower into the trunk.
왘
When top is completely lowered, return
locking screw 2 to its original position.
! Do not overtighten the screw.
1 Hex-socket wrench
2 Locking screw
왘
Remove the trunk floor from the trunk.
왘
Lift up the lid located at the lower left
side of the trunk.
왘
Have a second person lift and hold the
retracted hardtop.
394
왘
Close the lid.
왘
Replace the trunk floor.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Practical hints
Replacing SmartKey batteries
왔 Replacing SmartKey batteries
If the batteries in the SmartKey or the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* are discharged, the vehicle can no longer be
locked or unlocked. It is recommended to
have the batteries replaced at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!
G
Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive
substances. Therefore keep the batteries
out of reach of children.
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help
immediately.
Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
왘
Remove the mechanical key from the
SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* (컄 page 391).
i When inserting batteries, make sure they
are clean and free of lint.
i When replacing batteries, always replace
both batteries.
The required replacement batteries (Lithium,
type CR 2025 or equivalent) are available at any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
1 Mechanical key
2 Battery compartment
왘
Insert mechanical key 1 into opening.
왘
Press mechanical key 1 in direction of
arrow.
The battery compartment is unlatched.
왘
Pull battery compartment 2 out of the
housing.
컄컄
395
Practical hints
Replacing SmartKey batteries
컄컄
3 Batteries
4 Contact spring
왘
Pull out batteries 3.
왘
Using a lint-free cloth, insert new batteries 3 under contact springs 4 with
the positive terminal (+) side facing up.
왘
Return battery compartment 2 into
housing until it locks into place.
396
왘
Slide mechanical key 1 back into
SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*.
왘
Check the operation of the SmartKey
or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* as well
as the KEYLESS-GO* function.
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
왔 Replacing bulbs
Warning!
G
Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. Allow the lamp to cool down before changing
a bulb.
Keep bulbs out of reach of children.
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A
bulb can explode if you:
앫
touch or move it when hot
앫
drop the bulb
앫
scratch the bulb
Bulbs
Safe vehicle operation depends on proper
exterior lighting and signaling. It is therefore essential that all bulbs and lamp assemblies are in good working order at all
times.
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely
important. Have headlamps checked and
readjusted at regular intervals and when a
bulb has been replaced. See an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for headlamp adjustment.
i If the headlamps or front fog lamps are
fogged up on the inside as a result of high humidity, driving the vehicle a distance with the lights
on should clear up the fogging.
i Auxiliary bulbs will be brought into use when
the following lamps malfunction:
앫
Turn signal lamps
앫
Brake lamps
앫
Parking lamps
앫
Tail lamps
Observe the messages in the multifunction display (컄 page 347).
Wear eye and hand protection.
Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is
dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the
lamp and its components. We recommend
that you have such work done by a qualified
technician.
397
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Front lamps
Rear lamps
Lamp
Type
1 Additional turn signal LED
2 Turn signal lamp
3 Low beam
1
1156 NA
D2S-35W
4 Xenon headlamp:
H7 (55W)
High beam, high beam
flasher
Bi-Xenon headlamp*: H7 (55W)
High beam flasher
Parking and standing W 5 W
lamp
5 Front fog lamp, Cor- H11 (55W)
ner-illuminating front
fog lamp
6 Side marker lamp
1
W5W
Vehicles with Xenon or Bi-Xenon* headlamps:
Low beam and high beam use the same D2S-35W
lamp. Do not replace the Xenon and Bi-Xenon*
bulbs yourself. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
398
Lamp
Type
7 Rear fog lamp
(driver’s side only)
P 21 W
8 High mounted brake
lamp
LED
9 Backup lamp
P 21 W
a Tail, parking and
standing lamp, side
marker lamp
LED
b Brake lamp
LED
c License plate lamp
C5W
d Turn signal lamp
PY 21 W
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Notes on bulb replacement
앫
Only use 12-volt bulbs of the same type
and with the specified watt rating.
앫
Switch the lights off before changing a
bulb to prevent short circuits.
앫
Always use a clean lint-free cloth when
handling bulbs.
Have the LEDs and bulbs for the following
lamps replaced by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center:
앫
the additional turn signals in the exterior rear view mirrors
앫
the high mounted brake lamp
앫
the brake lamps
앫
Your hands should be dry and free of oil
and grease.
앫
the parking lamps and the side marker
lamps in the tail lamp unit
앫
If the newly installed bulb does not
come on, visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫
the rear fog lamps
앫
the low beam (Xenon or Bi-Xenon*)
lamps
앫
the front fog lamps
앫
the front side marker lamps
i Have the headlamp adjustment checked
regularly.
Replacing bulbs for front lamps
Before you start to replace a bulb for a
front lamp, do the following first:
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to position M (컄 page 128).
왘
Open the hood (컄 page 274).
1 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp
2 High beam headlamp cover
3 Low beam headlamp cover (Xenon or
Bi-Xenon* lamp). Do not remove.
399
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
4 High beam bulbs
5 Locking mechanism
6 Parking and standing lamps
Warning!
G
Do not remove the cover for the Xenon or
Bi-Xenon* headlamp. Because of high voltage in Xenon and Bi-Xenon* lamps, it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp
and its components. We recommend that
you have such work done by a qualified
technician.
400
Front turn signal bulb
High beam/ high beam flasher bulbs
왘
Turn bulb socket 1 counterclockwise
and pull it out.
왘
왘
Push the bulb into socket 1, turn
socket 1 counterclockwise and remove it.
Press ends of headlamp cover tab together and remove high beam headlamp cover 2.
왘
Pull the electrical connector off.
왘
Turn locking mechanism 5 counterclockwise and take out the bulb.
왘
Insert the new bulb so that the base locates in the recess on the holder.
왘
Turn locking mechanism 5 clockwise.
왘
Plug the connector onto the bulb.
왘
Align high beam headlamp cover 2
and click it into place.
왘
Insert the new bulb in socket 1, push
and turn bulb socket 1 clockwise.
왘
Reinsert bulb socket 1 in lamp and
turn bulb socket 1 clockwise.
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Parking and standing lamp bulbs
Additional turn signal lamp bulbs
Front side marker lamp bulbs
왘
Press ends of cover tab together and
remove high beam headlamp cover 2.
The additional turn signal lamps in the
exterior rear view mirrors have LEDs.
왘
Pull out bulb socket 6 with the bulb.
왘
Pull the bulb out of bulb socket 6.
왘
Insert a new bulb in bulb socket 6.
If a malfunction occurs or LEDs fail to function, the entire turn signal unit must be replaced. Have the turn signal unit replaced
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Since replacing the side marker lamp bulbs
is a technically highly demanding process,
we recommend you have the side marker
lamp bulbs replaced by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Reinstall bulb socket 6.
왘
Align high beam headlamp cover 2
and click it into place.
401
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps
Before you start to replace a bulb for a rear
lamp, do the following first:
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to position M (컄 page 128).
왘
Open the trunk (컄 page 111).
왘
Fold the trim to the side and remove it.
왘
Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise
and pull it out.
왘
Gently push the bulb into the socket,
turn it counterclockwise and remove it.
왘
Insert the new bulb and reinstall the
bulb socket.
The bulb socket should audibly click
into place.
Tail lamp unit
왘
1 Backup lamp
2 Driver’s side: Rear fog lamp
Passenger’s side: Substitute lamp
3 Turn signal lamp
402
License plate lamp
Reinstall the trim.
1 Screws
왘
Loosen both screws 1.
왘
Remove the license plate lamp.
왘
Replace the bulb.
왘
Reinstall the license plate lamp.
왘
Retighten screws 1.
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
왔 Replacing wiper blades
Warning!
G
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and remove SmartKey from starter switch (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: Make sure the
vehicle’s on-board electronics have
status 0) before replacing a wiper blade.
Otherwise the wiper motor could suddenly
turn on and cause injury.
Warning!
G
Wiper blades are components that are subject to wear and tear. Change the wiper
blades twice a year, preferably in the spring
and fall. Otherwise the windows will not be
properly wiped. As a result, you may not be
able to observe surrounding traffic conditions and could cause an accident.
! To avoid damage to the hood:
앫
The wiper arms should only be folded forward when in the vertical position.
앫
Never open the hood when the wiper arm is
folded forward.
Placing wiper arms in vertical position
! Never open the hood when the wiper arms
are folded forward.
Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm
back. If released, the force of the impact from
the tensioning spring could crack the windshield.
Do not allow the wiper arms to contact the windshield glass without a wiper blade inserted.
Make sure the wiper blades are properly installed. Improperly installed wiper blades may
cause windshield damage.
For your convenience, we recommend that you
have this work carried out by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Wiper blades in vertical position
Vehicles with SmartKey
왘
Turn SmartKey to starter switch
position 1 (컄 page 39).
왘
Turn combination switch to wiper
setting II (컄 page 57).
왘
With wiper arms in the vertical position,
turn SmartKey in starter switch to
position 0.
왘
Remove SmartKey from starter switch.
403
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*
왘
Turn off the engine (컄 page 62).
With the driver’s door closed, the starter switch is now in position 1.
왘
Turn combination switch to wiper
setting II (컄 page 57).
왘
With wiper arms in the vertical position,
open the driver’s door.
Removing wiper blades
Installing wiper blades
왘
Fold the wiper arm forward until it
snaps into place.
왘
Slide the wiper blade onto the wiper
arm in opposite direction of arrow.
! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts. They
could tear.
왘
Rotate the wiper blade into a position
parallel to the wiper arm.
왘
Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on
the windshield. Make sure you hold on
to the wiper when folding the wiper arm
back.
The starter switch is set to position 0,
same as SmartKey removed from starter switch.
왘
Turn combination switch to wiper
setting 0 (컄 page 57).
404
왘
Turn wiper blade at a right angle to the
wiper arm.
왘
Slide the wiper blade sideways out of
the retainer.
Practical hints
Flat tire
왔 Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle
왘
Park the vehicle in a safe distance from
moving traffic on a hard, flat surface
when possible.
왘
Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
왘
Turn the steering wheel so that the
front wheels are in a straight ahead position.
왘
Set the parking brake.
왘
Move the gear selector lever to P.
Vehicles with SmartKey:
왘
왘
Turn off the engine (컄 page 62).
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
왘
왘
Turn off the engine by pressing the
KEYLESS-GO* button on the gear
selector lever once (컄 page 62).
Open the driver’s door (this puts
the starter switch in position 0,
same as with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch). The
driver’s door then can be closed
again.
i Open door only when conditions are safe to
do so.
왘
Have any passenger exit the vehicle at
a safe distance from the roadway.
Mounting the spare wheel
Warning!
G
The dimensions of the spare wheel are different from those of the road wheels. As a
result, the vehicle handling characteristics
change when driving with a mounted spare
wheel. Adapt your driving style accordingly.
The spare wheel is for temporary use only.
When driving with spare wheel mounted, ensure proper tire inflation pressure and do
not exceed vehicle speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h).
Drive to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible to have the spare wheel
replaced with a regular road wheel.
Never operate the vehicle with more than
one spare wheel mounted.
Do not switch off the ESP® when a spare
wheel is mounted.
405
Practical hints
Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle
Lifting the vehicle
Prepare the vehicle as described
(컄 page 405).
왘
왘
왘
Turn spare wheel bracket counterclockwise to loosen.
When changing wheel on a level surface:
Take the spare wheel out of the trunk
(컄 page 389).
Removing tensioning straps
(vehicles with 19" spare wheel only)
왘
1 Buckle
2 Clip
A 19" spare wheel has two tensioning
straps on it that must both be removed before mounting the spare wheel.
왘
i The tensioning straps are shown in red for
i Keep the tensioning straps in a safe place.
illustration purposes. The tensioning straps on
the spare wheel of your vehicle are black.
Prevent the vehicle from rolling away
by blocking wheels with wheel chocks
(not included) or other sizable objects.
Press on both clips 2 simultaneously
to release buckle 1.
You will need them to store the spare wheel in
the trunk after use (컄 page 390).
Always try lifting the vehicle using the
jack on a level surface. However,
should circumstances require you to do
so on a hill, place a wheel chock or other sizable object and the other wheel
chock or sizeable object as follows:
왘
406
Place one wheel chock or other
sizable object in front of and another wheel chock or sizable object behind the wheel that is diagonally
opposite to the wheel being
changed.
Place wheel chocks or other sizable
objects on the downhill side blocking both wheels of the axle not being worked on.
Practical hints
Flat tire
왘
Take the vehicle tool kit and the jack
out of the storage compartment under
the trunk floor (컄 page 388).
Warning!
Warning!
When turning the wheel wrench to loosen
the wheel bolts, make sure you position
hands on the wrench in such a way that you
avoid injury to yourself, such as scraping
your hands against the wheel. Make sure
turning the wheel wrench will not scratch or
damage the wheel rim.
컄컄
G
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
up the vehicle at the jack tubes built into
both sides of the vehicle. To help avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel change. Never get
beneath the vehicle while it is supported by
the jack. Keep hands and feet away from the
area under the lifted vehicle. Always firmly
set parking brake and block wheels before
raising vehicle with jack.
G
왘
On wheel to be changed, loosen but do
not yet remove the wheel bolts (approximately one full turn with wrench).
The jack support tubes are located behind
the front wheel housings and in front of the
rear wheel housings.
Do not disengage parking brake while the
vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
always vertical (plumb line) when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use the jack
on level surface. Be sure that the jack arm is
fully inserted in the jack tube. Always lower
the vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands before working under the vehicle.
407
Practical hints
Flat tire
컄컄
1 Jack support tube cover (except
SL 55 AMG, SL 65 AMG and vehicles
with Sport Package*)
2 Jack support tube cover (SL 55 AMG,
SL 65 AMG and vehicles with
Sport Package* only)
1 Jack arm
2 Jack support tube hole
3 Crank
왘
Open cover 1 by pressing at point indicated by arrow.
왘
Insert a flat blade screwdriver in the
opening of cover 2 and pry it out.
왘
왘
Remove cover 1, taking care not to
damage the locking tabs.
왘
Remove cover 2, taking care not to
damage the locking tabs.
Insert jack arm 1 fully into tube
hole 2 up to the stop.
Warning!
G
Insert the jack arm fully into the jack support tube hole up to the stop. Otherwise the
vehicle may fall from the jack and cause personal injury or damage to the vehicle.
408
Practical hints
Flat tire
왘
왘
Keeping jack in this position, turn
crank 3 clockwise until the jack base
meets the ground. Make sure the jack
is vertical (plumb line).
Removing the wheel
Mounting the new wheel
Warning!
G
Inflate spare wheel tire only after the wheel
is properly mounted.
Continue to turn the crank until the tire
is a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the
ground.
Inflate the spare wheel tire using the electric
pump (컄 page 410) before lowering the vehicle.
왘
Unscrew upper-most wheel bolt and remove.
Clean contact surfaces of wheel and
wheel hub.
왘
Replace this wheel bolt with alignment
bolt 1 supplied in the tool kit.
Guide the spare wheel onto the alignment bolt and push it on.
왘
Insert wheel bolts and tighten them
slightly.
1 Alignment bolt
왘
왘
왘
Remove the remaining bolts.
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. This
could result in damage to the bolt and wheel hub
threads.
왘
Remove the wheel.
409
Practical hints
Flat tire
Warning!
G
Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged or rusted.
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.
Damaged wheel hub threads should be repaired immediately. Do not continue to drive
under these circumstances! Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
Roadside Assistance.
Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tightened wheel bolts can cause the wheel to
come off. This could cause an accident. Be
sure to use the correct wheel bolts.
Warning!
G
Only use genuine equipment
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts. They are identified by the Mercedes star. Other wheel bolts
may come loose.
Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the vehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle could
fall off the jack.
왘
Unscrew the alignment bolt, install last
wheel bolt and tighten slightly.
Inflating the spare tire (collapsible tire)
! Do not lower the vehicle before inflating the
spare wheel tire. Otherwise the rim may be damaged.
왘
Take the electric air pump out of the
trunk (컄 page 388).
Warning!
G
Observe instructions on air pump label.
410
1 Flap
2 Air pump switch
3 Electrical plug
4 Air hose with pressure gauge and vent
screw
5 Union nut
왘
Open flap 1 on air pump.
왘
Pull out electrical plug 3 and air hose
with the pressure gauge 4.
왘
Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve.
왘
Screw union nut 5 onto the tire valve.
왘
Insert electrical plug 3 into vehicle cigar lighter socket.
Practical hints
Flat tire
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 1.
or
왘
Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button on the gear selector lever once
without depressing the brake pedal.
왘
Press I on the electric air pump
switch 2.
The electric air pump should now
switch on and inflate the tire.
왘
Inflate the spare tire:
앫
SL 550 to 36 psi (2.5 bar)
앫
SL 600, SL 55 AMG, SL 55 AMG
(Performance Package*), and
SL 65 AMG to 51 psi (3.5 bar)
This takes about 5 minutes.
Air hose 4 and union nut 5 can become hot during inflation. Exercise
proper caution to avoid burning yourself when using the equipment.
! Compare the recommended tire inflation
pressure for your vehicle with the tire inflation
pressure on the yellow label located on the spare
wheel rim.
If the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label
on the spare wheel rim differs from the values
given in this Operator’s Manual, inflate the tire to
the recommended tire inflation pressure given
on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim.
! Do not operate the electric air pump longer
than 8 minutes without interruption. Otherwise it
may overheat.
You may operate the air pump again after it has
cooled off.
왘
Press 0 on the electric air pump
switch 2.
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 0.
or
왘
Press KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button
on the gear selector lever twice without
depressing the brake pedal.
The electric air pump should now be
switched off.
왘
If the spare tire inflation pressure is
above the recommended tire inflation
pressure for the respective collapsible
tire (컄 page 440), release excess spare
tire inflation pressure using the vent
screw.
Warning!
G
Follow recommend inflation pressures.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires
can result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes,
etc.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear unevenly, adversely affect handling
and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail
from being overheated.
왘
Detach the electric air pump.
왘
Stow the electrical plug and the air
hose behind the flap and place the air
pump back in the trunk.
컄컄
411
Practical hints
Flat tire
컄컄 i The flat tire may be transported in the trunk
when the retractable hardtop is raised. If available, use a protective sheet on the spare wheel.
Vehicles with TPMS or Advanced TPMS*:
Do not activate the tire inflation pressure monitor until a full size wheel/tire with functioning
sensor has been placed back into service on the
vehicle.
Lowering the vehicle
왘
왘
Lower vehicle by turning crank counterclockwise until the full weight of the
vehicle is resting on the ground.
Pull the jack out of the jack support
tube.
왘
Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly, following the diagonal sequence illustrated (1 to 5), until all bolts are tight.
Observe a tightening torque of 96 lb-ft
(130 Nm).
Warning!
G
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. The wheels could come
loose if they are not tightened to a torque of
96 lb-ft (130 Nm).
Warning!
G
When turning the wheel wrench to tighten
the wheel bolts, make sure you position
hands on the wrench in such a way that you
avoid injury to yourself, such as scraping
your hands against the wheel. Make sure
turning the wheel wrench will not scratch or
damage the wheel rim.
1 - 5 Wheel bolts
412
왘
Before storing the jack in the trunk,
crank back to storage position and fold
in the arm.
i For information on storing the spare wheel
back into the trunk, see “Storing the spare wheel
after use” (컄 page 390).
Replacing jack support tube cover
왘
Slide tongue of cover under the upper
edge of the tube opening.
왘
Applying even pressure, press cover
until it snaps into place.
Be careful not to damage the locking
tabs or clamp the plastic retaining
strap.
Practical hints
Flat tire
MOExtended system*
Warning!
The MOExtended system allows you to
continue driving your vehicle even if there
is a total loss of pressure in one or more
tires.
You may only use the MOExtended system
in conjunction with the Run Flat Indicator*
(Canada vehicles) (컄 page 293) or TPMS
(U.S. vehicles) (컄 page 295).
! The maximum distance in emergency mode
depends on the vehicle’s load. It is 30 miles
(50 km) if the vehicle is partially loaded and
18 miles (30 km) if the vehicle is fully loaded.
The point at which the maximum driving distance
begins in emergency mode is when the warning
message appears in the multifunction display
indicating that there is a loss of tire inflation
pressure.
Do not exceed the maximum speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h).
G
In emergency mode, your vehicle’s driving
characteristics are diminished in such situations as:
Do not continue driving in emergency mode
if
앫
you notice knocking sounds
앫
the vehicle starts to shake
앫
smoke develops and you smell rubber
앫
driving around curves
앫
ESP® is intervening continuously
앫
while braking
앫
you notice tears on the tire sidewalls
앫
while accelerating rapidly
Therefore, your driving style must be adapted accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering and
driving maneuvers, as well as driving over
obstacles (road curbs, potholes, or off-road
areas). This is especially important if the vehicle is heavily loaded.
The emergency driving distance that can be
achieved greatly depends on the demands
placed on the vehicle. Depending on speed,
load, driving maneuvers, road conditions,
outside temperature, etc., the distance can
be significantly shorter or, if the vehicle is
driven cautiously, somewhat longer.
After driving in emergency mode, you must
have the rims inspected by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center to check if they are
suitable for further use. The failed tire must
be replaced in any case.
i When replacing individual or all tires on the
vehicle, make sure only matching tires marked
with “MOExtended” are mounted in the size
specified for your vehicle (컄 page 439).
413
Practical hints
Batteries
For more information on batteries, see
“Battery” (컄 page 281).
Your vehicle is equipped with two
batteries:
앫
The starter battery
앫
The battery for electrical consumers
(consumer battery), located in the
trunk
! The starter battery, its filler caps, and the
ventilation hose must always be securely installed when the vehicle is in operation.
The consumer battery is located on the
right-hand side of the trunk.
4 Positive terminal
5 Negative terminal
414
a valve-regulated lead acid (VRLA) battery, also
referred to as “fleece” battery. Such batteries do
not require topping-up of the electrolyte level.
VRLA batteries therefore do not have cell caps
and the battery cover is non-removable. Do not
attempt to open the consumer battery as otherwise the battery will be damaged.
Even though VRLA batteries do not require topping-up of the electrolyte level and cannot be
opened to check the electrolyte level, the battery condition must be checked periodically by
performing a battery conductance test. Refer to
Maintenance Booklet for battery condition testing intervals.
The starter battery is located on the
right-hand side of the engine compartment.
1 Positive terminal
2 Negative terminal
3 Battery ventilation
! The consumer battery located in the trunk is
As with any other battery, disconnect the consumer battery if you do not intend to operate
your vehicle for an extended period of time to
prevent battery discharge or connect an accessory battery charge unit expressly approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model to maintain the battery charge. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for further information.
Practical hints
Batteries
! The factory-equipped VRLA battery is
leak-proofed. Only use a battery as replacement
that has the same security features and is of
identical size, voltage, and capacity as the
factory-equipped battery.
! Never loosen or detach battery terminal
clamps while the engine is running or the
SmartKey is in the starter switch. Otherwise the
alternator and other electronic components
could be severely damaged.
The battery, the battery ventilation and the lateral plug must always be securely installed when
the vehicle is in operation.
Have the starter battery checked regularly by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!
G
Refer to Maintenance Booklet for maintenance
intervals or contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for further information.
G
Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injury or death.
Warning!
Never lean over batteries while connecting,
you might get injured.
Do not place metal objects on the battery as
this could result in a short circuit.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water and seek
medical help if necessary.
Use leak-proof batteries only to avoid the
risk of acid burns in the event of an accident.
Warning!
G
The brake system requires electrical power
to operate.
A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply
or electrical system may impair brake system operation and switch it into its emergency operation mode. The same applies if
battery is disconnected. To brake, the driver
must then apply significantly greater brake
pedal pressure and depress the pedal much
further to obtain the expected braking effect. If necessary, apply full pressure to the
brake pedal. Brakes are only applied to the
front wheels. Stopping distance is increased! Adjust your driving style accordingly. For more information, see
“Electro-hydraulic brake system”
(컄 page 92).
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking, etc.
415
Practical hints
Batteries
Warning!
G
With a disconnected battery
앫
앫
you will no longer be able to turn the
SmartKey in the starter switch and
pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button on the gear selector lever will
have no effect
the gear selector lever will remain
locked in position P
왘
Open the trunk.
왘
described below, even if you only want to charge
the starter battery, for example. Otherwise the
vehicle’s electronics can be damaged.
Read and observe safety instructions
and precautions (컄 page 281).
왘
Open the luggage cover in the trunk
(컄 page 206).
왘
Apply the parking brake (컄 page 61).
왘
Remove the trunk floor.
왘
Make sure the gear selector lever is set
to position P (컄 page 168).
왘
Close the retractable hardtop
(컄 page 199).
Disconnecting the batteries
! Always disconnect the batteries in the order
왘
Turn off all electrical consumers.
왘
Turn off the engine (컄 page 62).
왘
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
왘
416
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: Open
the driver’s door.
The battery for electrical consumers is
located in the right hand area of the
trunk (컄 page 388).
왘
Use the 10 mm open-end wrench from
the vehicle tool kit to disconnect the
negative lead from negative
terminal 5 of the consumer battery
(컄 page 414).
Practical hints
Batteries
왘
Open the hood (컄 page 274).
왘
Use the 10 mm open-end wrench from
the vehicle tool kit to disconnect the
negative lead from negative
terminal 2 of the starter battery
(컄 page 414).
왘
Remove the covers from the positive
terminals 1 and 4 (컄 page 414).
왘
Disconnect the positive lead from positive terminal 4 of the consumer battery (컄 page 414).
왘
Removing the batteries
Removing the consumer battery
왘
Remove the screws securing the battery in the trunk.
왘
Remove the battery support and
bracket.
왘
Pull out the battery ventilation hose
from the battery.
Depending on battery arrangement in
your vehicle model, the ventilation tube
is located either on the left or right side
of the battery.
Disconnect the positive lead from positive terminal 1 of the starter battery
(컄 page 414).
왘
Take out the battery.
Removing the starter battery
왘
Remove the screws securing the starter battery in the engine compartment.
왘
Pull battery ventilation 3
(컄 page 414) out of the battery.
왘
Lift the retaining bracket.
왘
Remove the battery.
Charging and reinstalling batteries
Warning!
G
Never charge a battery while still installed in
the vehicle unless the accessory battery
charge unit approved by Mercedes-Benz is
being used. Gases may escape during charging and cause explosions that may result in
paint damage, corrosion or personal injury.
An accessory battery charge unit specially
adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is
available, permitting the charging of the battery in its installed position. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
information and availability. Charge battery
in accordance with the separate instructions for the accessory battery charger.
417
Practical hints
Batteries
왘
왘
Charge batteries in accordance with
the instructions of the battery charger
manufacturer.
Reinstall the charged batteries. Follow
the previously described steps in reverse order.
418
Reconnecting the batteries
! Always connect the batteries in the order
described below. Otherwise the vehicle’s electronics can be damaged.
왘
Connect positive lead 4 (컄 page 414)
of the consumer battery and positive
lead 1 (컄 page 414) of the starter battery and fasten covers.
왘
Connect negative lead 2
(컄 page 414) of the starter battery.
왘
Turn off all electrical consumers.
왘
Install starter battery in the designated
location in the engine compartment.
왘
Connect negative lead 5
(컄 page 414) of the consumer battery.
왘
Install consumer battery in the designated location in the trunk.
왘
Reinstall the trunk floor.
왘
왘
Attach supports and brackets.
Close trunk luggage cover
(컄 page 206).
왘
Tighten support and bracket screws.
!
Never invert the terminal connections!
i The following procedures must be carried
out following any interruption of battery power
(e.g. due to reconnection):
앫
Resynchronize the ESP® (컄 page 355).
앫
Resynchronize side windows (컄 page 198).
Practical hints
Jump starting
왔 Jump starting
Warning!
G
Failure to follow these directions will cause
damage to the electronic components, and
can lead to a battery explosion and severe
injury or death.
Never lean over batteries while connecting
or jump starting, you might get injured.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water, and seek
medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and very explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking, etc.
Attempting to jump start a frozen battery
can result in it exploding, causing personal
injury.
Read all instructions before proceeding.
! Do not tow-start the vehicle.
! Jump starting may only be performed on the
battery installed in the engine compartment.
Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts.
Do not attempt to start the engine using a battery quick charge unit.
If the engine does not run after several unsuccessful starting attempts, have it checked at the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Excessive unburned fuel generated by repeated
failed starting attempts may damage the
catalytic converter and may present a fire risk.
If the starter battery is discharged, the engine can be started with jumper cables and
the battery of another vehicle. Observe the
following:
앫
Jump starting should only be performed
when the engine and catalytic
converter are cold.
앫
Do not start the engine if the battery is
frozen. Let the battery thaw out first.
앫
Only jump start from batteries with the
same voltage rating (12V). Jump starting with a more powerful battery could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system,
which will not be covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
앫
Only use jumper cables with sufficient
cross section and insulated terminal
clamps.
앫
Always make sure the jumper cables
are not on or near pulleys, fans, or
other parts that move when an engine
is started or running.
Make sure the jumper cables do not have loose
or missing insulation.
Make sure the cable clamps do not touch any
other metal part while the other end is still
attached to a battery.
419
Practical hints
Jump starting
Warning!
G
Keep flames or sparks away from battery.
Do not smoke.
Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries
(컄 page 281).
The starter battery is located on the right
side of the engine compartment.
왘
Turn off all electrical consumers.
1 Positive terminal of charged battery
2 Positive terminal of discharged battery
3 Negative terminal of discharged
battery
4 Negative terminal of charged battery
왘
Apply the parking brake (컄 page 61).
왘
왘
Make sure the gear selector lever is set
to position P (컄 page 168).
왘
Open the hood (컄 page 274).
왘
Remove the red cover from positive terminal on both vehicles (컄 page 414).
왘
Make sure the two vehicles do not
touch.
420
Connect positive terminals 1 and 2
of the batteries with the red jumper cable. Clamp cable to charged battery 1
first.
! Never invert the terminal connections.
왘
Start the engine of the vehicle with the
charged battery and run at idle speed.
왘
Connect negative terminals 3 and 4
of the batteries with the black jumper
cable. Clamp cable to charged
battery 3 first.
왘
Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
You can now turn on the electrical consumers. Do not turn on the lights under
any circumstances.
왘
Remove the jumper cables first from
negative terminals 4 and 3 and then
from positive terminals 2 and 1.
You can now turn on the lights.
왘
Have the battery checked at the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center.
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
왔 Towing the vehicle
Mercedes-Benz recommends that the vehicle be transported with all wheels off the
ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel
lift/dolly equipment.
! Use flatbed or wheel lift/dolly equipment
with SmartKey in starter switch turned to
position 0.
Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Towing
with sling-type equipment over bumpy roads will
damage radiator and supports.
To prevent damage during transport, do not tie
down vehicle by its chassis or suspension parts.
Switch off the tow-away alarm and the automatic
central locking.
When circumstances do not permit the
recommended towing methods, the vehicle may be towed with all wheels on the
ground or front wheels raised only so far as
necessary to have the vehicle moved to a
safe location where the recommended
towing methods can be employed.
! If the vehicle is towed with the front axle
raised, the gear selector lever must be in
position N and the engine must be shut off
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1).
Otherwise, the ESP® will immediately be engaged and will apply the rear wheel brakes.
When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the
ground, the gear selector lever must be in
position N and the SmartKey must be in starter
switch position 2.
When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the
ground or the front axle raised, the vehicle
may be towed only for distances up to
30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to exceed
30 mph (50 km/h).
To be certain to avoid a possibility of damage to
the transmission, however, we recommend the
drive shaft be disconnected at the rear axle drive
flange for any towing beyond a short tow to a
nearby garage.
Warning!
G
If circumstances require towing the vehicle
with all wheels on the ground, always tow
with a tow bar if:
앫
the engine will not run
앫
there is a malfunction in the
electro-hydraulic brake system
앫
there is a malfunction in the power supply or in the vehicle’s electrical system
as that will be necessary to adequately control the towed vehicle.
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on
the ground, make certain that the SmartKey
is in starter switch position 2.
If the SmartKey is left in starter switch
position 0 for an extended period of time, it
can no longer be turned in the switch. In this
case, the steering is locked. To unlock, remove SmartKey from starter switch and reinsert.
421
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Warning!
G
The brake system requires electrical power
to operate.
A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply
or electrical system may impair brake system operation and switch it into its emergency operation mode. To brake, the driver
must then apply significantly greater brake
pedal pressure and depress the pedal much
further to obtain the expected braking effect. If necessary, apply full pressure to the
brake pedal. Brakes are only applied to the
front wheels. Stopping distance is
increased! Adapt your driving style
accordingly. For more information, see
“Electro-hydraulic brake system”
(컄 page 92).
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.
422
! When towing the vehicle with all wheels on
the ground, please note the following:
With the automatic central locking activated and
the SmartKey in starter switch position 2, or
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button in position 2,
the vehicle doors lock if the left front wheel as
well as the right rear wheel are turning at vehicle
speeds of approx. 9 mph (15 km/h) or more.
To prevent the vehicle door locks from locking,
deactivate the automatic central locking
(컄 page 119).
Towing of the vehicle should only be done using
the properly installed towing eye bolt. Never
attach tow cable, tow rope or tow rod to the
vehicle chassis, frame or suspension parts.
i To signal turns while being towed with the
hazard warning flasher in use, turn SmartKey in
starter switch to position 2 and activate the
combination switch for the left or right turn
signal in the usual manner – only the selected
turn signal will operate.
Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard warning flasher will operate again.
i If the battery is disconnected or discharged
앫
the SmartKey will not turn in the starter
switch
앫
the gear selector lever will remain locked in
position P.
For more information, see “Batteries”
(컄 page 414) and “Jump starting” (컄 page 419).
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Installing towing eye bolt
To reinstall cover:
왘
Front
왘
Fit locking tabs of cover under the
lower edge of the opening in the
bumper.
Apply even pressure on the upper part
of the cover until it snaps into place.
왘
Fold cover 1 down in direction of arrow to reveal the threaded hole for the
towing eye bolt.
To reinstall cover:
왘
Fit cover 1 and snap into place.
Installing towing eye bolt
Rear
Example illustration (SL 550 and SL 600
without Sport Package)
왘
Take the towing eye bolt and the wheel
wrench from the vehicle tool kit
(컄 page 388).
왘
Screw towing eye bolt into threaded
hole to its stop.
왘
Insert wheel wrench into towing eye
and tighten towing eye bolt by turning
it clockwise.
1 Cover on passenger side of front
bumper
To remove cover:
왘
Press mark on cover 1 in direction of
arrow.
왘
Lift cover 1 off to reveal the threaded
hole for towing eye bolt.
Removing towing eye bolt
1 Cover on passenger side of rear
bumper
To remove cover:
왘
Insert flat, blunt object as a lever into
upper left or right recess of cover 1.
왘
Loosen cover 1 using the lever.
왘
Take the wheel wrench from the
vehicle tool kit (컄 page 388).
왘
Insert wheel wrench into towing eye
and loosen towing eye bolt by turning it
counterclockwise.
왘
Remove towing eye bolt.
423
Practical hints
Fuses
The electrical fuses in your vehicle serve to
switch off malfunctioning power circuits.
If a fuse is blown, the components and systems secured by that fuse will stop operating.
Warning!
G
Only use fuses approved by Mercedes-Benz
with the specified amperage for the system
in question and do not attempt to repair or
bridge a blown fuse. Using other than approved fuses or using repaired or bridged
fuses may cause an overload leading to a
fire, and/or cause damage to electrical
components and/or systems. Have the
cause determined and remedied by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
i A blown fuse must be replaced by an appropiate spare fuse (recognizable by its color or the
fuse rating given on the fuse) of the amperage
recommended in the fuse chart.
Any Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to advise
you on this subject.
424
If a newly inserted fuse blows again, have
the cause determined and rectified by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Apply the parking brake (컄 page 61).
왘
Make sure the gear selector lever is set
to position P (컄 page 168).
왘
Turn off all electrical consumers.
Fuse chart
왘
Turn off the engine (컄 page 62).
The fuse chart explains the fuse allocation and fuse amperages.
왘
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
The following aids are available to help you
replace fuses. They are located in the trunk
with the vehicle tool kit (컄 page 388).
앫
Before replacing fuses:
앫
Spare fuses
앫
Fuse extractor
The electrical fuses are located in different
fuse boxes:
앫
on the driver’s side of the engine compartment (컄 page 425)
앫
on the passenger side of the engine
compartment (컄 page 425)
앫
under passenger-side rear storage
compartment (컄 page 426)
앫
in the trunk (컄 page 426)
왘
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: Open
the driver’s door.
Practical hints
Fuses
Opening
Fuse boxes in engine compartment
왘
왘
Open the hood (컄 page 274).
The fuse boxes are located on the driver’s
and passenger side in front of the bulkhead (wall separating the engine and passenger compartment).
Move slide to position 3 and lift
cover 1.
Closing
Fuse box on passenger side
1 Fuse box cover
2 Locking
3 Unlocking
왘
Hook cover 1 onto tabs and close it.
왘
Move slide to position 2.
! The fuse box cover must be properly positioned with the slide at the ‹ symbol to prevent moisture or dirt from entering the fuse box
and possibly impairing fuse operation.
왘
Close the hood after checking or replacing fuses (컄 page 275).
Fuse box on driver’s side
1 Fuse box cover
2 Locking
3 Unlocking
425
Practical hints
Fuses
Fuse box in passenger compartment
왘
The fuse box is located under the rear passenger-side storage compartment.
Remove storage compartment floor 2
in direction of arrow.
You can now access the fuses.
왘
To reinstall storage compartment
floor 2 after checking or replacing
fuses, follow the procedure in reverse
order.
Emergency engine shut-down
If the engine cannot be turned off as described, you may use the following emergency procedure.
왘
Take the fuse chart from the vehicle
tool kit (컄 page 388).
왘
Find row “Engine emergency stop” in
the fuse chart table to identify the
fuses that have to removed as well as
their locations.
왘
Remove the respective fuses.
Fuse in trunk
The fuse in the trunk is located on the
right-hand side of the trunk.
왘
1 Clips
2 Storage compartment floor
왘
Open the rear passenger-side storage
compartment (컄 page 235).
왘
Lift both clips 1.
426
Lift up the trunk floor cover.
Technical data
Parts service
Warranty coverage
Identification labels
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Engine
Rims and tires
Electrical system
Main dimensions
Weights
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
427
Technical data
Parts service
The “Technical data” section provides the
necessary technical data for your vehicle.
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers
maintain a stock of Genuine
Mercedes-Benz parts required for maintenance and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts distribution centers
provide quick and reliable parts service.
More than 300 000 different parts for
Mercedes-Benz models are available.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subjected to stringent quality inspections. Each
part has been specifically developed, manufactured or selected for and adapted to
Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Therefore, Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
should be installed.
428
! The use of non-genuine Mercedes-Benz
parts and accessories not authorized by
Mercedes-Benz could damage the vehicle, which
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty, or could compromise the vehicle’s durability or safety.
Technical data
Warranty coverage
왔 Warranty coverage
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of
the warranties printed in the Service and
Warranty Information booklet. Your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will exchange or repair any defective parts originally installed in the vehicle in accordance
with the terms of the following warranties:
앫
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
앫
Emission System Warranty
앫
Emission Performance Warranty
앫
California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont Emission Control Systems
Warranty
Replacement parts and accessories are
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and
Accessories warranties, copies of which
are available at any Mercedes-Benz Center.
Loss of Service and Warranty
Information Booklet
Should you lose your Service and Warranty
Information booklet, have an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replacement. It will be mailed to you.
429
Technical data
Identification labels
1 Certification label
(includes Paintwork code)
Example certification label (U.S. vehicles)
2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
3 Paintwork code
Example certification label (Canada
vehicles)
2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
3 Paintwork code
i Data shown on certification labels are for illustration purposes only. These data are specific
to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in
the illustration. Refer to certification label on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle.
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is
also embossed under a trim below the passenger-side rear storage compartment lid.
430
Technical data
Identification labels
4 Storage compartment lid
5 Trim
6 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
(below right rear storage compartment)
왘
Open storage compartment lid 4.
왘
Remove storage compartment trim 5.
The VIN 6 is located on the metal
strap above the floor carpet.
7 Engine number (engraved on engine)
8 VIN, visible (lower edge of windshield)
9 Emission control information label,
includes both federal and California
certification exhaust emission standards
a Vacuum line routing diagram label
i When ordering parts, please specify vehicle
identification and engine number.
431
Technical data
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
SL 550
SL 55 AMG
SL 600, SL 65 AMG
1 Idler pulley
2 Idler pulley
3 Automatic belt tensioner
4 ABC tandem pump (pump for
power-steering assistance and ABC
chassis)
5 Air conditioning compressor
6 Crankshaft
7 Coolant pump
8 Generator (alternator)
The SL 55 AMG has two poly-V-belts (belt
one shown in purple/belt two shown in
black).
1 Automatic belt tensioner
2 ABC tandem pump (pump for
power-steering assistance and ABC
chassis)
3 Air conditioning compressor
4 Crankshaft
5 Coolant pump
6 Generator (alternator)
7 Idler pulley
8 Idler pulley
9 Idler pulley
432
1 Idler pulley
2 Automatic belt tensioner
3 ABC tandem pump (pump for
power-steering assistance and ABC
chassis)
4 Air conditioning compressor
5 Crankshaft
6 Coolant pump
7 Generator (alternator)
8 Idler pulley
9 Automatic belt tensioner
a Supercharger
Technical data
Engine
왔 Engine
Model
SL 550 (230.471)1
SL 600 (230.477)1
Engine
273
275
Mode of operation
4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders
8
12
Bore
3.82 in (97.00 mm)
3.23 in (82.00 mm)
Stroke
3.31 in (84.00 mm)
3.43 in (87.00 mm)
3
Total piston displacement
333.3 cu in (5461 cm )
336.4 cu in (5513 cm3)
Compression ratio
10.7:1
9:1
Output acc. to SAE J 1349
382 hp/6000
(285 kW/6000 rpm)
510 hp/5000 rpm2
(380 kW/5000 rpm)
Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349
391 lb-ft/2700 rpm
(530 Nm/2800 - 4800 rpm)
612 lb-ft/1900 - 3500 rpm
(830 Nm/1900 - 3500 rpm)
Maximum engine speed
6500 rpm
5950 rpm
Firing order
1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
1-12-5-8-3-10-6-7-2-11-4-9
Poly-V-belt
2404 mm
2335 mm
1
2
rpm2
The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.
Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
433
Technical data
Engine
Model
SL 55 AMG (230.474)1
SL 65 AMG (230.479)1
Engine
113
275
Mode of operation
4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders
8
12
Bore
3.25 in (82.60 mm)
3.25 in (82.60 mm)
Stroke
3.66 in (93.00 mm)
3.66 in (93.00 mm)
3
Total piston displacement
331.8 cu in (5439 cm )
364.9 cu in (5980 cm3)
Compression ratio
11:1
9:1
Output acc. to SAE J 1349
510 hp/6100
(380 kW/6100 rpm)
603 hp/4800-5100 rpm2
(450 kW/4800-5100 rpm)
Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349
530 lb-ft/2600-4000 rpm
(720 Nm/2600-4000 rpm)
738 lb-ft/2000-4000 rpm
(1000 Nm/2000-4000 rpm)
Maximum engine speed
6500 rpm
5950 rpm
Firing order
1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
1-12-5-8-3-10-6-7-2-11-4-9
Poly-V-belt
2462 mm/1289 mm
2335 mm
1
2
rpm2
The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.
Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
434
Technical data
Rims and tires
왔 Rims and tires
! Only use tires which have been tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz. Tires approved by
Mercedes-Benz are developed to provide best
possible performance in conjunction with the
driving safety systems on your vehicle such as
ABS or ESP®. Tires specially developed for your
vehicle and tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz can be identified by finding the
following on the tire’s sidewall:
앫
MO = Mercedes-Benz Original equipment
tires
AMG vehicles:
Does not apply to all approved tires on AMG
vehicles. For information on tested and approved tires for AMG vehicles, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫
MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
(tires with limited run-flat characteristics)
original equipment tires
Using tires other than those approved by
Mercedes-Benz may result in damage that is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
i For information on driving with MOExtended
tires, see “MOExtended system”(컄 page 301).
! Using tires other than those approved by
Mercedes-Benz can have detrimental effects,
such as
앫
poor handling characteristics
앫
increased noise
앫
increased fuel consumption
Moreover, tires and rims not approved by
Mercedes-Benz may, under load, exhibit dimensional variations and different tire deformation
characteristics that could cause them to come
into contact with the vehicle body or axle parts.
Damage to the tires or the vehicle may be the result.
i Further information on tires and rims is
available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. A placard with the recommended tire inflation pressures is located on the driver’s door
B-pillar. Some vehicles may have supplemental
tire inflation pressure information for driving at
high speeds (컄 page 292) or for vehicle loads
less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition
(컄 page 292). If such information is provided, it
can be found on the placard located on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
The tire inflation pressure should be checked
regularly and should only be adjusted on cold
tires. Follow tire manufacturer’s maintenance
recommendation included with vehicle.
i The following pages also list the approved
wheel rim and tire sizes for equipping your vehicles with winter tires. Winter tires are not available as standard or optional factory equipment,
but can be purchased from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Depending on vehicle model and the standard or
optional factory-equipped wheel rim/tire configuration on your vehicle (Performance Package,
Sport Package etc.), equipping your vehicle with
winter tires approved for your vehicle model may
also require the purchase of two or four wheel
rims of the recommended size for use with these
winter tires. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for more information.
435
Technical data
Rims and tires
Same size tires
18" tires
SL 550
SL 600
SL 55 AMG
Rims (light alloy)
8.5 J x 18 H2
8.5 J x 18 H2
8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset
1.38 in (35 mm)
1.38 in (35 mm)
1.18 in (30 mm)
-
-
-
255/40 R18 95V M+S .
255/40 R18 95V M+S .
255/40 R18 95V M+S .
Summer
tires1
Winter tires
1
2
1,2
Radial-ply tires
Not available as factory equipment.
19" tires
SL 55 AMG (Performance Package*)
SL 65 AMG
Rims (light alloy)
8.5 J x 19 EH2
Wheel offset
1.18 in (30 mm)
Summer tires
-
Winter tires
1
2
1,2
Radial-ply tires
Not available as factory equipment.
436
255/35 R19 96V XL (Extra Load) M+S .
Technical data
Rims and tires
Mixed size tires
SL 550
SL 600
Rims (light alloy)
8.5 J x 18 H2
8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset
1.38 in (35 mm)
1.38 in (35 mm)
255/40 R18 95W
255/40 R18 95Y
Rims (light alloy)
9.5 J x 18 H2
9.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset
1.57 in (40 mm)
1.57 in (40 mm)
285/35 R18 97W
285/35 R18 97Y
Front axle:
1
Summer tires
Rear axle:
1,2
Summer tires
1
2
Radial-ply tires
Must not be used with snow chains.
437
Technical data
Rims and tires
SL 55 AMG*
SL 550 (Sport Package*)
SL 600 (Sport Package*)
SL 55 AMG
SL 55 AMG (Performance Package*)
SL 65 AMG
Rims (light alloy)
8.5 J x 18 H2
8.5 J x 19 EH2
Wheel offset
1.18 in (30 mm)
1.18 in (30 mm)
255/40 ZR18 95Y
255/35 ZR19 96Y XL (Extra Load)
Rims (light alloy)
9.5 J x 18 H2
9.5 J x 19 EH2
Wheel offset
1.30 in (33 mm)
1.22 in (31 mm)
285/35 ZR18 97Y
285/30 ZR19 98Y XL (Extra Load)
Front axle:
Summer tires
1
Rear axle:
Summer
1
2
tires1,2
Radial-ply tires
Must not be used with snow chains.
438
Technical data
Rims and tires
MOExtended tires*
SL 550
SL 550 (Sport Package*)
SL 600
SL 600 (Sport Package*)
SL 55 AMG
Front axle:
Rims (light alloy)
8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset
1.18 in (30 mm)
1,2
Summer tires
1,2,4
Winter tires
255/40 R18 95Y MOExtended
255/40 R18 95V M+S .MOExtended
Rear axle:
Rims (light alloy)
9.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset
1.30 in (33 mm)
Summer
tires1,2,3
1,2,3,4
Winter tires
1
2
3
4
285/35 R18 97Y MOExtended
285/35 R18 97V M+S .MOExtended
Radial-ply tires
Must be used in conjunction with Tire Pressure Monitoring System (U.S. vehicles), Run Flat Indicator
(Canada vehicles), or Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring System* (Canada vehicles) only.
Must not be used with snow chains.
Not available as factory equipment.
439
Technical data
Rims and tires
Spare wheel
Rim
Wheel offset
Collapsible
tire1
Recommended tire
inflation pressure
1
SL 550
SL 600
SL 55 AMG
SL 55 AMG (Performance Package*)
SL 65 AMG
6 B x 17 H2
6 B x 18
6.5 B x 19
0.98 in (25 mm)
0.98 in (25 mm)
0.55 in (14 mm)
185/60-17 93P
175/55-18 95P
175/50-19 97P
36 psi (2.5 bar)
51 psi (3.5 bar)
51 psi (3.5 bar)
Must not be used with snow chains.
! Please compare the recommended tire inflation pressure for your vehicle with the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label located on
the spare wheel rim.
If the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label
on the spare wheel rim differs from the values
given in this Operator’s Manual, inflate the collapsible tire to the recommended tire inflation
pressure given on the yellow label on the spare
wheel rim.
440
i Please note that the tire inflation pressure of
the collapsible tire differs from the tire inflation
pressure of the road tires.
Technical data
Electrical system
왔 Electrical system
Model
SL 550
SL 600
SL 55 AMG
SL 65 AMG
Generator (alternator)
14 V/150 A
14 V/180 A
14 V/180 A
14 V/180 A
Starter motor
12 V/1.7 kW
12 V/1.7 kW
12 V/1.7 kW
12 V/1.7 kW
Starter battery
12 V/35 Ah
12 V/35 Ah
12 V/35 Ah
12 V/35 Ah
Battery for electrical consumers
12 V/70 Ah
12 V/70 Ah
12 V/70 Ah
12 V/70 Ah
Spark plugs
Bosch Y 7 MPP 33
NGK PLKR6A
NGK IFR6QG
NGK ILFR6A
NGK IFR6QG
Electrode gap
0.031 in (0.8 mm)
0.028 in (0.7 mm)
0.031 in (0.8 mm)
0.028 in (0.7 mm)
Tightening torque
15 – 18 lb-ft
(20 – 25 Nm)
18 – 22 lb-ft
(25 – 30 Nm)
18 – 22 lb-ft
(25 – 30 Nm)
18 – 22 lb-ft
(25 – 30 Nm)
441
Technical data
Main dimensions
Model
SL 550
SL 600
SL 55 AMG
SL 65 AMG
Overall vehicle length
178.5 in (4540 mm) 178.5 in (4540 mm) 178.5 in (4535 mm) 178.5 in (4535 mm)
Overall vehicle length when
opening/closing hardtop
185.6 in (4713 mm) 185.6 in (4713 mm) 185.6 in (4713 mm) 185.6 in (4713 mm)
Overall vehicle width
80.0 in (2033 mm)
(exterior rear view mirrors folded out)
80.0 in (2033 mm)
80.0 in (2033 mm)
80.0 in (2033 mm)
Overall vehicle width
(exterior rear view mirrors folded in)
71.9 in (1827 mm)
71.9 in (1827 mm)
71.9 in (1827 mm)
71.9 in (1827 mm)
Overall vehicle height
51.0 in (1295 mm)
51.0 in (1295 mm)
51.0 in (1295 mm)
51.0 in (1295 mm)
Overall vehicle height when
opening/closing hardtop
65.9 in (1674 mm)
65.9 in (1674 mm)
65.9 in (1674 mm)
65.9 in (1674 mm)
Wheelbase
100.8 in (2560 mm) 100.8 in (2560 mm) 100.8 in (2560 mm) 100.8 in (2560 mm)
Track, front
61.4 in (1559 mm)
61.4 in (1559 mm)
61.8 in (1569 mm)
61.8 in (1569 mm)
Track, rear
60.5 in (1537 mm)
60.5 in (1537 mm)
61.2 in (1555 mm)
61.1 in (1551 mm)
Turning circle
36.1 ft (11.0m)
36.1 ft (11.0m)
36.1 ft (11.0m)
36.1 ft (11.0m)
442
Technical data
Weights
왔 Weights
Trunk load max.
220 lbs (100 kg)
443
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Capacities
G
Warning!
Vehicle components and their respective
lubricants must match. Therefore use only
products tested and approved by
Mercedes Benz.
Please refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet, or inquire at your
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Comply with all valid regulations with respect to handling, storing and disposing of
service fluids. Otherwise you could endanger persons or the environment.
Keep service fluids out of the reach of children.
If a service fluid is swallowed, contact a physician immediately.
Model
Capacity
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Engine with oil filter
SL 550
SL 600
SL 55 AMG
SL 65 AMG
9.0 US qt (8.5 l)
8.5 US qt (8.0 l)
9.0 US qt (8.5 l)
8.5 US qt (8.0 l)
Approved engine oils
Automatic transmission
SL 550
SL 600
SL 55 AMG
SL 65 AMG
9.5 US qt (9.0 l)
8.0 US qt (7.5 l)
9.1 US qt (8.6 l)
8.0 US qt (7.5 l)
MB Automatic Transmission Fluid
444
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Model
Capacity
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
SL 550
SL 600
SL 55 AMG
SL 65 AMG
1.3 US qt (1.2 l)
1.3 US qt (1.2 l)
1.3 US qt (1.2 l)
1.3 US qt (1.2 l)
Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90
Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90
Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90
Hypoid gear oil SAE 75 W 140
Hydraulic system for active body control (ABC)
approx. 4.0 US qt (3.8 l)
MB Hydraulic Fluid
Power steering
approx. 1.1 US qt (1.0 l)
MB Power Steering Fluid (Pentosin
CHF 11S)
Front wheel hubs
approx. 3.0 oz (85 g) each High temperature roller bearing grease
Brake system
1.1 US qt (1.05 l)
Rear axle
MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4+)
Cooling system
SL 550
SL 600
SL 55 AMG
SL 65 AMG
approx. 12.3 US qt (11.6 l) MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
approx. 13.6 US qt (12.9 l)
approx. 12.7 US qt (12.0 l)
approx. 16.4 US qt (15.5 l)
Low temperature cooling system
SL 600
approx. 2.2 US qt (2.1 l)
SL 65 AMG approx. 3.1 US qt (2.9 l)
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
Fuel tank
including a reserve of
All models
SL 550
SL 600
SL 55 AMG
SL 65 AMG
Premium unleaded gasoline:
Minimum Posted Octane 91
(Avg. of 96 RON/86 MON)
21.1 US gal (80.0 l)
2.6 US gal (10.0 l)
2.6 US gal (10.0 l)
3.7 US gal (14.0 l)
3.7 US gal (14.0 l)
445
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Model
Capacity
Air conditioning system
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant oil (never R-12)
Hydraulic system for retractable hardtop
0.42 US qt (0.4 l)
MB Hydraulic Fluid
Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system
7.4 US qt (7 l)
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate1
1
Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water for temperatures above freezing or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing. Follow suggested mixing ratios (컄 page 452).
Engine oils
Engine oils are specifically tested for their
suitability in our engines and durability for
our service intervals. Therefore, only use
approved engine oils and oil filters required for vehicles with Maintenance
System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada
vehicles). For a listing of approved engine
oils and oil filters, refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet, or contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
! Using engine oils and oil filters of specification other than those expressly required for the
Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS
(Canada vehicles), or changing oil and oil filter at
change intervals longer than those called for by
the Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS
(Canada vehicles) will result in engine or emission control system damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Engine oil additives
Please follow Maintenance System
(U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles) recommendations for scheduled oil changes. Failure to
do so could result in engine or emission control
system damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Air conditioning refrigerant
Do not blend oil additives with engine oil.
They may damage the engine.
Damage or malfunctions resulting from
blending oil additives are not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG
lubricating oil are used in the air conditioner system.
Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based
lubricating oil. Otherwise damage to the
system will occur.
446
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Brake fluid
Premium unleaded gasoline
During vehicle operation, the boiling point
of the brake fluid is continuously reduced
through the absorption of moisture from
the atmosphere.
Warning!
G
Under extremely strenuous operating conditions, this moisture content can lead to the
formation of bubbles in the system, thus
reducing the system’s efficiency.
Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced
regularly. Refer to your vehicle’s Maintenance Booklet for replacement interval.
Warning!
G
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.
It burns violently and can cause serious
injury. Whenever you are around gasoline,
avoid inhaling fumes and skin contact,
extinguish all smoking materials. Never
allow sparks, flame or smoking materials
near gasoline!
! To maintain the engine’s durability and performance, premium unleaded gasoline must be
used. If premium unleaded is not available and
low octane fuel is used, follow these precautions:
앫
have the fuel tank only partially filled with unleaded regular and fill up with premium unleaded as soon as possible
앫
avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration
앫
do not exceed an engine speed of 3000 rpm
if the vehicle is loaded with a light load such
as two occupants and no luggage
앫
do not exceed 2/3 of maximum accelerator
pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or
operating in mountainous terrain
Only brake fluid approved by
Mercedes-Benz is recommended. Your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
provide you with additional information.
447
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Fuel requirements
Only use premium unleaded fuel:
앫
The octane number (posted at the
pump) must be 91 min. It is an average
of both the Research (R) octane number and the Motor (M) octane number:
(R+M)/2). This is also known as the
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates
such as ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be
used provided the ratio of any one of these
oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed
10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%.
The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not
exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.
448
Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is
not allowed. Gasohol, which contains
10% ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline,
can be used.
These blends must also meet all other fuel
requirements, such as resistance to spark
knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.
Gasoline additives
A major concern among engine manufacturers is carbon build-up caused by gasoline. Mercedes-Benz recommends only the
use of quality gasoline containing additives
that prevent the build-up of carbon deposits.
After an extended period of using fuels
without such additives carbon deposits
can build up, especially on the intake
valves and in the combustion area, leading
to engine performance problems such as:
앫
Warm-up hesitation
앫
Unstable idle
앫
Knocking/pinging
앫
Misfire
앫
Power loss
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
In areas where carbon deposits may be encountered due to lack of availability of gasolines which contain these additives,
Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of
additives approved by us for use on
Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Refer to Factory
Approved Service Products pamphlet for a
listing of approved product(s). Follow directions on product label.
Do not blend other fuel additives with fuel.
This only results in unnecessary cost and
may be harmful to the engine operation.
Damage or malfunction resulting from
poor fuel quality or from blending additional fuel additives other than those tested
and approved by us for use on
Mercedes-Benz vehicles listed in the
Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet are not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Coolants
The engine coolant is a mixture of water
and anticorrosion/antifreeze, which provides:
앫
corrosion protection
앫
freeze protection
앫
boiling protection (by increasing the
boiling point)
The cooling system was filled at the factory
with a coolant providing freeze protection
to approximately -22°F (-30°C) and corrosion protection.
! Add premixed coolant solution only. Adding
water and MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
separately from each other, could cause engine
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
If the antifreeze mixture is effective to
-22°F (-30°C), the boiling point of the coolant in the pressurized cooling system is
reached at approximately 266°F (130°C).
The coolant solution must be used year
round to provide the necessary corrosion
protection and increase in the boil-over
protection. Refer to Maintenance Booklet
for replacement interval.
Coolant system design and coolant used
stipulate the replacement interval. The replacement interval published in the
Maintenance Booklet is only applicable if
MB 325.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze solution or other Mercedes-Benz approved
products of equal specification (see
Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet) are used to renew the coolant concentration or bring it back up to the proper
level.
449
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
To provide important corrosion protection,
the solution must be at least 45% anticorrosion/antifreeze (equivalent to freeze
protection to approx. - 22°F [-30°C]). If
you use a solution that is more than 55%
anticorrosion/antifreeze (freeze protection to approx. - 49°F [-45°C]), the engine
temperature will increase due to the lower
heat transfer capability of the solution.
Therefore, do not use more than this
amount of anticorrosion/antifreeze.
450
If the coolant level is low, water and
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
should be used to bring it up to the proper
level (have cooling system checked for
signs of leakage). Please make sure the
mixture is in accordance with label instructions.
The water in the cooling system must meet
minimum requirements, which are usually
satisfied by normal drinking water. If you
are not sure about the water quality, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze
Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum parts. The use of aluminum components in motor vehicle engines
necessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze
coolant used in such engines be specifically formulated to protect the aluminum
parts. (Failure to use such anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant will result in a significantly shortened service life.)
Therefore, the following product is strongly
recommended for use in your vehicle:
Mercedes-Benz 325.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze agent.
Before the start of the winter season (or
once a year in hot southern regions), you
should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze
concentration checked. The coolant is also
regularly checked each time you bring your
vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for service.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity
Model
Approx. freeze protection
– 35°F (– 37°C)
– 49°F (– 45°C)
SL 550
6.1 US qt (5.8 l)
6.8 US qt (6.4 l)
SL 600 (main cooling system)
6.9 US qt (6.5 l)
7.5 US qt (7.1 l)
SL 600 (low temperature cooling system)
1.2 US qt (1.1 l)
1.3 US qt (1.2 l)
SL 55 AMG
6.3 US qt (6.0 l)
7.0 US qt (6.6 l)
SL 65 AMG (main cooling system)
8.2 US qt (7.75 l)
9.0 US qt (8.5 l)
SL 65 AMG (low temperature cooling system) 1.5 US qt (1.45 l)
1.7 US qt (1.6 l)
451
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Windshield and headlamp washer
system
Both the windshield and headlamp washer
systems are supplied from the windshield
washer fluid reservoir.
The windshield and headlamp washer fluid
reservoir has a capacity of approx.
7.4 US qt (7 l).
왘
Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate and water (or concentrate and commercially available
premixed windshield washer
solvent/antifreeze, depending on ambient temperatures).
Warning!
G
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze
on hot engine parts because it may ignite
and burn. You could be seriously burned.
452
Windshield and headlamp washer fluid
mixing ratio
For temperatures above freezing point, use
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate
“MB SummerFit” and water:
앫
1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts
water
(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to
1 gal [4.0 l] water)
For temperatures below freezing point, use
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate
“MB SummerFit” and commercially available premixed windshield washer
solvent/antifreeze:
앫
1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts
solvent
(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to
1 gal [4.0 l] solvent)
Index
A
ABC 225
Messages in display 349
Oil level 279
ABS 87
Indicator lamp 29, 334
Messages in the multifunction
display 351, 352
Warning lamp 27, 332
Accelerator position, automatic
transmission 171
Accessory weight 312
Accident 59
Active Body Control see ABC
Air bags 68
Children in the vehicle 83
Front 71
Front passenger front air bag off
indicator lamp 76
Head-thorax 72
Knee bag 72
Occupant Classification System
(OCS) 72
Passenger 72
Air conditioning system see Automatic climate control system
Air distribution 188, 189
Air pressure 312
Tire inflation pressure 291
Air pump 410
Air recirculation mode 191
Air vents 185
Air volume 188, 190
Alarm system see Anti-theft systems
Alignment bolt (vehicle tool kit) 409
Anticorrosion/antifreeze 445, 451
Antiglare, Interior rear view mirror 180
Antilock Brake System see ABS
Anti-theft systems
Anti-theft alarm system 96
Immobilizer 96
Tow-away alarm 98
Aquaplaning see Hydroplaning
Armrest 234
Ashtray 31, 239
Aspect ratio 312
ATF 279
Auto-dimming, Rear view mirrors 180
Automatic central locking 119
Control system 162
Automatic climate control system 184
Air conditioning, Cooling 193
Air conditioning refrigerant 446
Air distribution 188, 189
Air recirculation mode 191
Air vents 185
Air volume 188, 190
Control panel 185
Deactivating system 187
Defrosting 183, 190
Residual heat utilization 194
Temperature 188
Temperature sensor 33
Ventilated glove box 195
Automatic lighting control, Interior
lighting 135
Automatic locking when driving 119
Automatic shift program 173
Automatic transmission 168
Accelerator position 171
Comfort program mode 173
Emergency operation
(Limp-Home Mode) 179
Gear ranges 172
Gear selector lever 32, 168
Gear selector lever position 168, 170
453
Index
Gear shifting malfunctions 179
Kickdown 171
Manual shifting 174
One-touch gearshifting 174
Program mode selector switch 32,
173
Starting the engine 52
Transmission fluid level 279
Automatic Transmission Fluid see ATF
B
Backrest
Lumbar support 122
Multicontour seat* 122
Power seat 44
Shoulder region support 122
Backup lamp
Messages in the multifunction
display 382
Replacing bulb 398, 402
Bar 312
BAS 89
Batteries, SmartKey
Checking battery condition 105
Replacing 395
454
Batteries, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
Checking battery condition 110
Replacing 395
Batteries, Vehicle 281
Charging 417
Consumer battery 281, 389, 414
Jump starting 419
Messages in the multifunction
display 366
Starter battery 281, 414
Bead 312
Bi-Xenon headlamps* 398
Block heater (Canada only) 317
Brake Assist System see BAS
Brake lamps 398
High mounted 398
Messages in the multifunction
display 380
Brake pads
Messages in the multifunction
display 366
Brake system
Messages in the multifunction
display 370
Brakes 260
BAS 89
Brake fluid 272, 445, 447
Electro-hydraulic brake system 92
High-performance brake system (AMG
vehicles only) 262
Warning lamp 335
Break-in period 258
Bulbs
Messages in the multifunction
display 380
Replacing 397
C
California retail buyers and lessees,
important notice for 11
Call priority, Tele Aid 249
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants 444
Cargo area see Trunk
Carpets, cleaning 329
Catalytic converter 269
CD changer 150
CD player 150
Operating 151
Index
Center console
Lower part 32
Upper part 31
Central locking
Automatic 119, 162
Central locking/unlocking switch 31,
119
Locking/unlocking from inside 119
Certification label 430
Check engine see Lamps, indicator and
warning
Checking tire pressure electronically with
the Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (Advanced TPMS)*,
(Canada only) 298
Children in the vehicle
Air bags 83
Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp 76, 345
Infant and child restraint systems 83
Occupant Classification System
(OCS) 72
Cigarette lighter 239
Clock 25, 157
Cockpit 24
Cold tire inflation pressure 312
COMAND system 31
Driving instructions 268
Combination switch
High beam 56, 133
Turn signals 56
Windshield wipers 57
Consumer battery 281
Control and operation of radio
transmitters 268
Control system 139, 142
Control system menus
AMG Menu 146
AUDIO 149
NAV 151
Settings 153
Standard display 145
TEL* 165
Trip computer 163
Vehicle status message memory
Control system submenus 143
Convenience 162
Instrument cluster 156
Lighting 159
Time 157
Vehicle 162
Convenience feature 201
Coolant 449
Anticorrosion/antifreeze mixing ratio
and quantity 451
Checking coolant level 280
Coolant warning lamp 337
Messages in the multifunction
display 371, 373
Temperature 270
Temperature gauge 137
Corner-illuminating front fog lamps 132
Corner-illuminating front fog lamps*
Replacing bulbs 397
Courtesy lighting 135
Cruise control 209
Messages in the multifunction
display 352, 353
Cup holder 238
Curb weight 312
152
D
Daytime running lamp mode 130
Setting 159
Deep water see Standing water
Defogging, Windshield 191
Defrosting, Front 190
Defrosting, Rear 183
455
Index
Delayed switch-off
Exterior lamps 160
Interior lighting 161
Department of Transportation see DOT
Difficulties
While driving 59
With starting the engine 53
Digital clock see Clock
Digital speedometer 145
Dimensions, Vehicle 442
Dipstick see Oil dipstick
Direction of rotation (tires) 286
Displays
Digital speedometer 145
Distronic* 215
Maintenance service indicator 319
Multifunction display 139
Outside temperature 138, 145
Symbol messages 365
Text messages 349
Vehicle status message memory 152
Vehicle status messages 347
Distance to empty (range), Trip
computer 165
456
Distance warning function* 224
Activating 225
Deactivating 225
Intermittent warning sound 224
Symbol 217
Distronic indicator lamp* 27
Distronic* 213
“Resume” function 220
Activating 218
Cleaning system sensor cover 325
Control system 151, 217
Distance warning function 224
Driving hints 222
System sensor cover 325
Warning and indicator lamps 215,
216, 224, 339
Door
Control panel 36
Handle, Inside 36
Locking/unlocking,
KEYLESS-GO* 39, 64
Locking/unlocking, Mechanical
key 391, 393
Locking/unlocking, SmartKey 38, 63
Messages in the multifunction
display 374
Opening from inside 111
Storage compartment 233
Door control panel 36
Door handle 36
DOT 312
Drinking and driving 259
Driving
Abroad 268
Driving off 262
Electro-hydraulic brake system 95
Hydroplaning 264
In winter 266, 316
Instructions 54, 259
Problems 59
Safety systems 87
Systems 209
Through standing water 267
With Distronic* 222
Driving safety systems 87
ABS 87
BAS 87, 89
Electro-hydraulic brake system 87,
92
Electronic traction system 91
ESP® 87, 89
Index
Driving systems 209
ABC 225
Cruise control 209
Distronic* 213
Parktronic* 228
DTR see Distronic*
E
Easy-entry/exit feature 46, 162
Messages in the multifunction
display 375
Electric air pump 389, 410
Electrical outlet see Power outlet
Electro-hydraulic brake system 87, 92
Activation 93
Deactivation 94
Driving hints 95
Messages in the multifunction
display 367, 368
Self-check 94
Warning lamp 92
Electronic Stability Program see ESP®
Emergency calls
Tele Aid 244, 245
Emergency engine shut-down 426
Emergency operation (Limp-Home
Mode) 179
Emergency operations
Automatic transmission (Limp-Home
Mode) 179
Glove box, Unlocking 392
Load assist, Lowering 394
Locking/unlocking the vehicle 391,
393
Remote door unlock, Tele Aid 250
Trunk lid, Releasing from the
inside 117
Trunk lid, Unlocking 392
Emergency Tensioning Device see ETD
Emission control 269
Information label 431
System warranties 10
Vacuum line routing diagram
label 431
Engine
Block heater (Canada only) 317
Break-in recommendations 258
Cleaning 324
Compartment 274
Malfunction indicator lamp 29, 336
Number 431
Poly-V-belt layout 432
Starting 52
Tachometer 29
Technical data 433
Turning off 62
Engine coolant see Coolant
Engine oil 275, 446
Adding 278, 444
Additives 446
Checking level, With control
system 276
Checking level, With oil dipstick 278
Consumption 275
Filler neck 278, 279
Messages in the multifunction
display 277, 375
Oil dipstick 278
ESP® 87, 89
Switch 32
Switching off 91
Switching on 92
Synchronizing 355
Warning lamp 27, 332
ETD 81
Safety guidelines 70
Warning and indictor lamps 342
Exterior lamp switch 128
Exterior rear view mirrors 48, 180
457
Index
F
Filler neck, Engine oil 278, 279
First aid kit 388
Flat tire 405
Preparing the vehicle 405
Spare wheel 388, 405
Flexible Service System see FSS
Fluids
Automatic climate control
system 444
Automatic transmission 279, 444
Brake system 272, 444, 447
Capacities 444
Engine coolant 280, 444, 449
Engine oil 275, 444, 446
Power steering 444
Retractable hardtop, Hydraulics 444
Windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning system 444
Fog lamps 131
Messages in the multifunction
display 380, 382
Replacing bulbs 398
Front air bags 71
Front lamps see Headlamps
458
Front passenger front air bag
Messages in the multifunction
display 356–359
Front passenger front air bag off indicator
lamp 76, 345
FSS (Canada only) 319
Fuel 271
Additives 448
Capacity, Fuel tank 444
Consumption statistics 163
Filler flap 271
Fuel reserve warning lamp 29, 339
Gasoline additives 448
Gauge 29
Premium unleaded gasoline 272,
445, 447
Refueling 271
Requirements 448
Fuel filler flap
Opening 271
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Capacities 444
Functions (control system) 141
Fuse chart see Vehicle tool kit
Fuses 424
G
Garage door opener 251
Gasoline see Fuel
GAWR 312
Gear range
Automatic transmission 172
Canceling limit 175
Indicator 29
Limiting 172
Shifting into optimal 175
Gear selector lever 32, 168
Cleaning 328
Lock 52
Position 168, 170
Global locking/unlocking see Key
Glove box 233
Good visibility 180
Gross Axle Weight Rating see GAWR
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating see GVWR
Gross Vehicle Weight see GVW
GVW 312
GVWR 313
Index
H
Hard plastic trim items, cleaning 328
Hardtop see Retractable hardtop
Hazard warning flasher 133
Head restraints 44
Headlamp switch-off delay see Delayed
switch-off, exterior lamps
Headlamps
Automatic mode 129
Cleaning lenses 325
Cleaning system 180
Manual mode 129
Messages in the multifunction
display 380
Replacing bulbs 397
Switch 55, 128
Headliner, cleaning 329
Head-thorax air bag 72
Heated steering wheel* 240
High beam flasher 56, 133
High beam headlamps 56, 128, 398
Indicator lamp 29
Messages in the multifunction
display 380
Replacing bulbs 397, 400
Switching on 133
High mounted brake lamp 398
High-performance brake system
(AMG vehicles only) 262
Hood 274
Messages in display 377
Opening 274
Horn 25
HVAC see Automatic climate control
Hydroplaning 264
I
Identification labels 430
Identification number, Vehicle (VIN) 431
Ignition 40
Immobilizer 96
Indicator lamps see Lamps, indicator and
warning
Infant and child restraint systems 83
Infant and child restraint systems see
Children in the vehicle
Inflation pressure see
Tires, Inflation pressure
Inside door handle 111
Instrument cluster 26, 136
Illumination brightness 136
Lamps 332
Language 156
Messages in the multifunction
display 26, 347
Multifunction display 139
Instrument lighting see Instrument cluster,
Illumination brightness
Instrument panel see Instrument cluster
Instruments and controls see Cockpit
Interior lighting 134
Delayed switch-off 161
Interior rear view mirror 48
Antiglare position 180
Auto-dimming 180
J
Jack 389
Jacking up the vehicle
Jump starting 419
406
459
Index
K
Key, Mechanical 391
Valet locking 117
Key, SmartKey
Battery check lamp 102
Factory setting 103
Locking/unlocking 38, 63, 102
Messages in the multifunction
display 378
Opening retractable hardtop 201
Remote control 102
Replacing batteries 395
Selective setting 104
Starter switch positions 40
Turning off the engine 62
Unlocking, Trunk lid 111
Key, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 105
Battery check lamp 106
Closing, Trunk 116
Factory setting 108
Locking/unlocking 39, 63, 105
Messages in the multifunction
display 378
Opening retractable hardtop 201
Remote control 105
Replacing battery 395
460
Selective setting 109
Starter switch positions 40
Turning off the engine 62
Unlocking, Trunk lid 111
KEYLESS-GO*
Closing windows 198
Important notes 107
Locking/unlocking 39, 63, 105
Messages in the multifunction
display 378
Start/stop button 31, 40, 53
Starter switch positions 40
Starting the engine 53
Turning off the engine 62
Unlocking, Trunk lid 111
Kickdown 171
Kilopascal 313
Knee bag 72
L
Labels, identification 430
Lamp bulbs, exterior 397
Lamps, exterior
Delayed switch-off 160
Exterior lamp switch 25, 55
Front 398
Light sensor 380
Replacing bulbs for rear 398, 402
Switching off 128
Switching on 128
Lamps, indicator and warning
ABS 29, 334
ABS/ESP® 332
Brakes 335
CHECK ENGINE 336, 337
Coolant 337
DTR* 216
Electro-hydraulic brake system 92
Engine diagnostics 336, 337
Engine malfunction 29
ESP® 89
Front passenger front
air bag off 72, 76, 345
Fuel reserve 339
Seat belts 341
SRS 67, 342
Turn signals 27
Language
Multifunction display 156
Leather upholstery
Cleaning 329
License plate lamps 159, 398, 402
Light alloy wheels, cleaning 328
Index
Light sensor 380
Lighter see Cigarette lighter
Lighting
Instruments 136
Interior 134
Settings (control system) 159
Trunk 135
Limiting the gear range 172
Limp-Home Mode 179
Load assist 241
Lowering manually 394
Loading terminology 312
Loading the vehicle 286
Lock buttons 38
Door handle (KEYLESS-GO*) 64
Trunk (KEYLESS-GO*) 110
Locking the vehicle 60
In an emergency 393
Low beam headlamps 55, 128, 398
Replacing bulbs 400
Lowering
Load assist manually 394
Roll bar 82
Luggage compartment, rear 237
Luggage cover 205
Messages in display 387
Lumbar support adjustment 121
M
Main fuse box 425, 426
Maintenance
Calling up maintenance service
indicator display 320
Clearing maintenance service indicator
message 319
Maintenance service indicator
message 319
Maintenance service term
exceeded 320
Resetting maintenance service
indicator 321
Maintenance service
When due 319
Maintenance service indicator 319
Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) 319
Malfunction memory 152
Calling up 152
Clearing 153
Manual operation
Interior lighting control 135
Locking the vehicle 393
Lowering load assist 394
Unlocking storage
compartments 392
Unlocking the driver’s door 391
Unlocking the trunk 392
Manual shift program SL 55 AMG and
SL 65 AMG 177
Massage function 122
Maximum cooling MAXCOOL 190
Maximum inflation pressure 313
Maximum load rating 313
Maximum loaded vehicle weight 313
Menus 141
AMG 146
AUDIO 149
Distronic* 151
NAV 151
Standard display 145
TEL* 165
Trip computer 163
Vehicle status message memory 152
Menus see Control system menus
Miles/kilometers in speedometer 156
461
Index
Minimum distance (Parktronic*) 230
Mirrors 47, 180
Adjusting interior rear view mirror 48
Exterior rear view mirrors 48
Misfiring 59
MOE tires* see MOExtended system*
MOExtended system* 301, 413
MOExtended tires* 439
MON 272
Mph or km/h in speedometer 156
Multifunction display 139
Displaying gear range 173
Left display field 27
Right display field 29
Selecting language 156
Standard display 139
Multifunction display messages
ABC 349
ABS 351, 352
Battery 366
Brake pads 366
Brake system 370
CHECK ENGINE 374
Coolant 371
Coolant level 373
Display malfunction 374
462
Doors 374
Easy-entry/exit feature 375
Electro-hydraulic brake system 367,
368
Front passenger front air bag 358
Hood 377
Luggage cover 387
Restraint systems 361
Roll bar 384
SmartKey 378
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 379
SRS 361
Tele Aid 384
Telephone* 384
Tires 385
Trunk 387
Washer fluid 387
Multifunction steering wheel 30, 140
Buttons 140
N
Navigation system
Operating 151
Night security illumination 160
Normal occupant weight 313
O
Occupant Classification System see OCS
Occupant distribution 313
Occupant safety
Front passenger front air bag off
indicator lamp 76
OCS 72
SRS 66
OCS 72
Self-test 76
Odometer, main 27
Oil
Adding 278
Consumption 275
Oil dipstick 278
Oil see Engine oil
One-touch gearshifting 174
Canceling gear range limit 175
Downshifting 174
Upshifting 175
Ornamental moldings 325
Overdue maintenance service 320
Overhead control panel 33
Overspeed range 138
Index
P
Paintwork code see Certification label
Panic alarm 86
Panic button on SmartKey 86
Panorama roof*
Sunshade 208
Sunshade closing 208
Sunshade opening 208
Parcel net
In front passenger footwell 236
Parcel net in trunk 237
Parking 263
Parking assistance (Parktronic*) 228
Parking brake
Engaging 61
Releasing 54
Parking brake pedal 25
Parking lamps 398
Switching on 128
Parktronic* 32, 228
Activating 231
Cleaning system sensors 326
Malfunctioning 231
Minimum distance 230
Range 229
Rear sensors 230
System sensors 326
Warning indicators 25, 230
Parktronic* deactivation switch 32
Parts service 428
PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp see
Front passenger front air bag off
indicator lamp
Passenger side
Front air bag 72
Pedals 259
Phone book* 166
Loading 167
Quick search 167
Phone number*
Dialing 166
Redialing 167
Plastic parts, cleaning 328
Poly-V-belt drive
Layout 432
Potential problems associated with underinflated and overinflated tires 301
Power assistance 260
Power closing assist for trunk lid 118
Power outlet 242
Power seat
Adjusting backrest tilt 44
Adjusting head restraint height 44
Adjusting head restraint tilt 44
Adjusting seat cushion depth 44
Adjusting seat cushion tilt 44
Adjusting seat height 44
Power windows 196
Cleaning 326
Closing with KEYLESS-GO* 198
Side windows 196
Synchronizing 198
Problems while driving 59
Production options weight 313
Program mode selector switch
Automatic transmission 32, 173
PSI 313
PULSE function (Massage function) 122
Q
Quick search
Phone book*
167
463
Index
R
RACETIMER see Control system menus,
AMG menu
Radio
Operating 149
Satellite 150
Selecting station 149
Radio transmitters
Control and operation 268
Range (distance to empty)
Calling up 165
Reading lamp 33
Rear lamps see Tail lamps
Rear luggage compartment 237
Rear view mirrors see Mirrors
Recommended inflation pressure 313
Redial memory 167
Refueling 271
Regular checks 272
Regular driving style 228
Remote
Trunk opening/closing* switch 114
Remote trunk opening switch 112
Remote trunk opening/closing*
switch 113
464
Replacing
Batteries (SmartKey) 395
High beam bulbs 400
Low beam bulbs 400
Rear lamp bulbs 398, 402
Wiper blades 403
Reset button 27
Resetting
All functions (control system) 153
Fuel consumption statistics 164
Trip odometer 137
Restraint systems 66
Emergency Tensioning Device
(ETD) 81
Messages in the multifunction
display 361
Seat belts 66, 77
Resume function
Cruise control 212
Distronic* 220
Retractable hardtop
Closing (SmartKey) 201
Closing (switch) 200
Convenience feature 201
Locking after raising/lowering 202
Opening (SmartKey) 201
Opening (switch) 200
Problems when operating 203
Summer opening feature 201
Rim 313
Roll bar 81
Lowering 82
Messages in display 384
Raising 82
Warning lamp 29
Roll bar buttons 32
RON 272
Rubber parts, cleaning 328
Run Flat Indicator (Canada only) 293
S
Satellite radio 150
Seat belt force limiter 81
Seat belts 49, 66, 77
Cleaning 329
Messages in the multifunction
display 361
Warning lamp 341
Seat heating
Switching on 123
Seat ventilation* 125
Switching on 125
Index
Seating capacity 287
Seats
Adjusting height 43
Adjusting lumbar support 122
Adjusting shoulder support 122
Heating 123
Massage function 122
Moving 121
Self-test
OCS 76
Service
Basic service (Service A) 319
Batteries 414
Extended service (Service B) 319
Types 319
Service life (tires) 284
Service System see Maintenance
Settings
Clock 157
Convenience functions 162
Cruise control 212
Daytime running lamp mode 159
Interior lighting delayed
switch-off 161
Lamps and lighting
(control system) 159
Language, multifunction display 157
Locator lighting 160
Miles/kilometers in
speedometer 156
Night security illumination 160
Resetting all (control system) 153
Selective (SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*) 109
Selective (SmartKey) 104
Speedometer display mode 156
Time 157
Units in speedometer 156
Shifting
Gear selector lever 168
Gear selector lever positions 170
Into optimal gear range (Automatic
transmission) 175
Shoulder support
Seat adjustment 122
Side marker lamps 398
Cleaning lenses 325
Side windows
Automatic closing 198
Automatic opening 197
Closing 196, 197
Closing fully 198
Closing with KEYLESS-GO* 198
Express-close 198
Express-open 197
Opening 196, 197
Opening fully 197
Stopping 198
Synchronizing power windows 198
Sidewall 313
SmartKey 102
Batteries 395
Checking the batteries 105
Closing retractable hardtop 201
Global locking 103, 104
Global unlocking 103
Loss of 105
Positions in starter switch 40
Restoring factory settings 104, 109
Selective setting 104
Starter switch positions 40
Starting the engine 52
Turning off the engine 62
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
Checking the batteries 110
Global locking 108, 109
Global unlocking 108
Locking 110
465
Index
Loss of 110
Messages in display 379
Reprogramming 109
Selective setting 109
Unlocking 106
Snow chains 318
Spare fuses 424
Spare fuses see Vehicle tool kit
Spare tire see Spare wheel 405
Spare wheel 388, 389, 405, 440
Collapsible tire 410, 440
Inflating collapsible tire 410
Tire inflation pressure 410
Speed settings
Cruise control 212
Speedometer 27
Setting units 156
Sporty driving style 228
SRS
Indicator lamp 342
Messages in the multifunction
display 361
Standing lamps 128, 398
Standing water
Driving instructions 267
Starter battery 281, 414
466
Starter switch 25, 40
Starter switch positions 39
Starting difficulties 53
Starting position 40
Starting the engine
With the SmartKey 52
With the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* 53
Steering column
In/out adjustment 46
Length adjustment 46
Up/down adjustment 46
Steering wheel
Adjusting 45
Buttons 30
Cleaning 328
Heating* 240
Height adjustment 46
Steering wheel adjustment lever 25
Steering wheel gearshift control* 175
Stopping
Windows 198
Storage compartment
Center console 234
Storage compartments 233
Armrest 234
Cup holder 238
Glove box 233
In door 233
Locking compartments
separately 235
Locking storage compartments
Parcel net 236
Rear 235
Seats 234
Storage tray 234
Unlocking compartments
separately 236
Unlocking storage
compartments 236, 392
Ventilated glove box 195
Storing tires 285
Submenus 143
Convenience 162
Instrument cluster 156, 157
Lighting 159
Selecting 154
Settings menus 154
Time 157
Vehicle 162
235
Index
Submenus see Control system submenus
Summer opening feature 201
Sun blind see Sunshade
Sun visors 182
Sunshade 208
Closing 208
Opening 208
Suspension tuning
For regular driving style 228
For sporty driving style 228
Suspension tuning (ABC) 225
Switching on headlamps 55
Symbol
Distance warning function* 217
Synchronizing
ESP® 355
Power windows 198
Synchronizing time with head unit 157
T
Tachometer 29, 138
Tail lamps 398, 402
Cleaning lenses 325
Technical data
Electrical system 441
Main dimensions 442
Rims and tires 435
Weights 443
Windshield and headlamp washer
system 452
Tele Aid 244
Emergency calls 245
Information 248
Initiating an emergency call
manually 246
Messages in display 384
Roadside Assistance 247
SOS button 33, 246
Tele Aid system 244
Telephone* 30, 243
Answering a call 166
Dialing 166
Ending a call 167
Loading phone book* 167
Messages in display 384
Operating 165
Redialing 167
Telephones and two-way radios 268
Temperature
Outside temperature indicator 138
Sensor, Interior 33
Tires 292
Tightening torque 412
Time
Settings (control system) 157
TIN 314
Tire
Vehicle maximum load on 314
Tire and Loading Information 287
Tire and loading terminology 312
Tire care and maintenance 284
Tire Identification Number see TIN
Tire inflation pressure
Checking 273, 291, 292
Checking tire pressure electronically
with the Advanced Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (Advanced
TPMS)*, (Canada only) 298
Tire inflation pressure see the placard on
the fuel filler flap
Tire inspection 284
Tire load rating 314
Tire ply composition and material
used 314
Tire speed rating 265, 304, 314
Tire terminology 312
Tire traction 265
467
Index
Tires 283
Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (Advanced TPMS)*,
(Canada only) 298
Cleaning 285
Direction of rotation 286
Driving instructions 263
Low tire pressure telltale 343
Messages in display 385
Messages in the multifunction
display 364
MOExtended* 413
Retreads 283
Rims and tires 435
Rotating 315
Run Flat Indicator 293
Service life 284
Temperature 292, 311
TPMS malfunction telltale 343
Tread depth 285, 317
Wear pattern 315
Winter 316
Tools 388
Tow-away alarm 98
Tow-away alarm switch 32
468
Towing eye bolt (vehicle tool kit)
Installing 423
Towing eye bolt see Vehicle tool kit
Towing the vehicle 421
TPMS (USA only) 295
Traction 91, 174, 314
Transmission see Automatic transmission
Tread 314
Tread depth 285
Treadwear indicators 314
Trip computer 163
Trip odometer 27
Resetting 137
Trunk
Closing the lid 113
Lighting 135
Load assist 241
Lock button (KEYLESS-GO*) 110
Messages in display 387
Opening from inside vehicle 111
Opening/closing system* 113, 114
Parcel net 237
Power closing assist for trunk lid 118
Unlocking 111
Unlocking (KEYLESS-GO*) 111
Unlocking in an emergency 392
Unlocking separately 111
Valet locking 117
Trunk lid
Opening 112
Turn signal lamps
Cleaning lenses 325
Replacing bulbs 398, 401
Turn signals 25, 56
Exterior rear view mirrors 398, 401
Front bulbs 398
Indicator lamps 27
Rear bulbs 398
Turning off the engine 62
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards 314
Units
Setting speedometer units
Unlocking the vehicle 38
In an emergency 391
Upholstery
Cleaning 329
Upshifting 175
156
Index
V
Vehicle
Locking 31
Locking in an emergency 393
Minimum distance (Parktronic*) 230
Towing 421
Unlocking 31
Unlocking in an emergency 391
Vehicle capacity weight 314
Vehicle care
Leather upholstery 329
Ornamental moldings 325
Upholstery 329
Wood trims 329
Vehicle Identification Number see VIN
Vehicle level
Changing 227
Setting 227
Vehicle level control (ABC) 225
Vehicle level control switch 32
Vehicle lighting
Checking 273
Vehicle loading terminology 312
Vehicle maximum load on the tire 314
Vehicle status messages 347
Vehicle tool kit 388
VIN 431
Voice control system*
25
W
Warning sounds
Distance warning function* 224
Distronic* 216
Drivers seat belts 80
Parking brake 55
Warranty coverage 429
Washing the vehicle 324
Wear pattern (tires) 315
Wheel bolts
Tightening torque 412
Wheel change 405
Tightening torque 412
Wheel wrench 389
Wheels
Tires and wheels 283
Wind screen 204
Installing 204
Removing 205
Windows see Side windows
Windows, cleaning 326
Windshield
Cleaning wiper blades 326
Defogging 191
Refilling washer fluid 282
Washer fluid 58, 282
Washer system 282
Windshield and headlamp washer
system 452
Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning
system 272, 273
Windshield washer fluid 58
Filler neck 282
Messages in display 387
Mixing ratio 452
Refilling 282
Windshield wipers 25, 57
Fast wiper speed 57
Intermittent wiping 57
Replacing wiper blades 403
Wiping with windshield washer
fluid 58
Winter driving
Snow chains 318
Tires 316
Winter driving instructions 266
Winter tires 316
Wood trims
Cleaning 329
469
470
Service and Literature
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has trained technicians and Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts to service your vehicle properly. For
expert advice and quality service, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. We consider
this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com or www.mercedes-benz.ca.
G
Warning!
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use of
incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury.
If you have any questions about carrying out any type of service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this Operator’s Manual.
Reprinting, translation and copying, even of excerpts, are not permitted without our prior authorization in writing.
Press time February 07, 2006
GSP/TIP
Printed in Germany